2. Store and dispose of hazardous waste in accordance with federal, state, and local requirements. This requirement specifically applies to waste solvents and coatings.
3. Container labels shall show the following:
a. Brand name or product title.
b. CSM's batch number.
c. CSM's manufacture date.
d. CSM's name.
e. Generic material type.
f. Application and mixing instructions.
High-Performance Coatings
09960-11 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/09960 (DraftFinal) g. Hazardous material identification label.
h. Shelf life expiration date.
i. Color.
j. Mixing and reducing instructions.
4. Clearly mark containers to indicate safety hazards associated with the use of or exposure to materials.
1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Apply coatings to dry surfaces.
1. Surface moisture: Comply with manufacturer's requirements or as specified in this Section.
a. Plaster and gypsum wallboard: 12 percent.
b. Masonry and concrete block: 12 percent.
c. Interior located wood: 15 percent.
d. Concrete floors: Moisture vapor transmission rate of no more than
3.0 pounds per 1,000 square feet per 24 hours in accordance with ASTM F1869 or relative humidity no greater than 80 percent if tested in accordance with ASTM F2170 unless the CSM's recommendations are more restrictive.
e. Concrete structures: Negative results from Plastic Sheet Test in accordance with ASTM D4263, and maximum of 80 percent relative humidity in accordance with ASTM F2170.
B. Do not apply coatings when the following conditions exist. If such conditions exist, provide containment, covers, environmental controls, and other necessary measures.
1. During rainy, misty, or damp weather, or to surfaces with frost or condensation.
2. When the surface temperature is below 10 degrees Fahrenheit above the dew point.
3. When ambient or surface temperature:
a. Is less than 55 degrees Fahrenheit unless manufacturer allows a lower temperature.
b. Is less than 65 degrees Fahrenheit for clear finishes unless manufacturer allows a lower temperature.
c. Exceeds 90 degrees Fahrenheit unless manufacturer allows a higher temperature.
d. Exceeds manufacturer's recommendation.
4. When relative humidity is higher than 85 percent.
5. Under dusty or adverse environmental conditions.
6. When light on surfaces measures less than 15 foot-candles.
7. When wind speed exceeds 15 miles per hour.
C. Apply coating only under evaporation conditions rather than condensation.
1. Use dehumidification equipment, fans, and/or heaters inside enclosed areas to maintain required atmospheric and surface temperature requirements for proper coating application and cure.
2. Measure and record relative humidity and air and surface temperatures at the start and end of each shift to confirm proper humidity and temperature levels inside the work area.
a. Submit test results.
High-Performance Coatings
09960-12 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/09960 (DraftFinal) D. Continuously ventilate, dehumidify, and heat enclosed spaces with high humidity during surface preparation, coating application, and curing.
1. Maintain minimum air temperature of 55 degrees Fahrenheit and 10 degrees Fahrenheit above the dew point.
2. Maintain dew point of at least 10 degrees Fahrenheit less than the temperature of the coldest part of the structure where work is performed.
3. Reduce dew point temperature in conditioned space by at least 10 degrees Fahrenheit within 20 minutes.
4. Seal work areas and maintain positive pressure per dehumidification equipment supplier's recommendations.
5. Maintain these conditions before, during, and after application to ensure proper adhesion and cure of coatings for no less than:
a. Entire curing period.
b. 8 hours after coating.
E. Systems:
1. Site electrical power availability as specified in Section 01500 - Temporary Facilities and Controls.
2. Internal combustion engine generators may be used.
a. Obtain required permits and provide air pollution and noise control devices on equipment as required by permitting agencies require. b. Comply with state, federal, and local fire and explosion protection measures when locating and operating generator.
c. Locate engine generator outside hazardous classified areas in accordance with NFPA 820.
d. Provide daily fuel service for generator for duration of use.
3. Dehumidification:
a. Provide desiccant or refrigeration drying.
b. Use only desiccant types with a rotary desiccant wheel capable of continuous operation.
c. Liquid, granular, or loose lithium chloride drying systems are not acceptable.
4. Heating:
a. Use electric, indirect combustion, or steam coil.
b. Direct-fired combustion heaters are not acceptable heat sources during abrasive blasting, coating application, or coating cure.
5. Filters:
a. Use a filtration system for dust removal designed to not interfere with dehumidification equipment’s ability to control dew point and relative humidity inside the reservoir.
b. Do not allow air from the working area or dust filtration equipment to recirculate through thein dehumidifier during coating application or when solvent vapors are present.
6. Design and Submittals:
a. Prepare and submit dehumidification and heating plan, including all equipment and operating procedures.
b. Suppliers of services and equipment shall have at least 3 years of experience in similar applications.
F. Provide containment and ventilation system components in accordance with SSPC-Guide 6, Level 3 and as required for hazardous materials.
High-Performance Coatings
09960-13 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/09960 (DraftFinal)
1.08 MAINTENANCE
A. Provide table of products applied organized by surface type. List coating manufacturer, color, color formulation, distributor name, telephone number, and address.
B. Provide extra materials:
1. Minimum 1 gallon of each type and color of coating applied or provide additional quantities if specified in the Contract Documents:
a. Deliver unopened factory-labeled cans when manufacturer packages material in gallon cans.
b. Deliver material in new gallon containers, properly sealed and identified with permanently affixed, durable, printed labels indicating brand, type, and color, when manufacturer does not package material in gallon cans, deliver.
1.09 CTR RESPONSIBILITIES
A. General:
1. Attend pre-installation conference.
2. Perform onsite application training.
3. Periodically inspect coating system application.
B. Coating system installation training:
1. Provide a minimum of 8 hours of classroom and off-site training for application personnel and supervisory personnel in one of the following ways:
a. Train a minimum of 2 supervisory personnel and 2 application personnel. b. Submit a letter from the CSM stating that CSM approves the supervisory and application personnel, listed by name and responsibility, and no additional training is required.
2. CTR can train up to 14 application personnel and 3 supervisory personnel at a time.
3. Minimum training requirements:
a. Explain in detail the mixing, application, curing, and termination requirements.
b. Provide hands-on demonstration of coating system mixing. c. Explain in detail the ambient condition requirements for temperature and humidity.
d. Explain in detail the surface preparation requirements. e. Explain in detail the re-coat times, cure times, and related ambient condition requirements.
f. Write a letter stating that training was satisfactorily completed by the personnel, listed by name and responsibility.
4. Provide special training as specified in the Coating Detail Sheets.
C. Coating system inspection:
1. CTR inspection is in addition to the CSA's inspection as specified in this Section.
2. Be on-site to oversee:
a. Coating application at least once a week.
b. End of surface preparation.
c. During coating application.
High-Performance Coatings
09960-14 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/09960 (DraftFinal) d. Post-cure inspection.
3. Routinely inspect and verify in writing that application personnel have successfully performed surface preparation, filler/surfacer application, coating system application, and Quality Control Inspection in accordance with this Section and to warrantable quality.
4. Perform the following activities to confirm conformance with the specifications:
a. Inspect ambient conditions during coating system installation at Hold Points for conformance with the specified requirements. b. Inspect each coated surface type and coating system applied to verify the following:
1) Cleanliness.
2) Surface pH for concrete substrates.
3) Confirm surface preparation of substrates where coating system will terminate or will be applied for conformance to the specified application criteria.
c. Verify surface profile of substrates by completing the following:
1) Inspect preparation and application of coating detail treatment at terminations, transitions, metal embedments in concrete, and joints and cracks in substrates.
2) Inspect application of filler/surfacer materials for concrete and masonry substrates.
3) Verify proper mixing of coating materials.
4) Inspect application of primers and finish coats, including wet and dry film thickness.
5) Inspect coating systems for proper cure times and conditions. d. Review adhesion testing of cured coating systems.
e. Review coating system continuity testing.
f. Inspect and record representative-localized repairs. g. Conduct final review of completed coating system installation. h. Prepare and submit site visit reports after each site visit to document that the coating work is in accordance with the CSM’s Recommendations.
D. Final report:
1. Prepare a final report, after coating work ends, summarizing each day’s test data, observations, drawings, and photographs.
a. Include substrate conditions, ambient conditions, and application procedures observed during the CTR's site visits.
b. Include a statement that completed work was performed in accordance with the requirements of the CSM’s recommendations.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
A. Coating materials shall be formulated for environments encountered in water and wastewater treatment processes.
B. Coating materials that come in contact with water distributed as potable water shall be certified in accordance with NSF 61.
High-Performance Coatings
09960-15 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/09960 (DraftFinal)
2.02 MATERIALS
A. General:
1. Product requirements: As specified in the Agreement and Contract RFP in Volumes 1 and 2.
2.03 COATING SYSTEMS IDENTIFICATION
A. Naming conventions: Coating Systems Identifications contain the elements defined in Table 1.
Table 1. Coating System Identification Elements
First Element - Second Element - Third Element -
Fourth Element
(optional)
3 or 4 alpha characters 1-3 alpha characters 1 number 3 or 4 alpha characters Coating Type Substrate System Number Additional Substrate or Special Condition
Example: EPX - C - 6 - BSC
1. First element identifies the coating type using the following abbreviations:
a. ACR: Acrylic.
b. CTE: Coal tar epoxy.
c. ELA: Elastomeric acrylic.
d. EPU: Epoxy-polyurethane.
e. EPX: Epoxy.
f. POL: Polyurethane.
g. SIL: Silicone.
h. SILX: Siloxane or silane.
i. VE: Vinyl ester.
2. Second element identifies the substrate using the following abbreviations:
a. C: Concrete or masonry.
b. F: Concrete flooring.
c. FRP: Fiber-reinforced plastic.
d. GM: Galvanized metal.
e. M: Metal.
f. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride, chlorinated polyvinyl chloride.
3. Third element identifies the sequential system number. a. For example, EPX-C-2 is the second standard epoxy coating system for concrete substrates.
4. Fourth element is optional and identifies the additional substrate or special condition with the following abbreviations:
a. PWS: Potable water service applications (NSF-61 approved). b. BSC: Biogenic sulfide corrosion-resistant applications in wastewater. c. BG: Below grade or buried.
d. OZ: Organic zinc primer, epoxy polyurethane system.
e. SC: Secondary containment.
2.04 PRODUCTS FOR COATING SYSTEMS
A. Products: As specified in Attachment B - Coating Detail Sheets.
High-Performance Coatings
09960-16 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/09960 (DraftFinal) B. Cleaning solvents:
1. Requirements for solvent wash, solvent wipe, or cleaner used, including, but not limited to, those used for surface preparation in accordance with SSPC-SP 1:
a. Emulsifying type.
b. Containing no phosphates.
c. Biodegradable.
d. Does not damage zinc.
e. Compatible with the specified primer.
f. Complying with applicable air-quality control board requirements.
2. Use clean white cloths and clean fluids in solvent cleaning.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL PROTECTION REQUIREMENTS
A. Protect adjacent coated surfaces from coatings and damage associated with coating work. Repair damage resulting from inadequate or unsuitable protection.
B. Use drop cloths and other coverings to protect adjacent surfaces not to be coated against spatter and droppings.
C. Mask off surfaces of items not to be coated or remove items from area.
D. Furnish and deploy sufficient drop cloths, shields, and protective equipment to prevent spray or droppings from fouling surfaces not being coated and, in particular, surfaces within storage and preparation areas.
E. Place coating waste, cloths, and material that may pose a fire hazard in closed metal containers and remove daily from site.
F. Remove electrical plates, surface hardware, fittings, and fasteners before coating application.
1. Carefully store, clean, and replace items after completing coating in each area.
2. Do not use solvent or degreasers to clean hardware that may remove permanent lacquer finishes.
G. Erect and maintain protective enclosures in accordance with SSPC-Guide 6.
H. Protect the following surfaces from abrasive blasting by masking or by other means:
1. Threaded portions of valve and gate stems, grease fittings, and identification plates.
2. Machined surfaces for sliding contact.
3. Surfaces to be assembled against gaskets.
4. Surfaces of shafting where sprockets will be fit.
5. Surfaces of shafting where bearings will be fit.
6. Machined bronze surfaces, including slide gates.
7. Cadmium-plated items, except cadmium-plated, zinc-plated, or sherardized fasteners used to assemble equipment requiring abrasive blasting.
8. Galvanized items, unless scheduled to be coated.
High-Performance Coatings
09960-17 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/09960 (DraftFinal) I. Protect installed equipment, mechanical drives, and adjacent coated equipment from abrasive blasting to prevent damage caused by spent abrasive blast media, dust, or dirt entering such equipment.
J. Schedule cleaning and coating to keep dust and spray from the cleaning process from falling on wet, newly coated surfaces.
1. Whenever possible, coordinate with other trades and complete surface preparation and coating work before installing hardware, hardware accessories, nameplates, data tags, electrical fixtures, and similar uncoated items that will be in contact with coated surfaces. Mask machined surfaces, sprinkler heads, and other small items that will not be coated.
2. After completing coating, reinstall removed items.
3. Disconnect and move equipment adjacent to walls to clean and coat equipment and walls. Replace and reconnect equipment after coating.
3.02 GENERAL SURFACE PREPARATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Prepare surfaces in accordance with CSM's instructions unless more stringent requirements are specified in this Section.
B. Coating detail sheets in Attachment B - Coating Detail Sheets include additional surface preparation requirements.
C. Follow more stringent requirement if information conflicts.
D. Where required by the Owner’s representative, a NACE International certified coatings inspector, provided by the Engineer, will inspect and approve surfaces to be coated before applying a coating.
1. CSA shall coordinate coating inspections.
a. Identify coating inspection Hold Points during the pre-installation conference.
b. Provide at least 2 days' notice before inspection.
2. Correct surface defects identified by the inspector at no additional cost to the Owner.
3.03 MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT PREPARATION
A. Identify equipment, ducting, piping, and conduit as specified in Section 15050 - Common Work Results for Mechanical Equipment, Section 15076 - Pipe Identification, and Section 16075 - Identification for Electrical Systems.
B. Remove grilles, covers, and access panels for mechanical and electrical system and coat separately.
C. Prepare and finish coat equipment primed by the manufacturer using specified intermediate and top coats, as applicable, and color selected by the Owner.
D. Prepare, prime, and coat both insulated and bare pipes, conduits, boxes, insulated and bare ducts, hangers, brackets, collars, and supports, except where items are covered with material not requiring coating, or with a prefinished coating.
High-Performance Coatings
09960-18 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/09960 (DraftFinal) E. Replace identification markings on mechanical or electrical equipment when coated over or spattered.
F. Prepare and coat interior surfaces of air ducts and convector and baseboard heating cabinets visible through grilles and louvers with 1 coat of flat black paint to limit of sight line.
G. Prepare and coat dampers exposed immediately behind louvers, grilles, and convector and baseboard heating cabinets to match face panels.
H. Prepare and coat exposed conduit and appurtenances occurring in finished areas with color and texture to match adjacent surfaces.
I. Prepare and coat sides' front, back, and edges of plywood backboards for electrical equipment before installing backboards and mounting equipment on them.
J. Color code equipment, piping, conduit, and exposed ductwork and apply color banding and identification, such as flow arrows, naming, and numbering, in accordance with the Contract Documents.
3.04 CLEANING OF NEW AND PREVIOUSLY COATED OR NEW SURFACES A. Utilize cleaning agent to remove soluble salts, such as chlorides, from concrete and metal surfaces:
1. Cleaning agent: Biodegradable non-flammable and containing no VOC.
2. Manufacturers: The following or equal:
a. CHLOR*RID International, Inc.
1) Complete soluble salt removal with steam or warm water cleaning.
3. Steam clean and degrease surfaces to be coated to remove oils and grease.
4. Clean surfaces with decontamination agent in conjunction with abrasive blast cleaning, steam cleaning, high-pressure washing, or hand washing, as approved by the CTR and the Engineer.
5. Test cleaned surfaces to ensure removal of soluble salts. Carry out additional cleaning as needed.
6. Complete final surface preparation before applying new coating system in strict accordance with CSM's printed instructions.
3.05 BLAST CLEANING
A. Surface preparation requirements:
1. Do not reuse spent blast abrasive.
2. Ensure that filter compressed air used for blast cleaning is free of condensed water and oil.
a. Clean moisture traps at least once every 4 hours or more frequently, as required, to prevent moisture from entering the abrasive blasting equipment air supply.
b. Check blast air for moisture and oil after each cleaning in accordance with ASTM D4285.
3. Install oil separators just downstream of compressor discharge valves and at the discharge point of blast pot discharges. Check separators on the same frequency as the moisture traps.
High-Performance Coatings
09960-19 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/09960 (DraftFinal)
4. Keep regulators, gauges, filters, and separators on compressor air lines to blasting nozzles operational at all times.
5. Install an air dryer or desiccant filter drying unit to dry the compressed air before blast pot connections. Use and maintain the dryer throughout surface preparation work.
6. Use a venturi-type, or other high velocity-type, abrasive blast nozzles supplied with at least 100 pounds per square inch gauge air pressure at the nozzle and enough volume to obtain appropriate blast cleaning production rates and surface cleanliness.
7. Provide airborne particulate evacuation and filtering that meets OSHA safety standards. Maintain optimal visibility both to clean and provide the specified surface profile and to allow inspection of the substrate during surface preparation work.
8. If prepared and cleaned metallic substrates become contaminated between final surface preparation work and coating system application, or if the prepared substrate darkens or changes color, re-clean by water blasting, or abrasive blast cleaning as appropriate until the specified degree of cleanliness is restored.
B. Water jetting or water blasting:
1. Use water jetting or water blasting for recoating or relining where an adequate surface profile exists.
2. Perform water jetting or water blasting in accordance with SSPC-SP 13 and SSPC-WJ-1, WJ-2, WJ-3, WJ-4.
3.06 PREPARATION REQUIREMENTS FOR CONCRETE SURFACES
A. Cure for at least 28 days before coating.
B. Remove degraded concrete using abrasive blast cleaning or high or ultra-high-pressure water jetting, chipping, or other abrading tools until achieving a sound, clean substrate. Remove bruised or cracked concrete.
C. Prepare substrate cracks and areas requiring resurfacing; perform detail treatment, including, but not limited to, terminating edges in accordance with the CSM's recommendations, and as indicated on the Drawings.
1. Prepare concrete surfaces in accordance with SSPC-SP 13.
D. Prepare concrete surfaces in accordance with SSPC-SP 13.
1. Inspect concrete surfaces to select appropriate surface preparation method to provide a suitable substrate for the specified coating system.
2. Use blast cleaning or other means to expose the complete perimeter of air voids or bug holes. Do not leave shelled over, hidden air voids beneath the exposed concrete surface.
3. Repair concrete defects and physical damage.
4. Clean concrete surfaces of dust, mortar, formwork, fins, loose concrete particles, form release materials, oil, and grease.
5. Fill voids to provide surface as specified in Section 03366 - Concrete Finishes.
High-Performance Coatings
09960-20 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/09960 (DraftFinal) E. Provide clean substrate visually free of calcium sulfate, loose, coarse, or fine aggregate, laitance, loose hydrated cement paste, and otherwise harmful substances.
1. Confirm concrete surface minimum pH of 9.0 with surface pH testing.
2. If after surface preparation the surface pH remains below 9.0, perform additional water blasting, cleaning, or abrasive blast cleaning until additional pH testing indicates an acceptable pH level.
F. Prepare concrete surface for coating in accordance with SSPC-SP 13.
1. Provide ICRI 310.2 minimum No. 3 concrete surface profile (CSP) or as specified on Coating Detail Sheets.
2. Evaluate profile of the prepared concrete using ICRI 310.2 surface profile replicas.
G. Blast clean cementitious repair mortars or grouts to the same profile and degree of cleanliness requirements required for concrete substrates.
H. Blast clean polymer-based surfacers or waterborne modified cementitious surfaces only if they have exceeded the CSM's recommended recoat time.
I. Vacuum concrete surfaces before coating application, leaving a dust free, sound concrete substrate.
1. Thoroughly clean concrete surfaces to be coated to remove loose dirt and spent abrasive.
2. Remove debris produced by blast cleaning from the structures to be coated, and legally dispose of it off-site.
J. Test moisture content of concrete to be coated:
1. Conduct ASTM D4263 plastic sheet test at least once for every 500 square feet of surface area to be coated.
a. Any moisture on plastic sheet after test period constitutes a non-acceptable test, and the concrete must be dried further.
2. Conduct ASTM F1869 test at least once for every 1,000 square feet of concrete floor surface area to be coated.
3. Conduct ASTM F2170 one relative humidity moisture test at least once for each 500 square feet of non-floor concrete surface area where the opposite side is exposed to soil or water.
a. Waterproof surfaces exposed to soil or water.
4. Comply with specified minimum moisture content and CSM’s written recommendations for moisture vapor transmission rates or relative humidity values.
K. Masonry surfaces:
1. Cure for at least 28 days before coating.
2. Prepare masonry surfaces to remove chalk, laitance, loose dirt, dried mortar splatter, dust, peeling, or loose existing coatings, or otherwise deleterious substances to leave a clean, sound substrate.
3. Wash and scrub masonry surfaces with clear water. Do not use muriatic acid.
4. Seal or fill masonry surfaces with a sealer or block filler compatible with the specified primer after cleaning.
High-Performance Coatings
09960-21 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/09960 (DraftFinal)
5. Confirm that masonry surfaces are dry before coating application. a. If using pressure washing or low-pressure water blast cleaning for preparation, allow the masonry to dry for at least 5 days under dry weather conditions or until the minimum ambient temperature is 70 degrees Fahrenheit before coating.
3.07 GENERAL PREPARATION REQUIREMENTS FOR METALLIC SURFACES A. Remove rust, scale, and welding slag and spatter.
1. Remove and grind smooth excessive weld material and weld spatter on metal surfaces before blast cleaning in accordance with NACE SP0178, Appendix C, Level C.
2. Grind sharp edges on metal substrate to approximately 1/16-inch radius before abrasive blast cleaning.
B. Prepare metallic surfaces in accordance with applicable portions of surface preparation specifications of the SSPC specified for each coating system.
1. Remove grease and oil in accordance with SSPC-SP 1.
2. Use solvent as recommended by the CSM.
3. Measure profile depth of the surface to be coated in accordance with Method C of ASTM D4417. Select blast particle size and gradation to produce the specified surface profile.
4. Constantly monitor and maintain ambient environmental conditions to ensure cleanliness and that no “rust back” occurs before coating material application.
C. Prepare metallic surfaces by blast cleaning in accordance with SSPC-VIS 1 (ASTM D2200). Prepare abrasive blast representative areas for the Owner's representative to inspect on the first day of cleaning.
D. Unless otherwise specified, the requirements for blast cleaning steel, ductile iron, and stainless steel substrates are as follows:
1. Ferrous metal surfaces not to be submerged: Abrasive blast in accordance with SSPC-SP 10 unless blasting may damage adjacent surfaces, is prohibited, or is specified otherwise. Where abrasive blasting is not possible, clean surfaces to bare metal with power tools in accordance with SSPC-SP 11.
2. Ferrous metal surfaces to be submerged: Abrasive blast in accordance with SSPC-SP 5, unless specified otherwise, to clean and provide roughened surface profile with a depth between 2 and 4 mils.
3. Remove traces of grit, dust, dirt, rust scale, friable material, loose corrosion products, or embedded abrasive from substrate before coating application.
4. When abrasive blasted surfaces rust or discolor before coating, abrasive blast clean surfaces again.
E. Field preparation of shop-primed surfaces:
1. Smooth welds and prominences with power tools before applying field-applied coatings.
2. Clean and dry shop-primed ferrous metal surfaces and fabricated assemblies before applying field coats.
High-Performance Coatings
09960-22 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/09960 (DraftFinal)
3. Prepare shop epoxy primed surfaces with light abrasive blasting or abrading and then vacuum before applying finish coats.
a. Follow CSM instructions for surface preparation when the primer recoat limit has been exceeded.
4. Non-immersion service: Clean in accordance with SSPC-SP 2 (Hand Tool Cleaning) or SSPC-SP 3 (Power Tool Cleaning) and uniformly roughen.
5. Immersion, BSC, and SC service: Remove shop primer in accordance with SSPC-SP 5 (Near-White Blast Cleaning).
F. Damaged shop primer or rust bleeding:
1. Ferrous metals: Clean in accordance with SSPC-SP 1 (Solvent Cleaning) and spot blast in accordance with SSPC-SP 10 (Near-White Metal Blast Cleaning) to achieve a uniform surface profile between 2.0 and 2.5 mils before recoating.
2. Reject galvanized steel with rust bleeding.
G. Damaged coating: Repair by abrasive blast cleaning surfaces as specified for the coating system; feather to a smooth transition before touching up.
3.08 PREPARATION REQUIREMENTS BY SURFACE TYPE
A. Galvanized steel and non-ferrous metal surfaces:
1. Degrease or solvent clean (SSPC-SP 1) to remove oily residue.
2. Abrasive blast clean in accordance with SSPC-SP 16.
a. If abrasive blast cannot be performed, abrade in accordance with SSPC-SP 3 (Power Tool Cleaning).
3. Apply metal pretreatment within 24 hours before coating galvanized surfaces that cannot be thoroughly abraded, such as bolts, nuts, or preformed channels.
4. Test surface for contaminants using copper sulfate solution.
B. Stainless-steel surfaces:
1. Abrasive blast clean in accordance with SSPC-SP 16 to leave a clean, uniform appearance with surface profile between 1.5 and 2.5 mils.
C. Ductile iron pipe and fittings to be lined or coated: Abrasive blast clean in accordance with NAPF 500-03.
D. Sherardized, aluminum, copper, and bronze surfaces:
1. Abrasive blast clean in accordance with SSPC-SP 16.
2. Prepare in accordance with CSM's instructions.
E. Cadmium-plated, zinc-plated, or sherardized fasteners:
1. Abrasive blast in the same manner as uncoated metal when assembling equipment designated for abrasive blasting.
F. PVC and FRP surfaces:
1. Lightly sand surfaces to be coated.
a. Sand to remove gloss and establish uniform surface profile.
2. Vacuum to remove loose dust, dirt, and other materials.
3. Solvent clean with clean white rags and allow solvent to evaporate completely before applying coating materials.
High-Performance Coatings
09960-23 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/09960 (DraftFinal)
3.09 APPLICATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Apply coatings in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Empty aboveground piping to be coated of contents when applying coatings.
C. Mechanical equipment shop primed by the manufacturer.
1. Pumps and valves: Shop coat with manufacturer's highest quality coating system meeting the project specifications.
a. Provide CTR shop coating reports.
2. Non-immersed equipment: Touch up shop primer, and coat in the field with specified coating system after installation.
a. If project requires equipment removal and reinstallation, complete touch-up coating after final installation.
3. Immersed equipment not shop coated: Remove shop primer before surface preparation and field apply coating.
D. Verify surface preparation immediately before applying coating in accordance with SSPC-SP COM and the SSPC visual standard for the specified surface preparation method.
E. Allow surfaces to dry, except where coating manufacturer requires surface wetting before coating.
F. Wash coat and prime sherardized, aluminum, copper, and bronze surfaces, or prime with manufacturer's recommended special primer.
G. Do not apply coatings to a surface until it has been prepared as specified.
H. Use equipment designed to apply materials specified.
1. Use compressors with moisture traps and filters that remove water and oils from the air.
a. Perform a paper blotter test at the Engineer's request to verify air is sufficiently free of oil and moisture. Do not allow the amount of oil and moisture to exceed CSM-recommended amount.
2. Equip spray equipment with properly sized mechanical agitators, pressure gauges, pressure regulators, and spray nozzles.
I. Where 2 or more coats are required, tint prime coat intermediate coats as necessary to distinguish each coating and to help indicate coverage.
1. Do not use color additives with chromium, lead or lead compounds that hydrogen sulfide, other corrosive gases, might destroy or alter. Apply the specified number of coats.
J. Apply coating by brush, roller, trowel, or spray unless a specific application method is required by coating manufacturer's instructions or these Specifications.
1. Apply primer or first coat by brush to power tool cleaned ferrous surfaces.
2. Brush or spray-apply coats for blast-cleaned ferrous surfaces and subsequent coats for non-blast cleaned ferrous surfaces.
3. After prime coat dries, mark, repair, and retest pinholes and holidays before intermediate or top coats are applied.
High-Performance Coatings
09960-24 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/09960 (DraftFinal) K. Spray application:
1. With a brush, stripe coat edges, welds, corners, nuts, bolts, and difficult-to-reach areas, as necessary, before spray application to ensure specified coating thickness along edges.
2. When using spray application, apply each coat to thickness no greater than recommended in coating manufacturer's instructions.
3. Use airless spray method unless air spray method is required by CSM's instruction or these Specifications.
4. Conduct spray coating under controlled conditions. Protect adjacent construction and property from coating mist, fumes, or overspray.
L. Lightly sand and thoroughly clean surfaces to receive high-gloss finishes unless CSM instructs otherwise.
M. Remove dust on coatings between coats.
N. Shop and field coats:
1. Prime coat: Shop-apply or field-apply prime coats as specified. Use shopapplied primer compatible with the specified field coating system and apply at the minimum dry film thickness recommended by the finish coat CSM. a. Provide datasheets identifying the shop primer to on-site coating application personnel.
b. Perform adhesion tests on the shop primer.
c. Remove and recoat damaged, deteriorated, and poorly applied shop coatings.
d. If shop primer coat meets this Section's requirements, spot prime exposed metal of shop-primed surfaces before spray applying primer over the entire surface.
2. Field coats: Apply field coats with 1 or more prime coats and finish coats to build up coating to dry film thickness specified for the coating system. a. Do not apply finish coats until other work in the area is complete and previous coats are inspected.
3. Adhesion confirmation: Perform adhesion tests after proper coating cure in accordance with ASTM D3359. Demonstrate that:
a. Prime coat adheres to the substrate.
b. Coatings adhere to the prime and intermediate coats. 1) Coating 5 mils or more DFT: Achieve adhesion test result of 5A on immersed surfaces and 4A or better on other surfaces.
2) Coating less than 5 mils DFT: Achieve adhesion test results of 5B on immersed surfaces and 4B or better on other surfaces.
O. Brush, roll, trowel, or spray and back roll coats for concrete and masonry.
P. Plural component coating application:
1. Premix contents of component drums if required by the CSM each day.
2. Before starting application:
a. Verify gauges are working properly.
b. Complete ratio checks.
c. Sample the mix on plastic sheeting to ensure set time is appropriate and complete.
d. Label and retain spray samples. Submit to Engineer when requested.
High-Performance Coatings
09960-25 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/09960 (DraftFinal) Q. Drying and recoating:
1. Provide fans, heating devices, or other means to prevent condensate or dew on substrate surface or between coats and during curing after applying the last coat.
2. Allow each coat to cure or dry thoroughly, in accordance with if required in CSM’s printed instructions, before recoating.
3. Use CSM’s printed instructions and the requirements specified in this Section to determine minimum required drying time.
a. Do not allow excessive drying time or exposure, which may impair bond between coats.
b. Recoat coatings within time limits recommended by CSM. c. If time limits are exceeded, abrasive blast clean and de-gloss clean before applying another coat.
4. If limitations on time between abrasive blasting and coating are not met before attaching components to surfaces that cannot be abrasive blasted, coat components before attachment.
5. Ensure primer and intermediate coats of coating are unscarred and completely integral when applying each succeeding coat.
6. Touch up suction spots between coats and apply additional coats where required to produce finished surface of solid, even color, free of defects.
7. Leave no holidays. Repair holidays in accordance with the requirements on pertinent Coating Detail Sheets or as recommended by the CSM.
8. Sand and feather into a smooth transition and recoat scratched, contaminated, or otherwise damaged coating surfaces so repairs are invisible to the naked eye.
R. Workmanship:
1. Ensure that coated surfaces are free from runs, drips, ridges, waves, laps, and brush marks. Coats shall be applied to produce a smooth, even film of uniform thickness completely coating corners and crevices.
2. Coat surfaces without drops, overspray, dry spray, excessive runs, ridges, waves, holidays, laps, or brush marks.
3. Remove splatter and droppings after coating work is completed.
4. Evenly apply each coat of material and sharply cut to a line created with masking tape or other suitable materials.
5. Avoid over spraying or spattering paint on surfaces not to be coated. Protect glass, hardware, floors, roofs, vehicles, and other adjacent areas and installations by taping, drop cloths, or other suitable measures.
6. When coating complex steel shapes, stripe coat welds, edges of structural steel shapes, metal cut-outs, pits in steel surfaces, or rough surfaces with the primer before overall coating system application.
a. Brush apply stripe coat to ensure proper coverage.
b. Do not stripe coat with spray or roller.
7. Ensure that finish coat, including repairs, has a uniform color and gloss.
S. Coating properties, mixing, and thinning:
1. Thin prime coat and apply as recommended by the CSM. Thinned coating must comply with prevailing air pollution control regulations.
2. If maximum recoat time is exceeded, prepare surface with solvent washing, light abrasive blasting, or other procedures in accordance with CSM’s instructions.
High-Performance Coatings
09960-26 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/09960 (DraftFinal)
3. Allow adequate drying time between coats as instructed by the CSM, adjusted as necessary for the site conditions.
4. Ensure that coatings, when applied, provide a satisfactory film and a smooth even surface. Lightly sand glossy undercoats to provide a surface suitable for proper application and adhesion of subsequent coats. Thoroughly stir and strain coating materials during application and maintain uniform consistency.
5. Mix coatings with 2 or more components in accordance with CSM’s instructions.
6. Where necessary to suit conditions of the surface, temperature, weather, and method of application, thin the coating in accordance with CSM's recommendations.
a. Ensure that volatile organic content (VOC) of the thinned coating complies with prevailing air pollution control regulations.
b. Thin coatings to only what is necessary to obtain proper application characteristics.
c. Use a thinner recommended by the CSM.
T. Film thickness and continuity:
1. Apply coating to the specified thicknesses.
a. Apply additional coats when necessary to achieve specified thicknesses, especially at edges and corners.
2. Verify WFT of the coating system first coat and after applying each subsequent coat.
3. Do not allow the minimum thickness at any point to deviate more than 25 percent from the required average.
4. Do not allow the surface area covered per gallon of coating for various types of surfaces to exceed those recommended by the CSM.
a. Provide coating coverage worksheets listing the maximum and minimum coverage for each unit volume of coating for concrete surfaces.
5. Apply additional coats to achieve the specified dry film thickness if brush or roller application methods cannot achieve the specified film thicknesses per coat.
U. Protecting coated surfaces:
1. Do not handle, work on, or otherwise disturb coated items until the coating is completely dry and hard.
2. After installation, recoat shop-coated surfaces with specified coating system as necessary to match surrounding surfaces, and to coordinate with the specified color identification requirements.
V. Special requirements:
1. Before erection, apply all but the final finish coat to interior surfaces of roof plates, roof rafters and supports, pipe hangers, piping in contact with hangers, and contact surfaces inaccessible after assembly. Apply final coat after erection.
2. Coat structural slip-critical connections and high strength bolts and nuts after erection.
3. Areas damaged during erection:
a. Prepare surface for spot repairs as specified for the coating system. b. Recoat with prime coat before applying subsequent coats. c. Touch up surfaces after installation.
d. Clean and dry surfaces to be coated at time of application.
High-Performance Coatings
09960-27 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/09960 (DraftFinal)
4. Coat underside of equipment bases and supports not galvanized with at least 2 coats of primer specified before setting the equipment in place.
5. Coat aluminum in contact with concrete.
3.10 APPLICATION REQUIREMENTS FOR CONCRETE COATING SYSTEMS A. Apply filler/surfacer as recommended by CSM to fill bug holes and air voids in concrete or block texture in CMU, leaving a uniformly filled surface that does not produce blowholes or outgassing causing the coating system to pinhole.
1. Allow filler/surfacers to cure sufficiently before applying prime coat as required by the CSM. Use the CSM-recommended drying time between coats.
B. Apply surfacer or filler and let dry before coating application.
1. Use the drying time between filler/surfacer and coating system specified by the CSM for the site conditions.
a. Let concrete substrate dry before applying filler/surfacers or coating system materials.
2. If the maximum recoat time is exceeded, prepare surfaces by solvent washing, light abrasive blasting, and other procedures in accordance with CSM's instructions.
3. Apply a complete parge coat of the specified filler/surfacer material over the entire substrate before applying the coating system.
a. Scrub filler/surfacer into the substrate to completely fill open air voids and bug holes.
b. Completely cover the substrate, unless otherwise specified, above such filled voids by 1/8 inch of thickness.
c. Provide relatively flat, uniformly even surface before coating application.
4. Secondary containment: Place surfacer or filler 1/16-inch thick above concrete plane to create a monolithic surface free of pinholes.
a. Floor surfaces: Broadcast with aggregate to create a non-slip surface texture.
b. Remove excess aggregates and apply base coat to encapsulate embedded non-slip aggregate.
C. Concrete substrate temperatures:
1. Apply filler/surfacers and the coating system when temperatures are falling, typically late afternoon or evening.
a. Do not coat concrete with rising concrete substrate surface temperatures or substrates in direct sunlight, to minimize outgassing from the substrate and formation of pinholes, and/or blistering.
2. Should bubbles, pinholes, or other discontinuities form in the applied coating system material, they shall be repaired.
a. Should discontinuities develop in the filler/surfacer material or in the first coat of the coating material, repair them before the next coat. b. When discontinuities occur, open the air void behind or beneath the discontinuities and completely fill with specified coating material. Then, abrade the coated area around the discontinuities repair reapply coating over that area.
D. Perform application detail work in accordance with these Specifications, the CSM’s current written recommendations, and Drawings, whichever is stricter.
High-Performance Coatings
09960-28 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/09960 (DraftFinal) E. Concrete coating systems application requirements:
1. Concrete coating minimum dry film thickness excludes parge coat, block filler, and sealer.
3.11 COATING SYSTEM SCHEDULE
A. Attachment A - Schedule of Surfaces to be Coated specifies surfaces to be coated in the field with the coating systems required.
3.12 SURFACES NOT REQUIRING COATING
A. Stainless steel piping, valves, pipe supports, instrument sunshades.
B. Sliding surfaces on expansion joints, motor and pump shafts, machined surfaces at bearings and seals, grease fittings, etc.
C. Galvanized structural steel framing, galvanized roof decking, galvanized pipe supports.
D. Copper and brass pipe, fittings, valves, etc.
E. Bronze valves, bearings, bushings, and fasteners.
F. Corrosion resistant special alloys: Inconel, Alloy 20, Hastelloy, etc.
G. Exterior concrete.
H. Plastic surfaces except coat PVC, CPVC, and other plastic piping system exposed to sunlight.
I. Buried piping that is encased in concrete or cement mortar.
3.13 QUALITY CONTROL
A. Owner-provided inspection or inspection by others does not limit the Contractor’s or CSA’s responsibilities for quality workmanship or quality control as specified or as required by the CSM’s instructions. Owner inspection is in addition to any inspection required of the Contractor.
B. Owner may perform, or contract with an inspection agency to perform, quality control inspection and testing of the coating work covered by this Section. These inspections may include the following:
1. Inspect materials upon receipt to ensure that the CSM supplied them.
2. Verify that specified storage conditions for the coating system materials, solvents, and abrasives are provided.
3. Inspect and record findings for substrate cleanliness.
4. Inspect and record pH of concrete and metal substrates.
5. Inspect and record substrate profile (anchor pattern).
6. Measure and record ambient air and substrate temperature.
7. Measure and record relative humidity.
8. Check for substrate moisture in concrete.
High-Performance Coatings
09960-29 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/09960 (DraftFinal)
9. Verify that mixing of coating system materials is in accordance with CSM’s instructions.
10. Inspect, confirm, and record that coating system materials’ “pot life” is not exceeded during installation. Inspect to verify that recoat limitations for coating materials are not exceeded.
11. Perform adhesion testing.
12. Measure and record the coating system's thickness.
13. Verify proper curing of the coating system in accordance with the CSM's instructions.
14. Holiday or continuity testing in accordance with NACE SP0188 for coatings that will be immersed or exposed to aggressively corrosive conditions.
C. Perform holiday testing in accordance with NACE SP0188 to identify holidays or pinholes needing repair for coating over 100 percent of surfaces:
1. Coated steel that will be immersed or exposed to aggressively corrosive conditions.
2. Coated concrete.
3. Perform holiday tests after proper application and coating system cure.
3.14 CORRECTIVE MEASURES
A. Repair pinholes or holidays identified by Holiday Testing as follows:
1. Remove the coating system with a grinder or other suitable power tool.
2. Remove coating system at pinholes and holidays at least 2 inches diameter around the defect back to expose substrate.
3. Concrete voids: Chip back to expose entire cavity in all directions. a. Completely fill void with approved filler/surfacer material using a putty knife or other suitable tool and strike off. Cure in accordance with CSM’s recommendations.
4. Aggressively abrade or sand the intact coating system surface at least 3 inches beyond the removal area in all directions to produce a uniform 6- to 8-mil profile in the intact coating system.
5. Vacuum the prepared area to remove dust, dirt, etc., leaving clean, sound surfaces.
6. Tape to mask the periphery of the prepared intact coating area to prevent coating repair application onto the prepared area.
7. Apply the coating system with enough coats to achieve the specified finish coat thickness over the defect and coating removal area. Feather the coating onto the abraded coated surfaces around the removal area to avoid a lip and to achieve a neat repair outline.
8. Follow curing time between coats as specified by CSM for the site conditions.
Solvent wash and abrasive blast in accordance with CSM's instructions if the maximum recoat time is exceeded.
9. Apply coating at specified dry film thickness.
3.15 CLEANUP
A. Remove surplus materials, protective coverings, and accumulated rubbish after completing coating. Thoroughly clean surfaces and repair overspray or other coating-related damage.
High-Performance Coatings
09960-30 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/09960 (DraftFinal)
3.16 FINAL INSPECTION
A. Conduct final inspection of coating system work to determine whether it meets specifications requirements.
B. Conduct subsequent final inspection with the Engineer to ensure Work is in accordance with Contract Documents requirements.
C. Mark any rework required.
1. Re-clean and repair, as specified, at no additional cost to the Owner.
END OF SECTION
High-Performance Coatings
09960-Attachment A 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/09960 (DraftFinal)
ATTACHMENT A - SCHEDULE OF SURFACES TO BE COATED
A.
EPU-M-1 Metals, exterior, non-immersed
EPX-C-2-PWS Concrete subfill (top surface) in filter vessel.
CTE-C-1 Concrete encased metal pipe
1: Non-immersed ferrous metal surfaces include:
a. Doors, doorframes, ventilators, louvers, grilles, exposed sheet metal, and flashing. b. Pipe, valves, pipe hangers, supports and saddles, conduit, cable tray hangers, and supports. c. Motors and motor accessory equipment.
d. Drive gear, drive housing, coupling housings, and miscellaneous gear drive equipment. e. Valve and gate operators and stands.
f. Structural steel.
g. Crane and hoist rails.
h. Exterior of tanks and other containment vessels.
i. Mechanical equipment supports, drive units, and accessories. j. Bare electrical equipment: boxes, exposed conduit, and accessories. k. Pumps not submerged.
l. Other miscellaneous metals.
2: Immersed ferrous metal surfaces include:
a. Interior surfaces of ferrous metal tanks.
b. Field priming of ferrous metal surfaces with defective shop-prime coat; including nonsubmerged service. c. Bell rings, underside of manhole covers and frames.
d. Sump pumps, including underside of base plates and submerged suction and discharge piping.
e. Exterior of submerged piping and valves other than stainless steel or PVC piping. f. Submerged pipe supports and hangers.
g. Stem guides.
h. Other submerged iron and steel metal unless specified otherwise.
APPENDIX A
The following schedule is incomplete. Coat unlisted surfaces with same coating system as similar listed surfaces. Contact Engineer for clarification.
Schedule of Surfaces to be Coated
Notes:
09960-1
High-Performance Coatings
09960-Attachment B 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/09960 (DraftFinal)
ATTACHMENT B - COATING DETAIL SHEETS
Coating System
Coating Material
Substrate
Products: One of the following or equal: Primer Intermediate Coat Finish Coat Carboline Carboguard 890 Carboguard 890 Carbothane 134 VOC International Paint Devran 224V Devran 224V Devthane 379H PPG Amerlock 2VOC Amerlock 2VOC Amershield VOC
Sherwin Williams Macropoxy 646 100 Macropoxy 646 100 Hi Solids Polyurethane 250 Tnemec Series 69 Series 69 Series 1095
Service Condition
Surface Preparation
General
Ferrous Metal
Nonferrous Metal
Galvanized Metal
Surface profile
Ferrous Metal
Nonferrous Metal
Galvanized Metal
System Thickness (Dry Film)
Total
Primer
Intermediate Coat
Finish Coat
Application
Special CTR Training
Appendix B
Coating Detail Sheet
EPU-M-1
Two coats epoxy with polyurethane finish coat
Metal
Interior or Exterior, subject to direct sunlight. Non-immersion.
Prepare surfaces as specified in this Section and as follows.
Bare surfaces: SSPC-SP10, Near-White Blast Cleaning.
Shop primed surfaces: SSPC-SP2, Hand Tool Cleaning or SSPC-SP3, Power Tool Cleaning.
Damaged primer or rust: SSPC-SP10, Near White Blast Cleaning and spot prime.
SSPC-SP16, Brush Blast Cleaning.
SSPC-SP16, Brush Blast Cleaning. Test for surface contaminants.
2.5 to 3.0 mils
1.5 to 2.0 mils
1.5 to 2.0 mils
10 to 13 mils
Not required.
4 to 5 mils
4 to 5 mils
2 to 3 mils
09960-2
Coating System
Coating Material
Substrate
Products: One of the following or equal: Primer Intermediate Coat Finish Coat Carboline 891VOC 891VOC 891VOC
International Paint Bar-Rust 233H Bar-Rust 233H Bar-Rust 233H PPG Amerlock 2 Amerlock 2 Amerlock 2
Sherwin Williams Macropoxy 646PW Macropoxy 646PW Macropoxy 646PW Tnemec Series V140F Series V140F Series V140F
Service Condition
Surface Preparation
General
Concrete
Existing Coated Concrete
Surface profile
Concrete
Existing Coated Concrete
System Thickness (Dry Film)
Total
Primer
Intermediate and Finish Coats
Application
Special CTR Training
Concrete
Interior potable water tanks and reservoirs.
Prepare surfaces as specified in this Section and as follows.
Appendix B
Coating Detail Sheet
EPX-C-2-PWS
Epoxy
Cure at least 28 days and dry to the CSM's recommended moisture content.
Remove loose concrete and laitance from surfaces, and repair voids and cracks as specified in this Section.
Remove all existing coating to a sound substrate or intact, well-adhered coating.
Abrade all surfaces to achieve required surface profile and vacuum to remove all loose dirt, paint chips, and dirt.
15 mils
ICRI CSP 3.
ICRI CSP 3.
One coat at CSM's recommended dry film thickness.
Each coat at CSM's recommended DFT to specified system thickness.
Not Required.
09960-3
Coating System
Coating Material
Substrate
Products: One of the following or equal: Primer Intermediate Coat Finish Coat Carboline No product specified No product specified No product specified International Paint None applied Devtar 5A-HS Devtar 5A-HS PPG None applied Amercoat 78HB Amercoat 78HB
Sherwin Williams None applied TarGuard TarGuard
Tnemec No product specified No product specified No product specified Service Condition
Surface Preparation
General
Surface profile
Concrete
Existing Coated Concrete
System Thickness (Dry Film)
Total
Primer
Intermediate Coat
Finish Coat
Application
General
Special CTR Training
Prepare surfaces as specified in this Section and as follows.
Appendix B
Coating Detail Sheet
CTE-C-1
Coal Tar Epoxy
Concrete
Below grade in contact with soil.
Fill all bugholes with a filler/surfacer compatible with the coating.
Not Required.
ICRI CSP 3.
ICRI CSP 3.
16 mils
4 to 6 mils
4 to 6 mils
4 to 6 mils
09960-4
Signage
10400-1 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/10400 (DraftFinal) SECTION 10400
SIGNAGE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
1. Plastic and metal signs for building and site use.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI):
1. Z535.1 - Safety Colors.
2. Z535.2 - Environmental and Facility Safety Signs.
B. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):
1. 704 - Standard System for the Identification of the Hazards of Materials for Emergency Response.
C. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA).
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish Submittals as specified in Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures.
B. Product data:
1. Manufacturer’s data indicating sign type, style, and color.
C. Shop Drawings:
1. Include lists of sign types, sizes, text, colors, and locations.
D. Samples: Include actual materials.
E. Manufacturer’s installation instructions.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Regulatory requirements: Provide signage in accordance with Americans with Disabilities Act as published in the Federal Register, Volume 56, No. 144, Friday, July 26, 1991.
Signage
10400-2 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/10400 (DraftFinal) PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 ROOM AND AREA SIGNS
A. Manufacturers:
1. One of the following or equal:
a. Andco Industries Corp., equivalent product.
b. Best Manufacturing Sign Systems, System 900013.
c. Vomar Products, Inc., equivalent product.
B. Attachment:
1. Vinyl tape, self-adhering.
C. Lettering:
1. Helvetica medium, 3/4 inch high.
D. Materials:
1. Interior use:
a. Plastic 1/8-inch thick raised letters.
2. Exterior use:
a. Fiberglass 1/4 inch thick with high gloss finish, raised letters, blasted from single piece of fiberglass for integral letter and background. b. No adhesive as mechanical fastening of letters shall be allowed.
E. Colors:
1. As selected by the Engineer from the manufacturer’s standard colors.
F. See Attachment A - Room and Area Signage Schedule for specific sign size, location, text, pictogram, and quantity.
2.02 SAFETY SIGNS
A. General:
1. Colors: In accordance with ANSI Z535.1.
2. Design: In accordance with ANSI Z535.2.
3. 40-mil thick aluminum with baked enamel finish.
4. Fasteners: Round head stainless steel bolts or screws.
B. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1. Emedco.
2. Seton Name Plate Co., Special Wording.
C. Danger signs:
1. Background: White.
2. Heading: White lettering on red oval with white border in black rectangular panel.
3. Message: Black lettering on white.
4. Size: As scheduled.
D. Caution signs:
1. Background: Yellow.
Signage
10400-3 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/10400 (DraftFinal)
2. Heading: Yellow lettering on black rectangular panel.
3. Message: Black lettering on yellow.
4. Size: As scheduled.
E. Safety instruction signs:
1. Background: White.
2. Heading: White lettering on green rectangular panel.
3. Message: Black lettering.
4. Size: As scheduled.
F. Warning signs:
1. Background: Orange.
2. Heading: Black lettering on orange diamond in black rectangular panel.
3. Message: Flack lettering on orange.
4. Size: As scheduled.
G. Notice information signs:
1. Background: White.
2. Heading: White lettering on blue rectangular panel.
3. Message: Black lettering.
4. Size: As scheduled.
H. See Attachment B - Safety Signage Schedule for specific sign size, location, text, and quantity.
2.03 HAZARD MATERIAL SIGNS
A. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1. Emedco.
2. Seton Name Plate Co.
B. Requirements:
1. In accordance with NFPA 704.
2. 40-mil thick aluminum with baked enamel finish panels, letters, and symbols with pressure sensitive adhesive.
3. Sizes as required for viewing distances, letters and symbols in accordance with Attachment C - Hazard Material Signage.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Protect adjacent surfaces which may be damaged by installation of signs.
B. Prepare substrates in accordance with the sign manufacturer’s instructions.
C. Remove scale, dirt, grease, and other contaminates from substrates.
Signage
10400-4 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/10400 (DraftFinal)
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install signs in accordance with the sign manufacturer’s instructions.
B. Fasten signs securely in level, plumb, and true to plane positions.
C. Install signs where indicated on the Drawings or as indicated in the Attachments.
END OF SECTION
Signage
10400-Attachment A 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/10400 (DraftFinal)
ATTACHMENT A - ROOM AND AREA SIGNAGE SCHEDULE
Signage
10400-Attachment A-1 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/10400 (DraftFinal)
ROOM AND AREA SCHEDULE
A. Room Numbers:
1. Location: On wall outside room adjacent to latch side of doors or when not enough space on latch side, on nearest adjacent wall.
2. Height: 60 inches above floor to center of sign.
3. Size: 6 inches square.
4. Colors: As selected by the Engineer.
5. Text: Room number as indicated on the Drawings.
B. Room Names:
1. Location: On wall outside room adjacent to latch side of doors or when not enough space on latch side, on nearest adjacent wall.
2. Height: 60 inches above floor to center or sign.
3. Size: 6 inches square.
4. Colors: As selected by the Engineer.
5. Text: Signage describing room function as indicated on the Drawings.
C. Toilet Doors:
1. Location: On wall outside room adjacent to latch side of doors or when not enough space on latch side, on nearest adjacent wall.
2. Height: 60 inches above floor to center of sign.
3. Size: 6 inches wide by 8 inches high.
4. Colors: As selected by the Engineer.
5. Pictogram: International symbol for men or women to suit application.
6. Text: Braille characters and MEN or WOMEN as appropriate.
Signage
10400-Attachment B 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/10400 (DraftFinal)
ATTACHMENT B - SAFETY SIGNAGE SCHEDULE
Signage
10400-Attachment B-1 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/10400 (DraftFinal)
SAFETY SIGNAGE SCHEDULE
A. NON-POTABLE WATER:
1. Location: At non-potable water hose valves.
2. Height: As directed by Engineer.
3. Size: 10 inches wide by 7 inches high.
4. Heading: DANGER
5. Wording: NON-POTABLE WATER
DO NOT DRINK
B. HIGH PRESSURE HOSE VALVES:
1. Location: At designated hose valves.
2. Height: As directed by Engineer.
3. Size: 10 inches by 14 inches.
4. Heading: DANGER
5. Wording: HIGH PRESSURE
C. REMOTELY CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC EQUIPMENT:
1. Location: On front and back of equipment that starts automatically by remote control.
2. Height: As directed by Engineer.
3. Size: 10 inches by 14 inches.
4. Heading: DANGER
5. Wording: THIS EQUIPMENT STARTS AUTOMATICALLY
BY REMOTE CONTROL
D. HIGH VOLTAGE WARNING:
1. Location: On front and back of equipment, adjacent to doors to rooms containing devices that operate at 600 volts or greater.
2. Height: As directed by Engineer.
3. Size: 10 inches by 14 inches.
4. Heading: DANGER
5. Wording: HIGH VOLTAGE
KEEP OUT
E. NO SMOKING WITHIN 25 FEET OF BUILDING ENTRY:
1. Location: As indicated on the Drawings.
2. Height: Pole mounted with top of sign at 5 feet above grade.
3. Size: 14 inches wide by 10 inches high.
4. Heading: NOTICE
5. Wording: NO SMOKING WITHIN 25 FEET OF BUILDING.
6. Pictogram: International “No Smoking” symbol.
F. NO PARKING:
1. Location: As indicated on the Drawings.
2. Height: In accordance with local regulations.
3. Size: In accordance with local regulations.
4. Wording: In accordance with local regulations.
5. Pictogram: In accordance with local regulations.
Signage
10400-Attachment C 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/10400 (DraftFinal)
ATTACHMENT C - HAZARD MATERIAL SIGNAGE
Signage
10400-Attachment C-1 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/10400 (DraftFinal)
HAZARD MATERIAL SIGNAGE
A. HAZARD SIGNAL FOR SODIUM HYPOCHLORITE 12 PERCENT:
1. Location: At entrances to locations where stored and on storage tanks.
2. Height: As directed Engineer.
3. View Distance: As directed Engineer.
4. Health: 3
5. Flammability: 0
6. Reactivity: 0
7. Special: COR
Fire Protection Specialties
10520-1 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/10520 (DraftFinal) SECTION 10520
FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes: Fire extinguishers.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. ASTM International (ASTM):
1. E814-11a - Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Penetration Firestop Systems.
B. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):
1. 10 - Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers.
C. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):
1. 711 - Rating and Fire Testing of Fire Extinguishers.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product data.
1. Extinguishers: Materials description for fire extinguishers; include ratings and classifications.
2. Installation instructions for each product specified.
B. Shop drawings:
1. Small-scale plans showing locations of individual fire extinguishers.
2. Schedule showing each type of extinguisher to ensure proper fit and function.
3. Indicate installation procedures and accessories required for a complete installation.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer qualifications: Minimum 5 years with satisfactory performance record.
1.05 WARRANTY
A. As specified in Section 01783 - Warranties and Bonds.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. The following or equal:
1. Activar Construction Products Group – JL Industries.
Fire Protection Specialties
10520-2 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/10520 (DraftFinal)
2.02 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
A. Multi-purpose chemical type:
1. Extinguisher unit containing a fluidized and siliconized mono ammonium phosphate powder; nonconductive and nontoxic.
2. Construction: Heavy duty steel cylinder with metal valve and siphon tube, o-ring seal, replaceable valve stem seal, visual pressure gage, pull pin and upright squeeze grip.
3. Finish: Factory powder-coated: Red.
4. UL Effectiveness Rating in accordance with UL 711: Class A, B, and C fires.
5. UL Rating in accordance with UL 711: 4A-80BC.
6. Drawing will use the symbol FE for “Fire Extinguisher”.
B. Regular dry chemical type:
1. Extinguisher unit containing Halotron™.
2. Size minimum: 11 pounds.
3. Construction: Heavy duty steel cylinder with metal valve and siphon tube, o-ring seal, replaceable valve stem seal, visual pressure gage, pull pin, and upright squeeze grip.
4. Finish: Factory powder-coated; Red.
5. UL Effectiveness Rating in accordance with UL 711: Class B and C fires.
6. UL Rating in accordance with UL 711: 2A-10BC.
7. Drawing will use the symbol EFE for “Electrical Fire Extinguisher”.
2.03 WALL BRACKETS
A. Type: Standard as manufactured by fire extinguisher manufacturer.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance NFPA 10, Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers.
3.02 LOCATIONS
A. Install fire extinguisher type, FE and EFE, as indicated on the Drawings.
B. Install fire extinguisher wall brackets as indicated on the Drawings.
END OF SECTION
Toilet Accessories
10810-1 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/10810 (DraftFinal) SECTION 10810
TOILET ACCESSORIES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes: Toilet accessories.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA).
B. ASTM International (ASTM):
1. A240 - Standard Specification for Chromium and Chromium-Nickel Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels and for General Applications.
C. California Code of Regulation (CCR):
1. Title 24 - Building Standards Code.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop drawings: Include schedule of proposed products.
B. Product data: Include dimensions gauge, profiles, materials, fabrication details, manufacturer's installation instructions including setting drawings where cutouts are required, templates, substrate preparation instructions and directions for preparing cutouts for installation of accessories.
C. Special samples:
1. Include 1 of each accessory type.
2. Special samples acceptable to Engineer may be installed in the Work.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer qualifications: Manufacturer of proposed products for minimum 5 years with satisfactory performance record of minimum 5 years.
B. Installer qualifications:
1. Manufacturer-approved installer of products similar to specified products on minimum 5 projects with satisfactory performance record.
2. Furnish toilet accessories by 1 manufacturer, unless scheduled otherwise.
C. Requirements of regulatory agencies: In accordance with ADA, and CCR Title 24, Part 2, for provisions for the physically handicapped; materials and installation.
Toilet Accessories
10810-2 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/10810 (DraftFinal)
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Maintain protective coatings or coverings on units until installation is complete.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Toilet accessories: One of following or equal:
1. American Specialties, Inc., Division of ASI Group Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.
2. GAMCO, Division of Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Stainless steel: ASTM A240, Type 304 or 316; minimum 28 gauge.
2.03 TOILET ACCESSORIES
A. Accessory model numbers indicated below are from the Bobrick Equipment, Inc., line of products.
B. Types:
1. Grab bars: B6806 (concealed fasteners), sizes and shapes indicated, with appropriate anchors.
2. Mirror with 3/4- by 3/4-inch frame: B-293 1830.
3. Paper towel dispenser/waste receptacle, surface mounted, plastic liner:
B-3949.
4. Soap dispenser, counter mounted, liquid soap: B-8111, with 40 fluid ounce polyethylene container.
5. Toilet paper holder, double, surface mounted: B-686.
C. Fasteners: Concealed or tamperproof, sized to suit application.
2.04 FABRICATION
A. Weld and grind smooth joints of fabricated components.
B. Form exposed surfaces from single sheet of stock, free of joints.
C. Form surfaces flat without distortion.
1. Maintain flat surfaces without scratches or joints.
D. Shop assemble components and package complete with anchors and fittings.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for the installation of accessory items.
Toilet Accessories
10810-3 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/10810 (DraftFinal) B. Verify that supports and reinforcements are in place and proper for accessory installation.
C. Do not begin installation until conditions are satisfactory.
1. Beginning installation means acceptance of existing conditions.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Deliver inserts and rough-in frames to site at the appropriate time for building-in.
B. Provide templates and rough-in measurements as required.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Install units plumb and level.
1. Firmly anchor accessories.
C. Install grab bar connectors or support angles between studs securely enough to withstand horizontal pull of 300 pounds.
D. Accurately position grab bar connector assemblies and tighten to support angles before application of wall finish.
1. After completion of wall surface, secure concealed mounting plate to connector assembly with stainless steel machine screws.
E. Use through-bolted connection for grab bars on toilet compartments.
3.04 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust accessories for proper operation and verify that mechanisms operate smoothly.
B. Replace damaged or defective products with good products.
END OF SECTION
Liquid Chemical Double Diaphragm Metering Pumps
11242-1 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/11242 (DraftFinal) SECTION 11242
LIQUID CHEMICAL DOUBLE DIAPHRAGM METERING PUMPS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes: Skid Mounted positive displacement double diaphragm pumps complete with drives, controls, and features specified and scheduled in this Section.
B. Tag numbers: As specified in Pump Schedule.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA):
1. 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1,000 Volts Maximum).
B. NSF International (NSF):
1. 61 - Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. NEMA:
1. Type 4X enclosure in accordance with NEMA 250.
1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. General: Provide skid mounted positive displacement, double diaphragm type chemical metering pumps; accessories, and other items required for a complete and operational system. Each chemical metering pump system shall include, but not be limited to, the following items, which shall be supplied by the chemical metering pump manufacturer.
1. Pumps.
2. Motors.
3. Variable speed drives.
4. Pressure Switches and gauges with diaphragm seals and block/bleed valves.
5. Flowmeters.
6. Calibration columns.
7. Junction boxes.
B. Fluid characteristics:
1. Sodium hypochlorite:
a. Dry chemical formula: NaOCl.
b. Solution concentration: 0.8 percent by weight.
c. Solution pH: 13.
d. Solution specific gravity: 1.02.
Liquid Chemical Double Diaphragm Metering Pumps
11242-2 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/11242 (DraftFinal) C. Design requirements:
1. Pumped liquid shall be contained within pump wet end housing and shall not directly contact any metallic drive components.
2. Pumps:
a. Capable of being run dry without damaging effects to pump. b. Maximum pressure rating of 140 pounds per square inch. c. Maximum suction lift of 23 feet of water.
d. No loss motion, low pulsation, low velocity output not requiring a pulsation dampener.
e. Output adjustment range shall be from 0.05 to 100 percent in 0.1 percent increments. 2,000:1.
3. Pump performance characteristics: As specified in Pump Schedule in this Section.
4. Motor characteristics: As specified in this Section and in Section 16222 - Low Voltage Motors up to 500 Horsepower.
5. Variable speed drive characteristics: As specified in this Section.
D. Performance requirements:
1. Systems shall deliver the pressures and volumes listed for their respective services in the Pump Schedule in this Section.
E. Product requirements as specified in the Agreement and Contract RFP in Volumes 1 and 2 and 15050 - Common Work Results for Mechanical Equipment.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit as specified in Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures.
B. Product data: As specified in Section 15050 - Common Work Results for Mechanical Equipment.
1. Current NSF 61 Certification for components to be in contact with associated chemical or potable water.
2. Provide data showing chemical compatibility and history of service with the associated chemical for materials in the system.
C. Shop drawings: As specified in Section 15050 - Common Work Results for Mechanical Equipment.
1. Dimensions, including materials of construction, size, weight, and performance data.
2. Drawings: Provide electrical and instrumentation drawings showing coordination with electrical control devices operating in conjunction with the associated feed system.
3. Dimensioned inlet and outlet connections.
4. Provide data showing chemical compatibility and history of service with the associated chemical for materials in the system.
D. Calculations: As specified in Section 15050 - Common Work Results for Mechanical Equipment.
1. For each pump type, submit calibration charts and tables relating flow rate to speed.
Liquid Chemical Double Diaphragm Metering Pumps
11242-3 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/11242 (DraftFinal)
2. Submit calculations for each metering pump showing the suitability of each pump for the suction and discharge conditions of each application point. Pump manufacturer shall recommend and size an accumulator to be piped to the suction side of each metering pump, when required based on calculations.
3. Calibration curves for each pump relating speed to flow rate shall be supplied. a. Capacity control shall be 0 to 100 percent with delivery repeatable within plus or minus 0.1 percent accuracy over entire range.
E. Vendor operation and maintenance manuals: As specified in Section 01782 - Operation and Maintenance Manuals.
F. Commissioning submittals:
1. Provide Manufacturer's Certificate of Source Testing as specified in Section 01756 - Commissioning.
a. Manufacturer's statement that the materials of construction are compatible with the pumped fluid.
2. Provide Manufacturer's Certificate of Installation and Functionality Compliance as specified in Section 01756 - Commissioning.
G. Chemical feed pumps:
1. For each pump type furnish data including head and capacity.
2. Calibration curves.
3. Electrical and control drawings.
H. Control panel shop drawings:
1. Control panel views showing equipment arrangement, doors, equipment layout inside the panel and dimensional information.
2. Internal interconnecting wiring diagrams showing terminal strips and all external devices connected to the panel, design submittal for loop and schematic diagrams.
3. ISA standard Loop Drawings for analog and discrete signals.
4. Complete schematic and diagrams including terminal block and wire identification numbers and device location symbols consistent with the Contract Documents.
5. Panel bill of material with detailed description of components and equipment data sheets.
6. Field cable numbers and terminations.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Packing, shipping, handling and unloading:
1. Pack for shipping and outdoor storage at the project site for up to 6 months.
Apply temporary corrosion protective coatings to unpainted components and pack components to protect from the elements.
2. Ship pump and drive completely assembled.
1.07 WARRANTY
A. Provide warranty as specified in Section 01783 - Warranties and Bonds.
1. Provide a 2-year duration special warranty.
Liquid Chemical Double Diaphragm Metering Pumps
11242-4 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/11242 (DraftFinal) PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. A single pump manufacturer shall furnish and coordinate all drives and pump components specified in this Section, including motors, gears, couplings, supports, and other specified accessories and appurtenances to ensure compatibility and integrity of the individual components.
B. The manufacturer of the pumps shall have sole-source responsibility for furnishing the complete assemblies and meeting the specified performance requirements.
2.02 PUMPS
A. Pump manufacturer: One of the following or equal:
1. Blue-White, model MD3.
B. Type: Duplex chemical proportioning pumps of the double diaphragm no loss motion type, skid-mounted.
C. Features:
1. The pumphead shall be manufactured from natural PVDF material.
2. The diaphragm shall be manufactured from a single layer of natural PVDF material. Laminated diaphragms shall not be used.
3. The inlet and outlet pump head valve housings shall be manufactured from natural PVDF material.
4. The dual pump head inlet valve housings and outlet valve housings shall be connected by a PVDF manifold pipe.
5. The pump inlet (suction) adapter and the outlet (discharge) adapters may be installed in the field on either the left or right side of the pump.
6. The inlet and outlet adapters shall be available for 1/2-inch male NPT.
7. There shall be four check valve cartridge assemblies per pump head, two located in the inlet valve assembly and two located in the outlet valve assembly. Each cartridge check valve assembly shall contain a ceramic ball, static seal O-ring and ball seat O-ring. O-ring ball seats shall be manufactured from T/FEP elastomer material. Static adapter fitting seals shall be manufactured from FKM elastomer material.
8. The pump head front shall be covered with a 316 Stainless Steel metal pressure support plate.
9. The pump head shall be positively secured to the pump housing with 8 each 10-32 stainless steel socket head screws and washers.
D. Materials:
1. All materials of construction must be suitable for constant contact with the chemical solution to be pumped and take into account current potable water practices.
a. Sodium Hypochlorite:
1) All wetted parts shall be suitable for use with 0.8 percent sodium hypochlorite solution.
Liquid Chemical Double Diaphragm Metering Pumps
11242-5 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/11242 (DraftFinal) 2) All other non-specified materials are to be manufacturer's standard for continuous service with a 0.8 percent sodium hypochlorite solution.
2. Brass or bronze components are not acceptable for contact with sodium hypochlorite.
3. Material Standards:
a. Cast Aluminum: ASTM A.
b. Galvanized Steel: ASTM A123.
c. Stainless Steel: AISI 316.
d. Carbon Steel: ASTM A570 or A611.
e. Viton: ASTM D2000.
E. Accessories: As indicated on the Drawings, pump skids shall be equipped with:
1. Calibration column in common suction piping.
2. Pressure relief valve in discharge piping.
3. Flowmeter in common discharge piping.
4. Pressure gauge and pressure switch with diaphragm seal and block/bleed valves in the common discharge piping.
F. Source quality control:
1. Tests and inspections:
a. As specified in Sections 01756 - Commissioning and 15050 - Common Work Results for Mechanical Equipment.
b. As scheduled in this Section.
2. Verification of performance.
2.03 DRIVE
A. Rating: Continuous 24-hour operation, 40 degrees Celsius ambient.
B. Supply: 120 volt, 60 Hertz, 1 phase.
C. Enclosure: NEMA 4X.
D. Housing: Cast aluminum or cast aluminum alloy with pre-treatment and exterior grade corrosion resistant polyester powder coat.
E. Pumps must meet the following minimum requirements for operator interface functionality and control panel:
1. Provide control system with equipment protective devices for safe operation in a local control panel and with remote inputs and outputs and control devices as indicated on the P&ID Drawings to:
a. Provide control functions as specified in Section 17101A - Specific Control Strategies.
2. Backlit graphical LCD capable of up to four lines of text with up to 16 characters per line to display pump speed, running status, flow rate, and programming instructions.
3. Keypad for start, stop, speed increment, speed decrement, forward/reverse direction, rapid prime, and programming.
4. Menu driven on screen programming of manual or auto control, flow and remote signal calibration, and general programming.
Liquid Chemical Double Diaphragm Metering Pumps
11242-6 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/11242 (DraftFinal)
5. Programmable "Auto Restart" feature to resume pump status in the event of power outage interruption.
6. Programmable "Keypad Lock" to allow operator lockout of all keys except emergency start/stop.
7. Programmable "Maximum Speed" to allow operator to set the maximum speed of the pump within 0.1-190 revolutions per minute (rpm).
8. Leak detection indication and reset options.
F. Supply auto control features to meet the following minimum functionality requirements for use with the SCADA system. All control signal features must be located internally to the pump.
1. Remote Inputs:
a. RUN Command from PLC.
b. Speed control: Analog 4-20 mA from PLC.
2. Remote outputs:
a. Form C Dry Contacts rated for 2A at 120 VAC for the following signals:
1) RUNNING status.
2) REMOTE status.
3) FAIL status.
b. Speed Feedback: Analog 4-20 mA signal to PLC.
G. Drive motor:
1. Brushless DC motor with integral gearbox and tachometer feedback.
2. Speed Control Range of 2,000:1.
3. Horsepower to meet continuous duty at maximum pump speed and pressure requirements.
4. Circuitry complete with temperature and load compensation and protection.
5. Mounting: Drive shall be self-supporting and shall not require anchoring.
2.04 SKID-MOUNTED SYSTEM
A. When identified on the drawings, double diaphragm pump shall be supplied as a single skid system and the frame shall be constructed of lightweight, permanently welded polypropylene or polyethylene with drip tray and back wall for mounting of piping and accessories.
B. 316 stainless steel skid mounting pads shall be provided which can be positioned to enable floor mounting of the skid. Each mounting pad shall be secured to 2 mounting holes in the skid structure by 18-8 stainless steel hardware.
C. 316 stainless steel pump mounting brackets with four mounting slots shall be provided which can be positioned to enable wall mounting of the skid. Pump mounting brackets shall be secured to the skid structure by 18-8 stainless steel hardware.
D. Custom engineered universal mounting brackets shall secure each of the ball valves to the skid structure. Valve mounting brackets shall match valve material.
Valve mounting brackets shall be secured to pre-cut slots in the skid structure by 18-8 stainless steel hardware.
Liquid Chemical Double Diaphragm Metering Pumps
11242-7 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/11242 (DraftFinal) E. Piping: Piping shall be minimum 1/2-inch diameter schedule 80 CPVC and shall be assembled using the appropriate CPVC cement (IPS Weld-On 724).
1. Unions shall be solvent weld schedule 80 CPVC.
2. Seals will be specified as Viton.
3. All pipe supports on skid shall include cushion strips by Anvil No. AS 3792 or equal.
F. Valves:
1. Vented ball valves shall be used unless otherwise noted.
2. Suction and discharge piping drain valves shall be provided.
3. Check valves shall be located in the discharge side of the piping system at the pump injection point to prevent the back flow of fluid through the system.
G. Pressure relief valves:
1. Pressure relief valves shall be located in the discharge side of the piping system to prevent excessive pressure in the system. Discharge shall be returned to the bulk storage tank(s).
2. Manufacturers: Asahi, Griffco Valve Inc., ChemLine Plastics, or equal.
3. Materials:
a. Lower body, seat, ball guide, and ball: CPVC.
b. Diaphragm: PTFE faced EPDM.
c. Seat gasket: Viton™.
d. Adjusting bolt, locknut, control spring, and fasteners: Stainless steel. e. End connections: Flanged or socket weld.
4. In-line design, size as indicated on the Drawings and required by this Section.
Valves shall be suitable for the service flow and pressure specified in this Section.
5. The pump supplier shall provide all pressure relief valves associated with the chemical system.
6. Set pressures shall be factory set at the levels scheduled in this Section. Valve settings shall be externally adjustable from 0 to 75 pounds per square inch.
7. Provide 3-port configuration for all pressure relief valves where piping back to a tank or connection to drain piping is indicated on the Drawings.
H. Pump connections shall be flexible tubing rated for 200 psi maximum continuous duty and terminated compression to pipe fittings. All connection shall be compression or solvent welded. Threaded connections are prohibited.
I. A calibration cylinder shall be located in the inlet side of the system to permit metering pump output volume calibration.
1. Valves shall permit the cylinder to be filled by gravity.
2. The cylinder shall be clear PVC with PVC end caps, or alternative as recommended by the manufacturer for the intended service.
3. An outlet vent shall be provided with 1/2-inch threaded FNPT PVC connection.
J. An in-line magnetic flow meter mounted on the pumps common discharge line shall be supplied. The wetted parts shall be constructed of PVDF and PEEK materials.
The meter shall include a fully configurable 4-20 mA output. An integral meter mounted backlit 3.5-inch LCD display shall be included.
Liquid Chemical Double Diaphragm Metering Pumps
11242-8 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/11242 (DraftFinal) K. Pump-Skid Enclosure:
1. Furnish and install chemical metering pumps, suction/discharge lines and accessories mounted on a non-metallic floor mounted skid as indicated on the Drawings.
2. All materials must be compatible with the pumped liquid.
2.05 NAMEPLATES
A. Each pump, gearbox, and motor shall have, securely affixed in a conspicuous location, a stainless steel nameplate with raised letters providing the manufacturer's model, serial number, rating, range, speed and other pertinent data.
2.06 ACCESSORIES
A. Additional accessories required for the system but not required to be supplied by the pump manufacturer include:
1. Diaphragm seals as specified in Section 17404 - Pressure/Vacuum Measurement: Diaphragm and Annular Seals, except as modified in this Section:
a. Materials shall be compatible with the pumped liquid at the specified concentration and suitable for outdoor use and exposure. b. Shutoff valve shall be provided.
2. Flowmeters as specified in Section 17302 - Flow Measurement: Magnetic Flowmeters.
3. Pressure switches as specified in Section 17403 - Pressure/Vacuum Measurement: Switches.
4. Pressure gauges as specified in Section 17404 - Pressure/Vacuum Measurement: Gauges.
5. Isolation valves as specified in Section 15117 - Specialty Valves that details Diaphragm Valves for calibration column and suction and discharge piping as indicated on the Drawings.
B. Provide stainless steel tag for all devices with tag number as shown on the Drawings.
2.07 SPARE PARTS AND SPECIAL TOOLS
A. Spare parts:
1. 1 complete spare parts kit for each pump provided.
2. 1 spare parts kit for each size and type of pressure relief and backpressure valves.
3. An initial supply of all oils, greases, and lubricants required to start operations.
Supply an amount of these materials equivalent to 1 year of continuous operation for each system.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 COMMISSIONING
A. As specified in Section 01756 - Commissioning and this Section.
Liquid Chemical Double Diaphragm Metering Pumps
11242-9 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/11242 (DraftFinal) B. Manufacturer services:
1. Provide certificates:
a. Manufacturer's Certificate of Source Testing.
b. Manufacturer's Certificate of Installation and Functionality Compliance.
2. Manufacturer's Representative onsite requirements:
a. Installation: 1 trip, 5 day minimum.
b. Functional Testing: 2 trips, 2 days minimum each.
3. Training:
a. Maintenance: 4 hours per session, 2 sessions.
b. Operation: 2 hours per session, 2 sessions.
4. Process operational period:
a. As required by Owner or Contractor.
C. Source testing: As specified in Pump Schedule.
D. Functional testing: As specified in Pump Schedule.
3.02 SCHEDULES
A. Pumps:
Misty Wood Campus Oaks
Tag Number WD33-PUMP-36211,
WD33-PUMP-36221
WD33-PUMP-30211,
WD33-PUMP-30221
Feed Point Well Pump Discharge Well Pump Discharge
Service 12.5% Sodium Hypochlorite 12.5% Sodium Hypochlorite Pump Type Double Diaphragm Double Diaphragm
Number of Pumps 2 pumps, 1 skid 2 pumps, 1 skid
1st Named Manufacturer's
Model
Blue-White Blue-White
MD1 MD1
Pump Characteristics:
Design Conditions
Rated Flow,
(gallons per hour) 0.001 - 8.5 0.001 - 8.5
Maximum Flow, (gallons per
hour) 4.4 4.1
Minimum Flow, (gallons per
hour) 0.65 0.6
Maximum Pump strokes 125 125
Maximum Discharge Pressure
(psi) 110 110
Relief Valve Setting (psig) 120 120
Driver Characteristics:
Minimum Driver Horsepower 1/4 1/4
Maximum Driver Speed, (rpm) 190 190
Liquid Chemical Double Diaphragm Metering Pumps
11242-10 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/11242 (DraftFinal) Misty Wood Campus Oaks
Tag Number WD33-PUMP-36211,
WD33-PUMP-36221
WD33-PUMP-30211,
WD33-PUMP-30221
Voltage/Phases/Hertz 120 volt, 60 Hertz, 1 phase 120 volt, 60 Hertz, 1 phase NEMA Enclosure Type NEMA 4X NEMA 4X
Source Testing:
Test Witnessing Not Witnessed Not Witnessed
Performance Test level 1 1
Vibration Test Level None None
Noise Test Level None None
Functional Testing
Performance Test level 1 1
Vibration Test Level None None
Noise Test Level None None
B. Calibration columns:
Tag Number Service Graduation Volume
(ml)
Graduation Scale
(ml)
PMP-0110
PMP-0120 12.5% Sodium Hypochlorite 500 10
1. The volume of the calibration column should equal 100 percent of the volume delivered by the pump at maximum capacity for a period of 30 to 60 seconds.
END OF SECTION
Packaged Fluoride System
11249-1 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/11249 (DraftFinal) SECTION 11249
PACKAGED FLUORIDE SYSTEM
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes: Requirements for complete and operational dry chemical feed and dilution system.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit as specified in Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures.
B. Product data: As specified in Section 15050 - Common Work Results for Mechanical Equipment.
1. List of materials, list of equipment, including a complete list of parts and supplies with current unit prices and sources of supply. a. List of parts recommended by the manufacturer to be replaced after 1 and 3 years of service.
2. Detailed specifications and shop drawings with both isometric and orthogonal views of the proposed installation, including dimensions, weights, and complete parts list.
C. Hydraulic characteristics of the mixer.
D. Shop drawings: As specified in Section 15050 - Common Work Results for Mechanical Equipment:
1. Detailed specifications and drawings containing complete piping and flow diagrams of the proposed installation, including dimensions, weights. a. Drawing shall show proposed anchorage of equipment and appurtenances and equipment relationship to other parts of the work including clearances for installation.
2. Wiring, control schematics, and control logic diagrams for electrical and control components furnished.
E. Calculations: As specified in Section 15050 - Common Work Results for Mechanical Equipment.
F. Vendor operation and maintenance manuals: As specified in Section 01782 - Operation and Maintenance Manuals.
G. Commissioning submittals:
1. Provide Manufacturer's Certificate of Source Testing as specified in Section 01756 - Commissioning.
2. Provide Manufacturer's Certificate of Installation and Functionality Compliance as specified in Section 01756 - Commissioning.
Packaged Fluoride System
11249-2 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/11249 (DraftFinal)
1.03 WARRANTY
A. Provide warranty as specified in Section 01783 - Warranties and Bonds. System shall be covered by a 2-year warranty against defects in materials and workmanship. Warranty period shall commence after on-site acceptance of equipment by Owner. In addition, system shall be subject to the following provisions:
1. If Owner is dissatisfied with system performance within 30 days of start-up by manufacturer's authorized representative, system may be returned for full refund, provided system has received reasonable use and care.
2. If Owner and manufacturer's authorized representative determine, at time of start-up, that the system is improperly sized for the application, or if another system by the same manufacturer would be more suitable for any reason, the system will be exchanged at no penalty. Owner will be charged or credited only the difference between the original and replacement systems, plus costs of shipping and handling. Owner will not be billed for restocking the original system, nor for the second visit by the representative to start up the replacement.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. The following or equal:
1. Prominent, Fluoride Upflow Saturator System.
2.02 DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
A. General: Provide integrated equipment package capable of automatically metering, diluting, and blending chemical with water.
B. Design requirements:
1. Two chemical feed systems will be required, one for each well site. The chemical feed system is a sodium fluoride (NaF) make-up and storage system.
The solution tank and chemical feed system described are intended to form a single integrated system. The following services will be available to the chemical feed system:
a. Electrical power: 120 volt, 60 hertz, 1 phase.
b. Softened water: 5 gallons per minute at 30 pounds per square inch minimum.
2. The system shall be designed for feeding up to 1.5 mg/L of fluoride to a maximum water well flow rate of 2,700 gpm for Misty Woods well and 2,500 for Campus Oaks well at a pressure of 90 psig.
3. The saturator tank, solution tank, metering pump, water feed system, control panel, and related components shall be mounted within the secondary containment. The complete unit shall fit in the location indicated on the Drawings.
Packaged Fluoride System
11249-3 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/11249 (DraftFinal)
2.03 MATERIALS
A. Materials and components shall be compatible with the chemical service and complaint with NSF/ANSI 61.
1. Chemical Service: Sodium Fluoride.
a. Concentration: 4 percent.
b. Specific Gravity: 1.165.
c. pH: 11.5-13.0.
B. All wetted components shall be non-metallic to prevent corrosion.
2.04 COMPONENTS
A. Saturator Tank:
1. Material: Linear polyethylene.
2. Capacity: 55 gallons.
3. Tank Lid: Hinged type.
4. The tank shall be designed to hold 300 pounds of sodium fluoride.
B. Distribution Header:
1. The water shall be distributed through the bottom of the tank using a PVC distribution header with perforated lateral pipes.
2. The saturator shall be of the automatic up-flow type, providing a distribution header at the bottom of a tank, allowing water to flow up through a layer of granular sodium fluoride to provide a saturated solution of approximately 4 percent NaF.
C. Sodium Fluoride Solution Tank:
1. Material: Linear polyethylene.
2. Capacity: 70 gallons.
3. Tank shall be equipped with a radar based level sensor, model ProMinent DulcoLevel for automatic control of the saturator operation.
D. Sodium Fluoride Metering Pump:
1. Manufacturer: One of the following or equal:
a. Prominent, Sigma 1 Series.
2. Characteristics: Chemical proportioning simplex pumps of the positive displacement, non-loss motion design, mechanical diaphragm type.
3. Repeatability: Plus or minus 2 percent of full scale at constant hydraulic conditions.
Quantity
(each)
Max.
Strokes/
min
Capacity/pump
(min/max gph)
Max. Press.
(psig)
Power
Supply
Input
Signal
1 pump 172 0.139/13.9 145 120 VAC 4-20A
4. Pump gearbox drive:
a. Pump gear box shall be constructed of steel, nodular iron or cast aluminum and be water resistant and suitable for outdoor installation.
Pump and gear box housing shall be sealed in an outer plastic housing. b. Gear box shall be oil bath lubricated.
Packaged Fluoride System
11249-4 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/11249 (DraftFinal) c. Identify each pump with a corrosion resistant nameplate, securely affixed in a conspicuous location. Nameplate information to include pump tag number, equipment model number, flow capacity, output pressure and electrical data.
d. All fasteners shall be Type 316 stainless steel.
5. Drive and motor:
a. Type: Each chemical metering pump shall be 120 VAC motor-driven through a flexible coupling or direct connected to the pump if manufacturer’s standard. Pumps and motors shall be mounted on floor mountable base plates:
1) Couplers: Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a) Dodge, Para-flex.
b) Falk, Type WA.
b. Each pump shall be equipped with an integral variable speed drive (VSD).
The VSD shall be a VFD-AC variable speed drive. The drive shall be suitable for continuous heavy-duty service and shall be suitable for controlling the motor to be furnished.
c. Stroke length control shall be adjustable manually by means of a stroke length knob, in increments of 1 percent, from 0 to 100 percent of stroke length. Stroke length shall be determined by a sensor within the stroke adjustment knob that provides accurate feedback to the electronics of the pump for calibration and LCD display of stroke length. The digital display and optional analog output will calculate, display, and transmit the flow of the pump based on pump speed and stroke length settings. d. Stroke frequency control shall be done with an integral VFD and stepper motor pump controller. For the integral controller, the first 1/3 of the frequency in strokes per minute will operate with the stepper motor and frequencies greater than 1/3 of the maximum will operate with the internal VFD. In manual mode, stroke frequency control shall be manually adjusted by the touch keypad, with the set stroke rate displayed on the pump’s LCD. In external mode, the pump shall be capable of receiving a 4-20 mA input via an optional external control cable. The metering pump shall be capable of remote ON-OFF operation using the PAUSE function via a voltage-free contact relay through an optional control cable. e. The drive shall have 100:1 constant torque speed range. f. The drive shall respond automatically to a remote set point speed signal (4-20 mA). The drive shall provide a 4-20 mA speed signal output proportional to pump output for remote indication. The speed signal output shall be measured independently of the remote set point speed signal.
The drive shall also receive a remote start/stop signal (discrete dry contact) and provide discrete signals (discrete dry contact) for pump, failure alarm, diaphragm leak alarm, speed indication, and run indication.
The manufacturer shall furnish required additional components for the drive to function as described herein and shown on the Drawings. g. The motor shall have TEFC enclosure with horsepower of not less than the minimum specified rating.
h. The motor and VFD drive supplier shall carefully review the intended application of the variable speed drive and certify in writing that sizes provided are adequate for continuous or intermittent operations (whichever is the most severe operating condition).
Packaged Fluoride System
11249-5 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/11249 (DraftFinal)
6. Liquid end:
a. Pumps with flat composite mechanically activated diaphragms shall be Teflon faced, fiber reinforced and bonded to an elastomeric support with a steel backing plate.
b. The liquid end shall be sealed by means of an O-ring of material, if required, compatible with listed chemical solutions.
c. The liquid end shall have either single ball or cartridge type check valves.
Check valves shall compression seal to the pump head and pipe connections via an O-ring seal.
d. A secondary diaphragm shall seal the liquid end completely from the gear box and drive unit, preventing cross contamination.
e. The liquid end of each metering pump shall be fitted with a leak detection system to detect early stage diaphragm failure. The detection system shall be an electro optical sensor, mounted on the liquid end in a NEMA 4X enclosure. Upon actuation, the leak detector shall STOP the pump, light a locally visible LED, and sound a remote alarm.
E. Water Feed System:
1. The incoming water line shall be supplied with a manual shutoff valve, water feed solenoid valve, flow control needle valve, filter, and backflow/anti-siphon valve.
2. Water Flowmeter/Totalizer: Sensor shall be Signet Model 3-2000-21 with Signet Model 3-9900-1 flow transmitter.
F. Solution Tank Mixer:
1. A mixer shall be provided and mounted onto the solution tank for mixing the chemical and water into a solution.
2. The mixer operation shall be controlled by level switches in the solution tank and by an adjustable timer.
3. Impeller and shaft material shall be 316 stainless steel.
4. The mixer shall be driven by a 1,500 revolutions per minute, 1/20 horsepower, 115 volt, 60 hertz, single-phase TEFC electric motor.
G. Secondary Containment:
1. The entire system shall be housed in a single piece structure made of polypropylene.
2. The structure shall also serve as a secondary containment unit.
3. Containment structure will have a high level switch to detect a breach event that is captured in the unit. The level switch will activate an alarm at the control panel.
4. Containment structure shall be anchored with 316SS anchor bolts.
5. Provide leak detection device within containment.
H. Supports:
1. Design and provide equipment supports for the entire unit to withstand the seismic loads. The design seismic loads are specified in Section 01850 - Design Criteria.
I. Controls:
1. Provide controls, indicator lights, and switches at a local control panel as specified in Sections 17100 - Control Strategies and 17101A - Specific Control Packaged Fluoride System
11249-6 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/11249 (DraftFinal) Strategies, or shown on instrumentation drawings, and as specified in Section 17710 - Control Systems: Panels, Enclosures, and Panel Components.
2.05 ACCESSORIES
A. Backpressure Valves:
1. Adjustable pressure range of 0 to 150 psi.
2. Materials shall be compatible with the associated chemical and concentration.
3. Pressure Setpoint: Externally adjustable without removing valve from piping system. Set valve to open at half the pump discharge pressure at operating point, or as indicated on the Drawings.
4. Manufacturer: One of the following or equal:
a. Plast-O-Matic.
b. Griffco.
B. Pressure relief valves:
1. In-line design, valves shall be suitable for the service flow and pressure specified in this Section.
2. The pump supplier shall provide all pressure relief valves associated with the chemical system.
3. Materials shall be compatible with the associated chemical and concentration.
4. Set pressures shall be factory set at the levels scheduled in this Section. Valve settings shall be externally adjustable from 0 to 75 pounds per square inch.
5. Provide 3-port configuration for all pressure relief valves where piping back to a tank or connection to drain piping is indicated on the Drawings.
6. Manufacturer: One of the following or equal:
a. Plast-O-Matic.
b. Griffco.
C. Flow Monitor:
1. Type III Metering Monitor located on the pump discharge piping.
2. Materials: PVDF/FPM.
3. Manufacturer: One of the following or equal:
a. Prominent.
D. Additional accessories:
1. Additional accessories required for the system but not required to be supplied by the pump manufacturer include:
a. Diaphragm seals as specified in Section 17401 - Pressure/Vacuum Measurement: Diaphragm and Annular Seals, except as modified in this Section:
1) Materials shall be compatible with the pumped liquid at the specified concentration and suitable for outdoor use and exposure. b. Pressure switches as specified in Section 17403 - Pressure/Vacuum Measurement: Switches.
c. Pressure gauges as specified in Section 17404 - Pressure/Vacuum Measurement: Gauges.
d. Isolation valves as specified in Section 15111 - Ball Valves for suction and discharge piping as indicated on the Drawings.
Packaged Fluoride System
11249-7 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/11249 (DraftFinal)
2.06 WATER SOFTENER
A. Designed for 125 psig and in accordance with ASME code.
B. Rust-resistant and corrosion-resistant.
C. Mineral tank: Steel and lined with 0.006-inch to 0.008 inch high quality phenolic epoxy.
D. Brine System: The combination salt storage and brine production tank shall be 50 pound capacity and manufactured of corrosion resistant plastic.
E. The brine float assembly shall allow for adjustable salt settings and shall provide for a shutoff to the brine refill. The brine tank shall include a safety overflow connection to be plumbed to drain.
F. Valves and other parts which come into contact with water made of copper, with plastic, EPDM or Monel internal parts.
G. Permanent type, high capacity mineral resin bed, and high capacity resin.
H. Down flow of water during softening.
I. Automatic cycling:
1. Controlled by a pair of sensors detecting the need for regeneration.
2. Upflow of water on regenerating cycle.
3. Automatic bypass to provide full supply of water at outlets during regenerating cycle.
J. Design with the following characteristics:
1. Ability to handle water hardness indicated by water quality data provided by Engineer or Owner.
2. Provide 8 gph of continuous softened water up to a peak flow rate of 12 gph.
K. Electrical controls: 120 volt, 60 hertz electrical service.
L. Manufacturers:
1. Kinetico, Model S650XP.
M. Warranty:
1. Special warranty:
a. Duration: Provide 2-year special warranty.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Field finishes:
1. Protect motors.
Packaged Fluoride System
11249-8 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/11249 (DraftFinal)
2. Clean equipment and prepare shop primer.
3. Apply field primer and coating systems in the field as specified in Section 09960 - High-Performance Coatings requirements.
B. Contractor to flush out potable water line until water discharged from line is clear and free of debris, before conducting disinfection of the line as specified in Section 01757 - Disinfection.
C. Identification of the health, flammability, and reactivity of hazardous materials shall be affixed to each chemical storage drum, as specified in Section 10400 - Signage.
3.02 COMMISSIONING
A. As specified in Section 01756 - Commissioning and this Section.
B. Manufacturer services:
1. Provide certificates:
a. Manufacturer’s Certificate of Source Testing.
b. Manufacturer’s Certificate of Installation and Functionality Compliance.
2. Manufacturer’s Representative onsite requirements:
a. Installation: 1 trip, 2 day minimum.
b. Functional Testing: 1 trip, 2 day minimum each.
3. Training:
a. Electrical maintenance: 4 hours per session, 2 sessions. b. Mechanical maintenance: 4 hours per session, 2 sessions. c. Operation: 2 hours per session, 2 sessions.
4. Process operational period.
a. As required by Owner or Contractor.
C. Source testing:
1. Test as specified in Section 15958 - Mechanical Equipment Testing.
2. Fluoride System:
a. Test witnessing: Not witnessed.
b. Conduct Level 1 General Equipment Performance Test.
c. Conduct Level 1 Vibration Test.
d. Conduct Level 1 Noise Test.
3. Electrical Instrumentation and Controls:
a. Test witnessing: Not witnessed.
b. Conduct testing as specified in Section 17950 - Commissioning for Instrumentation and Controls.
D. Functional testing:
1. Functional testing of the entire system to be conducted following installation and cleaning of the units.
2. Fluoride System:
a. Test witnessing: Witnessed.
b. Conduct Level 2 General Equipment Performance Test.
c. Conduct Level 2 Vibration Test.
d. Conduct Level 2 Noise Test.
3. Electrical Instrumentation and Controls:
a. Test witnessing: Witnessed.
Packaged Fluoride System
11249-9 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/11249 (DraftFinal) b. Conduct testing as specified in Section 17950 - Commissioning for Instrumentation and Controls.
c. Manufacturer's representative shall provide a calibration check.
END OF SECTION
Packaged Grinder Pump Station
11309-1 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/11309 (DraftFinal) SECTION 11309
PACKAGED GRINDER PUMP STATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes: Grinder pump stations associated with odor control drain with features specified in this Section.
B. Tag Numbers: The following pumps shall be included as part of a single package grinder pump:
1. Misty Woods:
a. WD30-PUMP-28102.
b. WD30-PUMP-28103.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. ASTM International (ASTM):
1. A48 - Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings.
2. A108 - Standard Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon and Alloy, Cold-Finished.
3. A276 - Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes.
4. A582 - Standard Specification for Free-Machining Stainless Steel Bars.
5. A743 - Standard Specification for Castings, Iron-Chromium, Iron-Chromium-Nickel, Corrosion Resistant, for General Application.
6. B148 - Standard Specification for Aluminum-Bronze Sand Castings.
7. B505 - Standard Specification for Copper Alloy Continuous Castings.
8. B584 - Standard Specification for Copper Alloy Sand Castings for General Applications.
9. F593 - Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bolts, Hex Cap Screws and Studs.
10. F594 - Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Nuts.
B. Hydraulic Institute (HI):
1. 1.1-1.5 - Centrifugal Pumps - Nomenclature, Definitions, Application, and Operation.
2. 1.6 - Centrifugal Pump Tests.
3. 9.1-9.5 - Pumps - General Guidelines for Types, Definitions, Application, and Sound Measurement.
C. National Electrical Code (NEC).
D. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):
1. 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 V Maximum).
E. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):
1. 508 - Standard for Industrial Control Equipment.
2. 508A - Standard for Industrial Control Panels.
Packaged Grinder Pump Station
11309-2 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/11309 (DraftFinal)
3. 698A - Standard for Industrial Control Panels Relating to Hazardous (Classified) Locations.
4. 1283 - Standard for Electromagnetic Interference Filters.
5. 1449 - Surge Protective Devices.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Pump head (Total Dynamic Head, TDH), flow capacity, pump efficiency, net positive suction head available (NPSHa), and net positive suction head required (NPSHr):
As defined in HI 1.1-1.5, 1.6 and 9.1-9.5 and as modified in the Specifications.
B. Suction head: Gauge pressure available at pump intake flange or bell in feet of fluid above atmospheric; average when using multiple suction pressure taps, regardless of variation in individual taps.
C. Tolerances: In accordance with HI 1.1-1.5, 1.6 and 9.1-9.5, unless specified more restrictively.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit as specified in Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures.
B. Submit as specified in Section 15050 - Common Work Results for Mechanical Equipment.
C. Submit design calculations signed by a registered structural engineer for concrete ballast to prevent flotation.
1.05 TOOLS AND SPARE PARTS
A. The grinder pump station manufacturer shall furnish all special tools and appliances necessary to adjust the equipment and appurtenances.
B. The following spare parts shall be furnished:
1. One grinder pump.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer qualifications: Manufacturer of pumps similar to specified pumps as evidenced by references to minimum 5 installations of the same model and drive configuration in operation under similar conditions of head, flow, and speed for minimum 5 years.
B. Provide pumps and pump stations in this Section from the same manufacturer.
C. Pump station manufacturer:
1. Furnish and coordinate sump, barrel/can, grinder pumps, driver, drive, and pump components as specified below.
2. Design station bedding and backfill and anti-floatation ballast.
3. Provide written installation and check out requirements.
Packaged Grinder Pump Station
11309-3 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/11309 (DraftFinal)
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. As specified in Section 15050 - Common Work Results for Mechanical Equipment.
1.08 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental requirements: As specified in Section 15050 - Common Work Results for Mechanical Equipment.
1.09 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Coordinate work with work sequence and constraints.
1.10 WARRANTY
A. Grinder pump station manufacturer shall provide a part(s) and labor warranty on the complete station and accessories, including, but not limited to, panel and redundant check valve, for a period of 24 months after notice of Owner's acceptance.
1.11 MAINTENANCE
A. Special tools: Deliver 1 set for every furnished pump type and size needed to assemble and disassemble pump system.
B. Spare parts: Deliver the following as specified in the Agreement and Contract RFP in Volumes 1 and 2:
1. Sump seal gaskets or o-rings.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Grinder pump station: The equipment specified shall be a product of a company experienced in the design and manufacture of grinder pumps stations for specific use in low-pressure sewage systems. Manufacturer shall provide a reference and contact list from 3 of its grinder pump station installations of the same size.
1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a. E/One Sewer Systems, W-Series Fiberglass Duplex or equal.
2.02 DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
A. Furnish complete factory-built and tested grinder pump station(s) consisting of grinder pump(s) mounted in a basin constructed of fiberglass or high density polyethylene (HDPE), electrical quick disconnect (NEMA 6), pump removal system, shut-off valve, anti-siphon valve, and check valve assembled within the basin, electrical alarm/disconnect panel, and all necessary internal wiring and controls.
Include design and supply of soil backfill and base and concrete ballast to prevent floatation.
Packaged Grinder Pump Station
11309-4 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/11309 (DraftFinal)
2.03 COMPONENT MATERIALS
A. General: When materials are referenced in this Section, the compositions shall be the UNS Alloys, Types, or Grades in this Article unless specified or scheduled otherwise.
B. Cast irons:
1. Cast Iron: ASTM A48, Class 35 B minimum.
2. Nickel Cast Iron: ASTM A48, Class 35 minimum with 3 percent nickel added.
C. Carbon steels:
1. Structural steel: As specified in Section 05120 - Structural Steel Framing.
2. Steel shafts: ASTM A108, Grade or UNS Alloy as specified or scheduled.
D. Stainless steels:
1. Castings: ASTM A743, Grade as specified or scheduled.
2. Shafts and shapes: ASTM A276 or ASTM A582, Type or UNS Alloy as specified or scheduled.
3. Fasteners: ASTM F593 or ASTM F594, type or grade as specified.
E. Copper alloys:
1. Bronze: ASTM B505 or ASTM B584, UNS Alloy C83600.
2. Zincless Bronze: ASTM B505 or ASTM B584, leaded tin bronze, UNS Alloy C92700.
3. Aluminum bronze: ASTM B148, ASTM B505 or ASTM B584, UNS Alloy C95200.
2.04 PUMP
A. Type: Custom designed, integral, vertical rotor, motor driven, solids handling, and progressive cavity pump.
B. Pump station capacity: Duplex pump installation, each pump shall be rated for design at 11 gallons per minute at 40 pounds per square inch, gauge, discharge pressure.
C. Seal: Single mechanical seal with stationary ceramic seat and carbon rotating surface, held in position by stainless steel spring.
D. Rotor: Through-hardened, polished, precipitation hardened stainless steel.
E. Stator: Ethylene-propylene synthetic elastomer.
F. Materials: Suitable for wastewater service with resistance to abrasion, grease, water and detergent, dilute laboratory chemicals, and wear.
G. Check valve: Pump discharge shall be equipped with a gravity operated, flapper type check valve. Check valve shall provide a full port passage when opened and the pressure loss across the check valve shall be no more than 6 inches water column at maximum flow.
Packaged Grinder Pump Station
11309-5 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/11309 (DraftFinal)
2.05 GRINDER
A. Type: Placed immediately below pumping elements, direct driven by a single 1-piece stainless steel motor shaft, rotating type with stationary hardened and ground stainless steel shredding ring, with 2 hardened series 400 stainless steel cutter bars.
B. Assembly: Dynamically balanced to operate without excessive noise or vibration over the entire operating range.
C. Impeller: Securely fastened to the pump motor shaft.
D. Inlet shroud: 5-inch minimum diameter.
E. Average inlet velocity: Maximum flow velocity of 4 feet per second.
F. Rotational speed: Impeller mechanism maximum speed of 3,600 revolutions per minute.
2.06 MOTOR
A. Horsepower: Minimum 1 horsepower.
B. Speed: 1,725 revolutions per minute.
C. Volts/phase/frequency: 240 Volts per single phase per 60 hertz.
D. UL listed for the application.
2.07 TANK AND INTEGRAL ACCESSWAY
A. Tank construction: Rotationally molded high density polyethylene, nominal thickness of 1/2-inch, all seams thermally welded and leak tested, capable of withstanding pressure exerted by saturated soil loading at maximum burial depth as indicated on the Drawings. All station components shall function normally when subject to maximum external soil and hydrostatic pressure.
B. Tank capacity: 275 gallons.
C. Accessway: Integral extension of wet well assembly with a lockable cover with minimum 30-inch diameter.
D. Accessway construction: Facilitate field adjustment of station height in increments of no more than 4 inches without the use of adhesives or sealants requiring cure time.
E. Discharge piping: Constructed of 304 stainless steel, termination outside the accessway bulkhead with stainless steel 1-1/4-inch female NPT fitting. Discharge piping shall include a stainless steel ball valve.
F. Disconnect: Accessway shall include a NEMA 6 quick disconnect for all power and control functions.
Packaged Grinder Pump Station
11309-6 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/11309 (DraftFinal) G. Vent: Accessway shall include a 2-inch PVC vent.
H. Penetrations: All necessary penetrations shall be molded and factory sealed.
I. Design bedding and backfill quantities and locations.
J. Ballast: Design and provide cast-in-place concrete to ensure that grinder pump station does not become dislodged.
2.08 INSTRUMENTATION
A. Liquid level shall be monitored by an integral air-bell level sensor connected to a pressure switch.
B. High level sensing shall be monitored by a separate air-bell sensor and pressure switch.
2.09 PACKAGE CONTROL SYSTEM
A. General:
1. This Section summarizes key control system components for vendor control panels (VCP).
a. Referenced sections can be obtained from the Contractor for complete control system requirements.
2. Provide instruments and other components performing similar functions of the same type, model, or class, and from one manufacturer.
a. Coordinate with Contractor to align make and model with Contractorfurnished equipment.
3. VCP shall be completely preprogrammed, prewired, and factory tested for proper operation prior to shipment.
a. Additional testing requirements as specified in Section 17950 - Commissioning for Instrumentation and Controls.
4. Provide necessary control hardware, software, and components as required for a fully functional and operational installation.
5. Design and size panels.
a. Design panels to fit in the space as indicated on the Drawings. 1) Panel Tags:
a) WD37-VCPX-36901.
B. Panels, Enclosures, and Panel Components:
1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a. nVent/Hoffman.
b. Saginaw Control & Engineering.
2. Provide components and equipment with UL 508 listing.
3. Provide control panels with UL 508A labeled.
4. Provide fuses for equipment that is not UL listed or recognized.
5. Provide intrinsically safe circuits and equipment in accordance with UL 698A.
6. Provide control panel power circuits in accordance with the panel power wiring diagram included with the contract documents.
a. Design devices and instruments to fail in a safe condition.
7. Accept 240 VAC power source:
Packaged Grinder Pump Station
11309-7 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/11309 (DraftFinal) a. Terminate incoming power feed on main circuit breaker as specified in Section 16412 - Low Voltage Molded Case Circuit Breakers. b. Properly rate incoming circuit breaker for the available fault current as calculated as specified in Section 16305 - Electrical System Studies. c. Provide a buck boost transformer from the same manufacturer with ratings as indicated on the drawings.
d. Derive additional voltages as required by the application.
8. Conform panel enclosure rating to the area classifications as specified in Section 16050 - Common Work Results for Electrical.
9. Panel shall be rated as follows, unless otherwise specified:
a. Indoor panels:
1) Electrical/control rooms: NEMA 12, powder coated mild steel. 2) Process floor: NEMA 4X.
a) Non-Corrosive Areas: Type 316 stainless steel.
b) Corrosive Areas: Polycarbonate or fiberglass reinforced polyester (FRP).
10. Provide each control panel door with a continuous steel hinge, 3-point latching mechanism and locking handle with rollers on the ends of the latch rods. a. Connect latch rods to a common door handle, hold doors securely, and form a compressed seal between door and gasket, at the top, side, and bottom.
11. Perform and submit thermal management calculations for each control panel. a. Provide heating, cooling, and dehumidifying devices in order to maintain instrumentation and control devices within their rated operational temperature range.
12. Pad lockable flange mounted disconnect switch to disconnect power from panel.
a. Interlock with the panel door.
13. Provide nonmetallic ducts for routing and organization of conductors and cables.
2.10 CONTROL REQUIREMENTS
A. Pilot devices:
1. Controls:
a. Alarm silence pushbutton.
b. Redundant pump start.
c. Push-to-run switch.
2. Lights:
a. Alarms:
1) Wet well high level: shall remain on until wet well liquid level drops below the "off" setting.
3. Audio:
a. Alarms:
1) Wet well high level.
B. Monitoring and control:
1. Dry contact rating: 24 VDC @ 6 A.
2. Analog signal type: 4-20 mA.
Packaged Grinder Pump Station
11309-8 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/11309 (DraftFinal)
3. VCP Outputs:
a. Alarms:
1) Wet well high level.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Do not drop, roll, or lay the pump station on its side.
B. Install pump station in a traffic rated manhole with minimum 6-inch clearance between manhole and pump station tank. Backfill annular space with concrete, CLSM, or similar material to prevent flotation.
C. Install pump station so that 1 to 4 inches of accessway, below the bottom of the lid, extends above the finished grade line. The finished grade shall slope away from the unit.
D. Provide bedding material under each unit as recommended by the manufacturer and meeting the requirements indicated on the Drawings.
E. A concrete anti-flotation collar, sized according to the manufacturer's instructions shall be required and shall be poured in place around the sump. Each grinder pump station shall have a minimum of 3 lifting eyes for loading and unloading purposes.
F. Unit shall be leveled, and filled with water, to the bottom of the inlet, to help prevent the unit from shifting while the concrete is being poured.
1. Concrete must be manually vibrated to ensure there are no voids.
2. If it is necessary to pour the concrete to a level higher than the inlet piping, an 8-inch sleeve is required over the inlet prior to the concrete being poured.
3. Follow the manufacturer's written installation instructions.
G. Alarm/disconnect panel shall be furnished, installed, and wired to the grinder pump station by Contractor.
H. Contractor shall mount the alarm panel where indicated on the Drawings and as per national and local codes. Install all electrical and conduit between the panel and the pump station.
3.02 FACTORY TEST
A. Each grinder pump shall be submerged and operated for 5 minutes (minimum).
1. Included in this procedure shall be the testing of all ancillary components such as, the anti-siphon valve, check valve, discharge line, level sensors, and each unit's dedicated controls.
2. All factory tests shall incorporate each of the above listed items.
3. Actual appurtenances and controls which will be installed in the field shall be particular to the tested pump only.
Packaged Grinder Pump Station
11309-9 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/11309 (DraftFinal)
4. Certified test results shall be available upon request showing the operation of each grinder pump at 2 different points on its curve, with the maximum pressure no less than 40 pounds per square inch.
5. Engineer reserves the right to inspect such testing procedures with representatives of Owner, at the facility 21 days' notice shall be given prior to testing the pumps.
3.03 START-UP AND FIELD TESTING
A. Manufacturer shall provide the services of a qualified factory trained technician who shall inspect the placement and wiring of each station, perform field tests as specified in this Section, and instruct Owner's personnel in the operation and maintenance of the equipment before the stations are accepted by the Owner.
Technician shall be onsite for a minimum of 8 hours, exclusive of travel time, to perform start-up and testing.
B. All equipment and materials necessary to perform testing shall be the responsibility of Contractor.
C. Upon completion of the installation, the authorized factory technician will perform the following test on each station:
1. Make certain the discharge shut-off valve is fully open. This valve must not be closed when the pump is operating.
2. Turn on the alarm power circuit.
3. Fill the wet well with water to a depth sufficient to verify the high level alarm is operating. Shut off water.
4. Turn on pump power circuit.
a. Initiate operation to verify automatic "on/off" controls are operative. b. Pump should immediately turn on.
c. Within 3 minutes the pump will turn off.
5. Test remote alarm to PLC.
D. Upon completion of the start-up and testing, manufacturer shall submit to Engineer the start-up authorization form describing the results of the tests performed for each grinder pump station. Final acceptance of the system will not occur until authorization forms have been received for each pump station installed.
END OF SECTION
Vertical Turbine Pumps
11313-1 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/11313 (DraftFinal) SECTION 11313
VERTICAL TURBINE PUMPS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
1. Vertical turbine pumps with radial, mixed flow, or axial (propeller) type impellers and drivers as scheduled.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. American Bearing Manufacturers Association (ABMA):
1. 9 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings.
2. 11 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Roller Bearings.
B. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME):
1. B16.1 - Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings, Class 25, 125, and 250.
2. B16.5 - Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: NPS 1/2 through 24.
C. American Water Works Association (AWWA):
1. C205 - Standard for Cement-Mortar Protective Lining and Coating for Steel Water Pipe, 4-Inch (100 mm) and Larger-Shop Applied.
D. ASTM International (ASTM):
1. A 48 - Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings.
2. A 53 - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless.
3. A 108 - Standard Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon and Alloy, Cold-Finished.
4. A 276 - Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes.
5. A 278 - Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings for Pressure-Containing Parts for Temperatures Up to 650 degrees Fahrenheit (350 degrees Celsius).
6. A 283 - Standard Specification for Low and Intermediate Tensile Strength Carbon Steel Plates.
7. A 516 - Standard Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon Steel, for Moderate-and Lower-Temperature Service.
8. A 582 - Standard Specification for Free-Machining Stainless Steel Bars.
9. A 743 - Standard Specification for Castings, Iron-Chromium, Iron-Chromium-Nickel, Corrosion Resistant, for General Application.
10. B 148 - Standard Specification for Aluminum Bronze Sand Castings.
11. B 505 - Standard Specification for Copper Alloy Continuous Castings.
12. B 584 - Standard Specification for Copper Alloy Sand Castings for General Applications.
13. F 593 - Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bolts, Hex Cap Screws, and Studs.
14. F 594 - Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Nuts.
Vertical Turbine Pumps
11313-2 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/11313 (DraftFinal) E. Hydraulic Institute (HI):
1. 2.1-2.2 - Vertical Pumps for Nomenclature and Definitions.
2. 2.3 - Vertical Pumps for Design and Application.
3. 2.4 - Vertical Pumps for Installation Operation and Maintenance.
4. 2.6 - Vertical Pump Tests.
5. 9.1-9.5 - Pumps - General Guidelines for Types, Definitions, Application, and Sound Measurement and Decontamination.
F. International Standards Organization (ISO):
1. ISO 9001 Certified.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Pump head (total dynamic head, TDH), flow capacity, pump efficiency, net positive suction head available (NPSHa), and net positive suction head required (NPSHr):
As defined in HI 2.1-2.2, 2.3, 2.6, and 9.1-9.5 and as modified in the Specifications.
The pump head and efficiency are evaluated at the outlet of the discharge head and include the net losses in the pump column and discharge.
B. Flow, head, efficiency, and motor horsepower specified in this Section are minimums unless stated otherwise.
C. Suction head: Gauge pressure available at pump intake flange or bell in feet of fluid above atmospheric.
D. Tolerances: This Section and related sections contain tolerances that may be more stringent than Hydraulic Institute Standard tolerances. Where tolerances are not mentioned, Hydraulic Institute Standards 2.1-2.2, 2.3, 2.4, and 9.1-9.5 shall apply.
1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Components: Pump, driver, motors, and drive arrangements as specified or as scheduled with shafts, columns, barrels, intermediate bearings, seals or packing, couplings, base plates, guards, supports, anchor bolts, necessary valves, gauges, taps, lifting eyes, stands, and other items as required for a complete and operational system.
B. Design requirements:
1. Pump performance characteristics:
a. As specified in the Pump Schedule.
b. Performance tolerances shall be the same as the test tolerances specified in Section 15958 - Mechanical Equipment Testing.
c. Pump curve shall be continuously rising throughout the design conditions listed in the pump schedule.
2. Motor characteristics: As specified in the Pump Schedule.
Vertical Turbine Pumps
11313-3 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/11313 (DraftFinal)
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit as specified in Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures.
B. Torsional analysis: Submit as specified in Section 15050 - Common Work Results for Mechanical Equipment when scheduled.
C. Pump test report showing testing conformance to listed standards for the Engineer Of Record for review and approval prior to shipment.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. General: As specified in Section 15050 - Common Work Results for Mechanical Equipment.
B. Provide pumps specified in this Section from same manufacturer. Require pump manufacturer to furnish and coordinate pump, driver, drive, and pump components including barrel/can as scheduled and to provide written installation and checkout requirements.
C. Pump manufacturer must be ISO 9001 certified.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. As specified in Section 15050 - Common Work Results for Mechanical Equipment.
1.08 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental requirements: As specified in Section 01850 - Design Criteria.
1.09 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Coordinate work with restrictions as specified in the Agreement and Contract RFP in Volumes 1 and 2.
1.10 WARRANTY
A. Provide warranty as specified in Section 01783 - Warranties and Bonds.
1. Provide a 2-year duration special warranty.
1.11 MAINTENANCE
A. Special tools: Deliver 1 set for each furnished pump type and size needed to assemble and disassemble pump system.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. One of the following or equal:
1. National Pump Company: model as scheduled.
Vertical Turbine Pumps
11313-4 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/11313 (DraftFinal)
2. Flowserve; similar to model as scheduled.
3. Peerless Pump; similar to scheduled model.
4. Sulzer/Johnston Pumps; similar to scheduled model.
5. Weir/Floway; similar to scheduled model.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. General: Materials in the Pump Schedule shall be the type and grade as specified in this Section, and shall be in conformance with all applicable ASTM Standard specifications.
2.03 GENERAL PUMP CONSTRUCTION
A. Type: Industrial, heavy duty, vertical turbine, centrifugal type pumps meeting performance requirements and features as scheduled and as specified.
B. Discharge Head: Custom fabricated discharge head with NEMA C-Face motor mount, pressure rated base flange, and pressure rated discharge flange fabricated from Type 316L stainless steel in conformance with ASTM A 312. Provide access to the pump shaft seal and coupling through the center section of the discharge head, with hinged guard, and NPT drain connections, and welded lifting lugs on either side of the head to facilitate crane removal. All components shall be fabricated from Type 316 SST.
C. Discharge flange: ASME B16.1 or B16.5 drilled; rated for 1.5 times the pump shutoff head at 120 degrees Fahrenheit.
D. Discharge head base flange: ASME B16.1 or B16.5 drilled; rated for 1.5 times the pump shutoff head at 120 degrees Fahrenheit. Provided NPT threaded taps on both sides of flange for downhole control valve hydraulic fittings and trickle flow connections as shown on the drawings.
E. Discharge nozzles: Provide 1/2-inch NPT taps for pressure gauges; install nipple and gauge with block valve. Additional ports are required for the nitrogen lines for the down hole control valve as well as the trickle flow and pre lube as shown on the mechanical drawings.
F. Bearings:
1. Design driver/motor bearings to support the line shaft assembly and rated for ABMA L10 life of 40,000 hours at Design Rated Point flow and head in accordance with ABMA 9 or ABMA 11.
2. Design motor to withstand continuous duty full load thrust and momentary upthrust that may occur during pump on/off or other operations.
G. Fasteners: Provide Type 316 stainless steel fasteners in accordance with ASTM F 593 or ASTM F 594.
2.04 PUMP SUCTION ASSEMBLY
A. Pump suction assembly: Provide suction bell. Provide anti-vortex baffles, foot valve, and strainer when scheduled.
Vertical Turbine Pumps
11313-5 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/11313 (DraftFinal) B. Design suction bells and provide strainers and anti-vortex baffles to minimize solids plugging and vortexing. Screens to have a flow area at least 4 times the suction pipe area.
C. Materials:
1. Pump suction bell: As scheduled.
2. Anti-vortex baffles: Same material as scheduled for pump suction bell.
3. Pump suction bell bearing: As scheduled.
4. Pump suction strainer: When strainer scheduled, provide Type 316 stainless steel.
2.05 PUMP IMPELLER BOWL ASSEMBLIES
A. Pump impeller assembly:
1. Type: As scheduled.
2. Maximum number of vanes: As scheduled.
3. Number of stages: As scheduled.
4. Required balance: In conformance with the Hydraulic Institute Standards.
5. Method of securing impellers to shafts: Keyed and secured by a bronze nut locked in place or locked by other methods acceptable to the Engineer.
Provide any special tools required for removal and installation of pump impellers.
6. Provisions for adjustment of axial clearance: Make such adjustment through use of motor adjusting nut or adjustable coupling.
7. Impeller thrust: When appropriate for the specified impeller type, provide hydraulically balanced impeller to minimize down thrust.
B. Intermediate and discharge impeller cases:
1. Material: As scheduled.
2. Attached with bolting.
C. Pump impeller bowl bearings: Provide bearing for each impeller; material as scheduled.
D. Diffusion vanes: Provide vanes cast into bowl.
E. Suction bowl bearings:
1. Provide bronze sleeved bearings with self-contained lubrication system filled with graphite type non-soluble grease when grease lubrication scheduled; provide bearing with sand cap.
2. When service is potable water, provide non-toxic grease approved by the Food and Drug Administration for use in potable water.
F. Design with smooth water passages to reduce clogging by stringy or fibrous materials on impellers or shafting.
G. Design replaceable wear rings for both the bowl and impeller on each impeller bowl.
H. Design capable of passing solids with a sphere size as scheduled or larger.
Vertical Turbine Pumps
11313-6 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/11313 (DraftFinal)
2.06 LINE SHAFTS
A. Provide line shaft type and lubrication type as scheduled and as specified in this Section.
B. Open line shaft, product lubricated:
1. Shaft and couplings:
a. Provide keyed shaft type mechanical couplings with key or set screw locking of shaft couplings.
b. Shaft threaded connections are allowed. Threads shall be cleaned before assembly.
2. Bearings and bearing retainers: Provide bearings and retainers spaced as scheduled, but not to exceed 10 feet; provide at least 1 bearing for each line shaft length; provide grease fitting for top bearing extended to outside any guards when grease lubrication specified.
3. Provide shaft centralizers as directed by pump manufacturer.
4. Materials:
a. Shaft and couplings: As scheduled; where hard faced steel shaft is specified, hard face at sleeve bearings to 550 Brinell minimum. b. Bearings and bearing retainers: As scheduled.
C. Strength: Able to withstand minimum 1.5 times maximum operating torque and other loads.
D. Sleeves: Provide shafting with hardened sleeves where shafts pass through bearings or stuffing boxes as scheduled; Brinell 550 or higher for hardened shaft; when the specified mechanical seals cannot be installed on a hardened shaft, hardened shafts are not required in the area of the mechanical seal.
E. Design pump line shafting in interchangeable lengths as scheduled, but not to exceed 10 feet; shaft lengths to match scheduled pump column lengths.
F. Coupling strength: Design driver to pump line shaft coupling of sufficient length and strength to maintain line shaft alignment.
G. Adjustment:
1. Design a means to adjust shaft position to adjust impeller position.
2. For motor driven units with solid shaft motors, design driver to pump line shaft coupling to allow adjustment of the impeller position.
3. For motor driven units with hollow shafts, an adjusting nut may be provided at the top of the motor shaft.
H. Spacer coupling: When mechanical seals are scheduled, provide an adjustable spacer coupling to allow removal of the seal without driver removal.
2.07 PUMP COLUMN PIPE
A. Pump column pipe: Thickness and material as scheduled.
B. For each ASR well pump: Provide a suction pipe assembly which shall be connected to the coupled inlet of the pump bowl assembly. Each suction pipe assembly shall consist of a downhole control valve, and downhole inline check (foot) valve as described in the Valve Schedule on the mechanical drawings; an inlet cone Vertical Turbine Pumps
11313-7 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/11313 (DraftFinal) strainer shall be provided on the inlet side of the check valve as shown on the detail on the mechanical. Provide the hydraulic control lines to the downhole valve as per the manufacturer’s instructions and as shown on the mechanical drawings.
C. Head connection: Design with flanged and bolted connection to discharge head.
D. Design Working Pressure: Design to withstand a design working pressure not less than 1.20 times the maximum shutoff total dynamic head with the maximum diameter impeller at the maximum operating speed plus the maximum suction static head.
E. Pressure test: Design to withstand a 5 minute hydrostatic test pressure not less than
1.5 times the design working pressure; perform test at source.
F. Lengths and connections: Design with maximum 10 foot length, or less if scheduled, interchangeable column sections with flanged or threaded with registered fit screwed connections as scheduled.
G. Diameter: Design column inside diameter for no more than 2 feet of fluid friction loss per 100 feet of column length.
H. Design of the column pipe to the pump column discharge head assembly is custom and shall be constructed as shown on the drawings.
2.08 PUMP DISCHARGE HEAD ASSEMBLY
A. Design the fabricated discharge head for pressure-rated base connection to the top of wellhead casing fittings shown on the drawings. The top of the wellhead casing is a custom casing that includes the annular recharge connection as shown on the drawings.
B. Design the discharge vertical to horizontal flow transition as a smooth pipe elbow or from a minimum of 3 pipe pieces mitered to form the elbow.
C. Design discharge head to mate with the driver as scheduled.
D. Head and base plate construction: Sufficient strength, weight, and thickness to provide accurate alignment, prevent excessive deflection and support the drive motor.
E. Stuffing box and seal:
1. Design the discharge head with a stuffing box to accommodate packing or mechanical seals as scheduled.
2. Packing: When packing scheduled, provide stuffing box arranged for packing (sized for bronze lantern ring and 6 packing rings minimum); provide hollow shaft motor with top adjusting nut.
3. Mechanical seal: When scheduled, provide stuffing box suitable for the specified seal and provide a solid shaft or hollow shaft motor with spacer coupling, as scheduled.
4. Drain: Provide drain, minimum 3/4 inch size, for pump stuffing box leakage, together with drain line to the pump can or wet well or to nearest equipment drain as shown on the Drawings.
Vertical Turbine Pumps
11313-8 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/11313 (DraftFinal) F. Discharge vent: Provide 3/4 inch NPT threaded high point vent on discharge; install pipe nipple with threaded gate valves in vent.
G. Materials: As scheduled.
H. Pump discharge head base flange connection to top of wellhead flange connection shall be rated for a minimum operating pressure of 150 psi.
2.09 EQUIPMENT GUARDS
A. Provide equipment safety guards as specified in Section 15050 - Common Work Results for Mechanical Equipment.
B. Shop fabricate pump discharge head per Section 05120 - Structural Steel and Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications.
2.10 DRIVERS
A. Horsepower:
1. As scheduled.
2. Listed driver horsepower is the minimum to be supplied. a. Increase driver horsepower if required to prevent driver overload while operating at any point of the supplied pump operating head-flow curve including runout.
b. When scheduled driver is a motor, increase motor horsepower if required to prevent operation in the service factor.
c. Make all structural, mechanical, and electrical changes required to accommodate increased horsepower.
B. Motors: Provide motors as specified in Section 16222 - Low Voltage Motors up to 500 Horsepower, and as specified in this Section:
1. RPM: As scheduled.
2. Enclosure: As scheduled.
3. Electrical characteristics: As scheduled.
4. Efficiency, service factor, insulation, and other motor characteristics: As specified in Section 16222 - Low Voltage Motors up to 500 Horsepower.
5. Motor accessories: As specified in Section 16222 - Low Voltage Motors up to 500 Horsepower, and in this Section.
6. Coordinate motors with the variable frequency drive manufacturer to ensure compatibility between the motor and variable frequency drive.
C. Other drivers: As scheduled and as specified in sections listed in the Schedule.
D. Non-reverse ratchets: When scheduled, provide driver with non-reverse ratchets or pin mechanism to prevent reverse rotation of the pump and driver during recharge operations for the ASR well pumps.
2.11 SUPPORTS
A. Strength: Design pump discharge head and driver (motor or engine) supports to withstand a minimum of 1.5 times the maximum imposed operating loads or the imposed seismic loads, whichever is greater.
Vertical Turbine Pumps
11313-9 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/11313 (DraftFinal) B. Resonant frequency: Design supports in conjunction with the pump, shafting, drivers, bearings, and other components to avoid natural resonant frequencies, either torsional, radial, or axial as specified in Section 15958 - Mechanical Equipment Testing.
C. Coordinate pump and drive system supports with the foundation designs as shown on the Drawings.
2.12 FINISHES
A. Prepare surfaces and apply protective coatings as specified in Section 09960 - High-Performance Coatings.
2.13 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Witnessing: Source or factory testing shall be witnessed by the Engineer or Owner when scheduled; provide advanced notice of source testing as specified in Section 15958 - Mechanical Equipment Testing.
1. Provide a test report showing testing conformance to listed standards for the Engineer Of Record for review and approval prior to shipment.
B. Equipment performance test: Test level as scheduled; test as specified in Section 15958 - Mechanical Equipment Testing.
C. Vibration test: Test level as scheduled; test as specified in Section 15958 - Mechanical Equipment Testing.
D. Noise test: Test level as scheduled; test as specified in Section 15958 - Mechanical Equipment Testing.
E. Motor factory tests: Test as specified in Section 16222 - Low Voltage Motors up to 500 Horsepower.
F. Hydrostatic pressure tests: As specified for components in this Section.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and as specified in Section 15050 - Common Work Results for Mechanical Equipment.
B. Install pump discharge head per Section 05120 - Structural Steel and Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications.
3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Witnessing: All field-testing shall be witnessed by the Engineer; provide advanced notice of field-testing as specified in Section 15958 - Mechanical Equipment Testing.
Vertical Turbine Pumps
11313-10 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/11313 (DraftFinal) B. Inspection and checkout: As specified in Sections 15958 - Mechanical Equipment Testing.
C. Equipment performance test: Test level as scheduled; test as specified in Section 15958 - Mechanical Equipment Testing.
D. Vibration test: Test level as scheduled; test as specified in Section 15958 - Mechanical Equipment Testing.
E. Noise test: Test level as scheduled; test as specified in Section 15958 - Mechanical Equipment Testing.
F. Operational testing: As specified in Section 01756 - Commissioning.
G. Provide quality control as specified in Section 01450 - Quality Control.
3.03 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES
A. Require manufacturer to inspect system before initial start-up and certify that system has been correctly installed and prepared for start-up as specified in this Section and in Sections 15958 - Mechanical Equipment Testing.
B. Training: As specified in Section 01756 - Commissioning.
3.04 PUMP SCHEDULE
Tag Numbers WD34-PUMP-30101 WD34-PUMP-36101
Site Location Campus Oaks Misty Woods
General Characteristics:
Service ASR Well Pump
Well-13
ASR Well Pump
Well-19
Quantity 1 1
First Named Manufacturer's Model Number TBD TBD
Maximum Noise, dBA at 3 feet 85 85
Torsional Analysis Required Required
Minimum Pumped Fluid Degrees Fahrenheit 60 60
Normal Pumped Fluid Degrees Fahrenheit 70 70
Maximum Pumped Fluid Degrees
Fahrenheit
85 85
Pump Characteristics:
Minimum Number of Stages 3 3
Impeller Type Enclosed Enclosed
Pump Impeller Bowl Bearing Lubrication Pumped Liquid Pumped Liquid Vertical Turbine Pumps
11313-11 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/11313 (DraftFinal) Tag Numbers WD34-PUMP-30101 WD34-PUMP-36101
Site Location Campus Oaks Misty Woods
Suction Bowl Bearing Lubrication Pumped Liquid Pumped Liquid Suction Strainer Type 316 SST Type 316 SST
Line Shaft Type Open Open
Minimum Line Shaft Bearing Spacing, Feet 10 10
Line Shaft Lubrication Pumped Liquid Pumped Liquid
Discharge Shaft Seal Type Single Mechanical Single Mechanical Pump Column 12-inch 304 SST 12-inch 304 SST
Pump Column Connection Type Nitronic 60 threaded
Coupling
Nitronic 60 Threaded
Coupling
Column Flange Fasteners Type 18-8 or 304
SST
Hex Bolt Sets
Type 18-8 or 304
SST
Hex Bolt Sets
Maximum Column Section Lengths, Feet 10 10
Minimum Overall Length of Column Pipe,
Shafting and Appurtenances
245.1-ft (Note 3) 201.5-ft (Note 3)
Shaft Coupling Type Threaded Coupler Threaded Coupler
Speed Control Variable Frequency
Drive
Variable Frequency
Drive
Maximum Pump rpm 1,800 1,800
Minimum Pump rpm 1,300 1,300
Rated Design Point (at 95% of Maximum Revolutions per Minute): (See Note 1) Flow, gpm 2,200 2,700
Head, feet 522 462
Minimum Efficiency, Percent 82 82
Other Conditions: (See Note 1)
Shut Off Head, Feet (maximum) TBD TBD
Maximum NPSHr at Specified Flow, Feet TBD TBD
Minimum NPSHa at Specified Flow, Feet TBD TBD
Minimum Suction Static Head, Feet Min 30-foot
Submergence
Min 40-foot
Submergence
Pump Materials:
Suction Nozzle or Bell Vesconite H/L Vesconite H/L
Suction Bell Bearing Vesconite H/L Vesconite H/L
Vertical Turbine Pumps
11313-12 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/11313 (DraftFinal) Tag Numbers WD34-PUMP-30101 WD34-PUMP-36101
Site Location Campus Oaks Misty Woods
Bowl and Suction Cases Vesconite H/L Vesconite H/L
Impeller Bronze Bronze
Impeller Bearing Vesconite H/L Vesconite H/L
Rubber
Impeller Shaft Key 316 SST 316 SST
Head Shaft ASTM 276
Type 416 SST
ASTM 276
Type 416 SST
Impeller Shaft ASTM 276
Type 416 SST
ASTM 276
Type 416 SST
Line Shaft and Coupling ASTM 276
Type 416 SST
ASTM 276
Type 416 SST
Line Shaft Bearings Vesconite Vesconite
Shaft Sleeve Hardened Hardened
Column Material and Thickness, Inch or
Schedule
304 SST 304 SST
Fabricated Discharge Head/Driver Stand
(Note 4)
316 SST with 18-inch
base, 12-inch
discharge flange
(Verify Flanged or
welded Base and DIA
with mechanical
drawings)
316 SST with 18-inch
base, 12-inch
discharge flange
(Verify Flanged or
welded Base and DIA
with mechanical
drawings)
Fabricated Discharge Head Base Flange
Connections (Note 5)
(2) 1/4-inch NPT
nipples (for downhole
control valve
(1) 1 1/4-inch NPT
nipple for trickle flow
(2) 1/4-inch NPT
nipples (for downhole
control valve
(1) 1 1/4-inch NPT
nipple for trickle flow
Discharge Head Bearing Vesconite Vesconite
Discharge Stuffing Box 316 SST 316 SST
Driver Characteristics:
Driver Type Motor Motor
Drive Arrangement Vertical, Coupled
Non-Reverse Ratchet
(Note 2)
Vertical, Coupled
Non-Reverse Ratchet
(Note 2)
Non-Reverse Ratchets Required Required
Minimum Driver Horsepower 450 450
Maximum Driver rpm 1,800 1,800
Vertical Turbine Pumps
11313-13 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/11313 (DraftFinal) Tag Numbers WD34-PUMP-30101 WD34-PUMP-36101
Site Location Campus Oaks Misty Woods
Motor Characteristics (when motor is driver type):
Inverter Duty Rated Yes Yes
Motor Voltage/Phases/Hertz 460/3/60 460/3/60
Enclosure Type TEFC TEFC
Motor Shaft Type Hollow Hollow
Source Quality Control Testing:
Test Witnessing Not Witnessed Not Witnessed
Performance Test Level 1 1
Vibration Test Level 1 1
Noise Test Level 1 1
Field Quality Control Testing:
Performance Test Level 1 1
Vibration Test Level 1 1
Noise Test Level 1 1
END OF SECTION
Polyethylene Tanks
13208-1 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/13208 (DraftFinal) SECTION 13208
POLYETHYLENE TANKS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes: Polyethylene storage tanks made from crosslinked polyethylene resin.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. American Concrete Institute (ACI):
1. 318 - Building Code and Commentary.
B. American Society for Mechanical Engineers (ASME):
1. B16.4 - Gray Iron Threaded Fittings.
2. B16.5 - Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: NPS 1/2 through 24.
C. ASTM International (ASTM):
1. D638 - Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics.
2. D790 - Standard Test Methods for Flexural Properties of Unreinforced and Reinforced Plastics and Electrical Insulating Materials.
3. D1505 - Standard Test Method for Density of Plastics by the Density-Gradient Technique.
4. D1525 - Standard Test Method for Vicat Softening Temperature of Plastics.
5. D1693 - Standard Test Method for Environmental Stress-Cracking of Ethylene Plastics.
6. D1998 - Standard Specification for Polyethylene Upright Storage Tanks.
7. D2837 - Standard Test Method for Obtaining Hydrostatic Design Basis for Thermoplastic Pipe Materials or Pressure Design Basis for Thermoplastic Pipe Products.
D. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):
1. 30 - Flammable and Combustible Liquid Code.
E. National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA).
F. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA):
1. 29 CRF Part 1910 - Occupational Safety and Health Standards.
G. NSF/ANSI Standard 61 – Drinking Water System Components.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Fabrication drawings for each tank including:
1. Dimensions.
2. Tank wall thickness.
3. Materials of construction.
Polyethylene Tanks
13208-2 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/13208 (DraftFinal)
4. Tank fittings.
5. Tank appurtenances.
6. Tank restraint system.
7. Tank resin and hoop stress data.
B. Chemical compatibility sheet to include:
1. Chemical to be stored.
2. Percentage of chemical.
3. Temperature of chemical.
C. Engineering design calculations of restraint and anchoring system signed by a civil or structural engineer registered in the state where the project is located.
D. Installation instructions.
E. Warranty.
F. Certification to certify that each tank is suitable for the specified chemical service, no degradation within warranty period, including tank fittings and gasket material.
G. Proof of qualification: Provide lists of installation and contact information with same type of application and chemical used.
H. Color charts for proposed coating systems.
1.04 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer warranty against defects:
1. Tank: 5 years full warranty. Prorated warranties are not acceptable.
2. Heat tracing system if scheduled: 10 years.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualification of manufacturer: Manufacturer with experienced personnel, physical facilities, and management capacity sufficient to produce custom-made rotationally molded polyethylene tanks of the size, exposure, and chemical services specified for minimum 5 years with satisfactory performance record.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 SCOPE OF SUPPLIES
A. Provide all materials, labor, equipment, and hardware to provide all polyethylene storage tanks with specified fittings and accessories, seismic and wind load restraint systems, anchor bolts, and flange flexible connectors for complete installation in the positions and orientations indicated on the Drawings.
2.02 MANUFACTURERS
A. One of the following or equal:
1. Poly Processing Co.
Polyethylene Tanks
13208-3 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/13208 (DraftFinal)
2.03 DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
A. Tanks: As scheduled.
B. Tank wall thickness: Calculated in accordance with ASTM D1998 using design specific gravity as scheduled. Note that design specific gravity may be higher than specific gravity of tank contents.
C. Design requirements:
1. The minimum required wall thickness of the cylindrical shell at any fluid level shall be determined by the following equation, but shall not be less than
0.187 inches thick:
T = P x O.D./2 SD = 0.433 x S.G. x H x O.D./2 SD
T = wall thickness, in.
SD = hydrostatic design stress, psi
P = pressure (.433 x S.G. x H), psi
H = fluid head, ft.
S.G. = specific gravity, g/cm^3
O.D. = outside diameter, in.
D. The hydrostatic design stress shall be determined by multiplying the hydrostatic design basis, determined by ASTM D2837 using rotationally molded samples, with a service factor selected for the application.
1. The hydrostatic design stress is 600 pounds per square inch at 73 degrees Fahrenheit for Type I and Type II materials.
2. The tank shall have a stratiform (tapered wall thickness) wall.
E. The hydrostatic design stress shall be derated for service above 100 degrees Fahrenheit and for mechanical loading of the tank.
F. The minimum design specific gravity shall be 1.9.
G. The minimum required wall thickness for the cylinder straight shell must be sufficient to support its own weight in an upright position without any external support.
1. Flat areas shall be provided to allow locating large fittings on the cylinder straight shell.
H. The top head must be integrally molded with the cylinder shell.
1. The minimum thickness of the top head shall be equal to the top of the straight wall.
2. The top head of tanks with 2,000 or more gallons of capacity shall be designed to provide a minimum of 1,300 square inches of flat area for fitting locations.
I. Tanks with 2,000 or more gallons of capacity shall have a minimum of 3 lifting lugs integrally molded into the top head.
1. The lifting lugs shall be designed to allow erection of an empty tank.
Polyethylene Tanks
13208-4 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/13208 (DraftFinal) J. The tank shall be designed to provide a minimum of 4 tie-down lugs integrally molded into the top head.
1. The tie-down lugs shall be designed to allow tank retention in wind and seismic loading situations without tank damage.
K. Tank shell thickness:
1. In accordance with ASTM D1998, Section 6.1.
2. Design tank wall thickness for liquid with specific gravity as specified.
3. Provide adequate thickness at all fittings and connection points for mounting of fittings to the tank without damage to the tank or causing excessive deflection.
4. Maximum allowable hoop stress used in tank wall thickness calculations per ASTM D1998 shall be based on test data in accordance with ASTM D2837.
L. Seismic and wind load restraint system:
1. Seismic design criteria: As specified in Section 01850 - Design Criteria.
2. Wind design criteria: As specified in Section 01850 - Design Criteria.
3. Consist of Type 316 stainless steel angles or brackets equally spaced around the tank perimeter anchored into the concrete tie down cable.
4. If the restraint system includes the use of tensioning and adjustment devices, such as turnbuckles, provide easy adjustment of the cables at the time of construction and as required in the future.
a. Hardware shall be provided to attach cables to anchored brackets at the base of the tank.
5. The tank shall be designed to provide a minimum of 4 tie-down lugs integrally molded into the top head.
a. The tie-down lugs shall be designed to allow tank retention in wind and seismic loading situations without tank damage.
b. Anchor bolts shall be provided by the Contractor per the instructions and the base plates for the system.
2.04 TANK MATERIALS
A. High-density crosslinked polyethylene (XLPE).
B. Resin:
1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a. PAXON, grade 7204 resin for crosslinkable polyethylene.
C. The material used shall be virgin polyethylene resin as compounded and certified by the manufacturer.
1. Tanks shall be made from crosslinked polyethylene resin as manufactured by ExxonMobil Chemical, or resin of equal physical and chemical properties.
2. Resin choice would be based on the specific application, chemical to be stored and concentration.
D. Ultraviolet stabilizer:
1. The polyethylene resin material shall contain a minimum of a UV 8 stabilizer as compounded by the resin manufacturer.
2. Pigments may be added but shall not exceed 0.25 percent (dry blended) of the total weight.
Polyethylene Tanks
13208-5 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/13208 (DraftFinal) E. Free of holes, blisters, crazing, cracking, delamination, undispersed raw materials, and any sign of contamination from foreign matter.
1. The finished tank wall shall be free of visual defects such as foreign inclusions, air bubbles, pinholes, pimples, crazing, cracking, and delaminations.
2. All cut edges where openings are cut into the tanks shall be trimmed smooth.
F. Resin shall meet or exceed the following properties:
1. Mechanical Properties of Type 1 of Tank Material: Current XLPE Resin:
Property ASTM Value
Density (Resin) D1505 0.938-0.946 g/cc
Tensile (Yield Stress 2-inch/min) D638 3,000 psi
Elongation at Break (2-inch/min.) D638 >300 percent
ESCR (100 percent Igepal, Cond. A, F50) D1693 >1000 hours ESCR (10 percent Igepal, Cond. A, F50) D1693 >1000 hours Vicat Softening Temperature, D1525 250
Flexural Modulus D790 100,000 psi
G. Gel test:
1. Inner portion of tank wall:
a. Not less than 65 percent.
b. ASTM D1998 requirements.
2. Entire wall thickness: Not less than 80 percent.
H. Restraint system:
1. Metal components, including anchor bolts:
a. Type 304 stainless steel.
b. The Anchor bolts shall be supplied by the tank manufacturer. c. The drawings and calculations for the seismic system shall be submitted for review.
2. Concrete anchors or flush shells shall not be used.
2.05 FITTINGS
A. Terminate in socket, threaded, or flanged connections:
1. Flanges: 150 pound ASME B 16.5.
2. Double flanged CPVC bolted fittings with encapsulated stainless steel or Hastelloy bolts.
3. Threaded connections: ASME B 16.4.
B. Fittings at upper tank sidewall or top:
1. Compression threaded type, long shank, polyvinyl chloride flanged fittings with deep cut threads (not injection molded thread) and with dual wide nuts.
2. The bulkhead fittings shall be constructed of PVC, PP, or other specified material.
3. Gaskets shall be a minimum of 1/4 inch thickness and constructed of 60-70 durometer Viton™ or other specified material.
Polyethylene Tanks
13208-6 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/13208 (DraftFinal) C. Fittings on tank top:
1. Bosses molded into the tank.
2. Fittings shall be vertical.
3. The top head shall be integrally molded with the cylinder shell.
4. The minimum thickness of the top head shall be equal to the top of the straight wall.
5. The top head of tanks with 2,000 or more gallons of capacity shall be designed to provide a minimum of 1,300 square inches of flat area for fitting locations.
D. Flanged outlet drain fitting in the lower tank sidewall: Integrally molded into the bottom knuckle of the tank to allow full drainage of tank contents.
E. Fittings and appurtenances for each tank:
1. Sodium Hypochlorite Tank:
a. 1 minimum 2-inch flanged inlet nozzle entering the tank in the top. b. 1 minimum 2-inch full outlet/drain nozzle, integrally molded with tank wall. c. One 3-inch flanged overflow nozzle.
d. One 4-inch flanged roof nozzle for mounting of tank level sensor. 1) Provide a 4-inch diameter, 6-inch spool piece with a 4-inch flange to accommodate a non-contact ultrasonic level transducer.
e. One 4-inch flanged roof vent.
f. One 18 inch flanged type or molded screw type manway lid on top of the tank.
g. Manway shall be sealed and shall be constructed of the same material as tank.
h. The bolts shall be Hastelloy.
i. The gaskets shall be per tank manufacturer recommendation for the chemical stored.
2. Provide flanged flexible connectors for each of the following fittings:
a. Sodium Hypochlorite Tank:
1) The flanged 2 inch inlet nozzle on each tank.
2) The flanged 2 inch outlet/drain nozzle on each tank. 3) The flanged 4 inch roof vent on the tank.
a) Wetted materials shall be selected by the tank manufacturer or vendor for the chemical service.
b) Provide all mounting hardware and supports.
4) Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a) Red Valve, Redflex expansion joints with 3 arches.
b) Snyder, Flexmaster.
c) Proco, 445 BD.
2.06 ACCESSORIES
A. Finish coating:
1. Waterproof and ultraviolet light resistant.
2. Acrylic enamel or latex mastic.
3. 2 coats.
4. Minimum dry film thickness: 5 mil.
5. Color: Selected by Engineer.
Polyethylene Tanks
13208-7 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/13208 (DraftFinal) B. Level gauge:
1. Provide each tank with:
a. Level gauge shall be a magnetic flap type or "reverse float type" made of 2 inch polyvinyl chloride or PVDF stilling well tube.
b. Float.
c. Polypropylene rope.
d. Clear polyvinyl chloride sight tube.
2. Materials: Suitable for the specified chemical service for the individual tanks.
3. Tank level staff gauge:
a. Resistant to abrasion and corrosion.
b. Mounted on the tank adjacent to the indicator.
c. Calibrated in nominal 100 gallon increments.
C. Tank vents:
1. Each tank shall be properly vented for the type of material and flow rates expected.
2. Vents must comply with OSHA Part 1910 normal venting for atmospheric tanks or other accepted standard, or shall be as large as the filling or withdrawal connection, whichever is larger but in no case less than 2 inches nominal inside diameter with screening.
D. Leak Detection:
1. The leak detector unit shall consist of a proximity sensor, a welded 2 inch fpt connection, a 2 inch bung plug with a 3/4 in strain relief, and an indicator box.
The sensor is placed in the interstitial space between the primary and secondary tanks approximately 1 inch above the tank bottom. The indicator box shall be NEMA 4 rated and factory pre-wired for 110 VAC power. All connections shall be labeled to prevent errors in field installation. The indicator box will show a green light when power is on and the sensor is not detecting a liquid. The light is a push to test light allowing the operator to test for power outage or malfunction.
E. Internal fill/down pipes:
1. Internal down pipes shall be prepared per the customer approved drawings and specifications. All internal down pipes shall be supported at 5 foot maximum intervals with a support structure welded to the inside of the primary tank. The support design may utilize a PVDF clamp. All internal down pipes shall be constructed of CPVC.
2.07 TANK FABRICATION
A. Rotationally molded construction in accordance with ASTM D1998.
B. Provide for each tank the following shop finishing:
1. Shipping label identifying:
a. Tank tag number.
b. Chemical service.
2. Coating:
a. Coat each tank and appurtenances after installation as specified in Section 09960 - High-Performance Coatings.
b. Color: Selected by the Engineer.
Polyethylene Tanks
13208-8 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/13208 (DraftFinal)
3. Permanent labels:
a. Identification label.
b. NFPA label specifically coded for the tank contents in accordance with NFPA 30.
c. Paint or affix label onto the tank wall to be clearly visible from outside the tank enclosure.
2.08 TESTING
A. Each tank shall be leak tested by the manufacturer prior to shipment by filling with clean water for a period of at least 4 hours with all fittings installed and blinded.
1. There shall be no measurable drop in liquid surface.
2. Any leaks shall be noted and repaired and the tank shall be re-tested for an additional 4 hours minimum.
a. Reason for leak and method of repair shall be recorded and submitted to the Engineer.
3. Any defects or leaks that have not been adequately repaired will be cause for rejection of the tank.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. General:
1. Transportation, handling, storage of the tanks, and installation shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions.
2. Repair any damage to tank components or the insulation due to transportation or installation.
3. Install piping to tank with sufficient flexibility to allow tank movement of 1 inch in any direction without damage to piping.
B. All tank fitting attachments shall be equipped with flexible couplers or other movement provisions provided by the tank customer.
1. The tank will deflect based upon tank loading, chemical temperature and storage time duration.
2. Tank piping flexible couplers shall be designed to allow 4 percent design movement.
3. Movement shall be considered to occur both outward in tank radius and downward in fitting elevation from the neutral tank fitting placement.
C. For tanks with drain connections that result in flanges extending below the bottom of the tank, coordinate concrete work to provide either a blockout in the main concrete pad or raise tank on a shorter, separate pad to provide clearance between flange and pad.
3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Manufacturer's field service:
1. Inspect the installed tanks for proper installation.
2. Instruct Owner's personnel on operations and maintenance of the tanks.
Polyethylene Tanks
13208-9 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/13208 (DraftFinal)
3.03 SCHEDULE
A. Tank Schedule as follows:
Tag Number
Service Sodium Hypochlorite at 12.5 percent solution
Chemical pH 3.5
Chemical Specific Gravity 1.33
Tank Design Specific Gravity 1.9
Number of Tanks 2
Usable Capacity, each 1,000 gallons
Type of Tank Cross-linked polyethylene (XLPE) with medium density liner General Design Flat bottom, dished top, double wall
Installation Vertical
Diameter (feet) 6 feet-5 inches
Height (feet) 7 feet-1 inch
B. Tank Fitting locations shall be as shown on the drawings.
END OF SECTION
Electric Actuators
13447-1 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/13447 (DraftFinal) SECTION 13447
ELECTRIC ACTUATORS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
1. Electric motor-driven actuators for valves and gates.
B. Equipment tag numbers:
1. As scheduled.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. American Water Works Association (AWWA):
1. C504 - Standard for Rubber-Seated Butterfly Valves.
2. C542 - Standard for Electric Motor Actuators for Valves and Slide Gates.
B. International Organization for Standardization (ISO):
1. 12944 - Paints and Varnishes.
C. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):
1. 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1,000 V Maximum).
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit as specified in Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures and Section 15050 - Common Work Results for Mechanical Equipment.
B. Provide a complete list/schedule of actuators being provided with their associated tag names, as indicated on the Drawings and/or Specifications, service process area and the size of the valve they are actuating.
C. Product data:
1. Electrical ratings:
a. Voltage and number of phases.
b. Starting and running current.
c. Voltage levels and source for control and status.
2. Description of integral control interface.
3. Remote control station components (If applicable).
4. Environmental ratings, including NEMA enclosure rating and submergence capabilities.
5. Gear ratios for both manual and motorized actuation.
6. Opening and closing directions.
7. Electric motor data.
8. Allowable starts per hour.
9. List of included options and accessories.
Electric Actuators
13447-2 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/13447 (DraftFinal)
10. Full travel times.
11. Gearbox data, including gear ratio, and gearbox efficiency.
D. Shop Drawings:
1. Wiring diagrams:
a. Include options and expansion cards furnished with each actuator.
2. Dimensioned drawings of each valve and actuator combination.
3. Dimensioned drawings of each valve gearbox.
E. Calculations:
1. Operating torque.
2. Maximum torque calculations for seating and unseating.
3. Maximum operating torque at starting and normal operation.
4. Indicate factor of safety for all torque calculations.
F. Signed by Professional Engineer registered in the State of California. Installation instructions:
1. Detail the complete installation of the equipment, including rigging, moving, and setting into place.
2. Provide manufacturer’s installation instructions.
G. Quality Control Submittals:
1. Manufacturer’s representative qualifications.
2. Manufacturer’s Certificate of Source Testing as specified in Section 01756 - Commissioning.
3. Manufacturer’s Certificate of Installation as specified in Section 01756 - Commissioning.
4. Manufacturer’s Certificate of Functional Compliance as specified in Section 01756 - Commissioning.
H. Owner Training Submittals:
1. As specified in Section 01756 - Commissioning.
I. Operation and maintenance manuals:
1. As specified in Section 01782 - Operation and Maintenance Manuals.
2. Include a list of configurable parameters and the final values for each.
3. Include a troubleshooting chart covering the complete valve and controls/electrical power systems, showing description of trouble, probable cause, and suggested remedy.
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. As specified in the Agreement and Contract RFP in Volumes 1 and 2, Section 15050 - Common Work Results for Mechanical, and the manufacturer’s instructions.
1.05 PROJECT OR SITE CONDITIONS
A. As specified in Section 01850 - Design Criteria.
Electric Actuators
13447-3 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/13447 (DraftFinal)
1.06 MAINTENANCE
A. As specified in the Agreement and Contract RFP in Volumes 1 and 2.
B. Spare parts:
1. Provide the following (minimum 10 percent of total number of actuators of each model type furnished, but not less than 1 for each model of actuator furnished):
a. Stem nut.
b. Worm shaft subassembly.
c. Drive sleeve subassembly.
d. Complete actuator seal kit.
e. Actuator gearbox oil (sufficient quantity to fill 4 gearboxes). f. Encoder.
g. Control module.
2. Provide 1 spare motor for each size motor furnished.
C. Setting tool:
1. If required for setting or configuring the actuator, provide a handheld setting tool. Furnish 1 setting tool for every 10 actuators.
a. Capable of communicating with PC-based configuration software and transferring the following in either direction between the computer and programmer and setting tool, and between the setting tool and actuator. b. Actuator configurations:
1) Capable of storing up to 10 different configurations. c. Diagnostic data:
Capable of storing 4 complete sets of diagnostic data.
1.07 WARRANTY
A. As specified in Section 01783 - Warranties and Bonds.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Lines 4 inches and larger:
1. One of the following, or equal:
a. Limitorque Corp.:
1) Accutronix MX for multi-turn applications.
2) Accutronix QX quarter-turn applications.
b. Rotork Controls Inc. IQ3 Range:
1) IQ for multi-turn applications.
2) IQT for quarter-turn applications.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Enclosures:
1. Constructed of materials suitable for the environment where the actuator will be installed.
2. Stainless steel external fasteners.
Electric Actuators
13447-4 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/13447 (DraftFinal)
3. Provide O-ring seals for each of the following areas:
a. Between the terminal compartment and the internal electrical elements. b. Between the mechanical and electrical portions to protect from the ingress of oil, and to protect the mechanical components of oil from dust and moisture when the electrical terminal is open.
4. Ratings
a. As scheduled and specified:
b. NEMA Type 6P: Double sealed and IP68 rated for prolonged submergence. c. XP: Factory Mutal (FM) approved for Class I, Division 1 and Division 2 locations.
B. Coatings:
1. Material requirements:
a. Factory prime and coat with an ISO 12944 classification coating of C5M (Marine, offshore estuaries with high salinity) coating with 15 year durability. b. Touch-up damaged coatings with manufacturer provided coating repair kit.
2. Application requirements:
a. Painting shall commence within 4 hours of blast cleaning. b. Each paint coat within the system is to be applied in accordance with the paint manufacturer’s instructions.
c. Paint thickness shall be checked for each coat on each actuator.
3. Qualification requirements:
a. Operators shall be experienced and proficient in surface preparation and coating application techniques.
b. Personnel shall have relevant knowledge of health and safety hazard, use of protective equipment, coating materials, mixing and thinning coatings, coating pot life, surface requirements, etc.
c. Personnel carrying out inspection or verification shall be certified as NACE coating inspector or equivalent such as ICorr.
2.03 CHARACTERISTICS FOR ACTUATORS ON LINES 4 INCHES AND LARGER A. Provide actuators complete and operable with all components and accessories required for operation.
B. Power supply:
1. Voltage and phases as indicated in the Motorized Actuator Schedule on the Drawings.
2. Valve or gate motion independent of power supply phase rotation.
3. Provide an internal backup power source or mechanical indicator to maintain settings and track valve position when main power is off.
4. Actuators shall incorporate major components such as the motor, starter, local controls, terminals, etc., housed within a self-contained, sealed enclosure.
C. Size actuator to move gates or valves from full open to closed position within the time indicated in the Motorized Actuator Schedule on the Drawings:
1. If an operating time is not indicated on the Motorized Actuator Schedule, size the actuator to move gates or valves at minimum 12 inches per minute under maximum load. Measure rate of closure for valves at maximum diameter of disc, plug, or ball.
2. Size actuators so that gear boxes are not required where possible.
Electric Actuators
13447-5 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/13447 (DraftFinal) D. Control interface:
1. Configuration:
a. Provide a non-intrusive, non-contacting interface for configuring input and output settings, control values, ranges, torque switch settings, valve positions switch settings, and options.
1) Configurable from a handheld configuring tool or input devices on the actuator.
2. Local interface, integral to actuator:
a. Non-intrusive, non-contacting selector switches:
1) LOCAL-STOP-REMOTE:
a) Motor actuator operation is prevented with the switch in STOP. 2) OPEN-CLOSE:
a) Controls the valve when LOCAL-STOP-REMOTE is in LOCAL. b) Spring return to center.
c) Configurable between maintained (actuator runs until end of travel, high torque, or a LOCAL-STOP-REMOTE is switched to STOP) and momentary (actuator stops when lever is released). b. Local display:
1) Valve fully open and fully closed indicators.
2) Numerical display showing actual valve or gate position in percent of travel.
3. Remote control station - (VCP):
a. For actuators located more than 5 feet above finished floor/grade or where indicated on the Drawings in the Schedule.
1) NEMA rating to match those to the associated Actuator Schedule. a) Where the rating is not listed, use NEMA Type 4X enclosures for non-hazardous areas, and explosion-proof (XP) Class I
Division 1 for hazardous areas.
b) Pilot devices shall be 30 millimeters and pilot lights shall be illuminated by LEDs.
2) LOCAL-STOP-REMOTE selector switch.
3) LOCAL mode control devices:
a) Operate valve when LOCAL-STOP-REMOTE integral to
actuator is in REMOTE and LOCAL-STOP-REMOTE on remote
control station is in LOCAL.
b) OPEN-STOP-CLOSE maintained switch or OPEN, STOP, and CLOSE pushbuttons where Maintained operation is indicated in the Actuator Schedule.
c) OPEN-CLOSE spring-return switch or OPEN and CLOSE
pushbuttons where momentary operation is indicated in the Actuator Schedule on the Drawings.
4) Pilots’ lights to indicate valve position:
a) Fully open.
b) Fully closed.
4. Control inputs:
a. Capable of using discrete 120 VAC rated control inputs when using a remote control station and a discrete 24 VDC rated control inputs when there is not remote control station.
b. Controls the valve when LOCAL-STOP-REMOTE is in REMOTE. c. Isolated inputs capable of operating from external control voltage source or internal power supply.
Electric Actuators
13447-6 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/13447 (DraftFinal) d. Provide the following inputs:
1) OPEN.
2) CLOSE.
3) STOP.
e. OPEN and CLOSE inputs configurable between maintained (actuator runs until end of travel, high torque, or a STOP input) and momentary (actuator stops when command is removed).
5. Status outputs:
a. Monitor relay output: Dry contact, normally closed, opens when actuator is not in REMOTE or in the event of any internal fault or alarm condition. b. Dry contact outputs configured for the functions indicated on the Drawings. Provide the following outputs for all actuators:
1) Fully closed.
2) Fully open.
3) LOCAL-STOP-REMOTE in REMOTE position.
c. Output contacts rated for 5 amps, 120 VAC, and 24 VDC.
6. Analog input:
a. Provide a 4 to 20 mA analog input for analog modulating valves when indicated on the Drawings.
b. Modulate valve to maintain position based on analog input value. c. Maximum input impedance 250 ohms.
7. Analog output:
a. Provide an isolated 4 to 20 mA analog output when indicated on the Drawings.
1) Loop power sourced from the actuator power supply.
2) Capable of driving into a load up to 500 ohms.
3) Output proportional to process value(s) indicated on the Drawings. 4) Valve or gate position.
5) Operating torque.
E. Features:
1. Time delay on reversal: Incorporate time delay between stopping actuator and starting in opposite direction to limit excessive current, torque, and heating from instantaneous reversal.
2. Data logging:
a. Store diagnostic data and reference data.
b. Time-stamped historical operating data, including number of operations. c. Torque profiles showing actual torque at each valve position through the operating range.
1) Store reference data (recorded during commissioning) and data from last operation.
3. Provide display of logged data on the actuator, or provisions to download to a personal computer.
F. Components:
1. Motors:
a. Specifically designed for valve actuator service with high starting torque, totally enclosed non-ventilated construction.
Electric Actuators
13447-7 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/13447 (DraftFinal) b. Torque ratings equal to or greater than that required for valve seating and dynamic torques with a 25 percent factor of safety.
1) Design requirements for rubber-seated AWWA butterfly valves:
a) Design actuators for maximum gate or valve operating torque, in accordance with and using safety factors required in
AWWA C504 and AWWA C542.
(1) Valve actuator torque requirement for open-close service:
Not less than the required valve-seating and dynamic
torques under design operating conditions in accordance with AWWA C504.
(2) Valve actuator torque requirement for modulating service:
Not less than twice the required valve dynamic torque
under design operating conditions in accordance with
AWWA C504.
2) Design requirements for slide gates, gate valves, knife gate valves, globe valves, and diaphragm valves:
a) Design valves and actuators for maximum operating torque, in accordance with and using safety factors required in
AWWA C542.
b) Design for the maximum torque and thrust running load over the full cycle.
c) Maximum torque or thrust rating: Actuator stall torque or maximum thrust output shall not exceed the torque or thrust capability of the valve or gate, as determined by the valve or gate manufacturer.
c. Capable of being removed and replaced without draining the actuator gear case.
d. Motor bearings shall be amply proportioned of the anti-friction type and permanently lubricated.
e. Rated for operating under the following conditions without exceeding temperature limits with ambient temperature of 40 degrees Celsius. 1) Continuous operation for 15 minutes or twice the open-to-close operating time (whichever is greater) at normal operating torque or 33 percent of maximum torque (whichever is greater).
2) 60 starts per hour for open/close service or 1,200 starts per hour for modulating service.
f. Provide the following motor protection features:
1) Jammed valve (no valve motion detected through a time delay). 2) High motor temperature (sensed by an embedded thermostats). 3) High torque.
4) Single phasing protection.
G. Position sensing:
1. Electronic and adjustable using a solid-state encoder wheel. a. Mechanical limit switches and potentiometers are not acceptable.
2. Capable of retaining position and monitoring valve or gate motion when valve is manually actuated and when main power is not present.
3. Valve range and position switch outputs field adjustable.
Electric Actuators
13447-8 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/13447 (DraftFinal) H. Torque sensing:
1. Torque shutdown setting: 40 percent to 100 percent rated torque:
a. Adjustable in 1 percent increments.
2. Torque display: 0 to 100 percent-rated torque.
3. Capable of interrupting control circuit during both opening and closing and when valve torque overload occurs.
4. Electrical or electronic torque sensing:
a. Extrapolating torque from mechanically measured motor speed is not acceptable due to response time.
5. Independent of variations in frequency, voltage, or temperature.
6. Actuator shall store actual operational torque curves for retrieval by plant maintenance staff.
7. Provide a temporary inhibit of the torque sensing system during unseating or during starting in mid-travel against high inertia loads.
8. Provide visible verification of torque switch status without any housing disassembly.
I. Manual actuators:
1. Hand wheel for manual operation.
a. Maximum 80-pound pull on rim when operating gate or valve under maximum load.
b. Provide pull chain when motorized actuator is located more than 6 feet above floor surface.
1) Chain shall be of sufficient length to reach approximately 4 feet above the operating level.
2) Where the chain obstructs an aisle or walkway, provide holdback or other means to ensure chain does not create a nuisance or hazard to operating personnel.
3) Provide Type 316 stainless steel.
2. Declutch lever: Padlockable, capable of mechanically disengaging motor and related gearing and freeing hand wheel for manual operation.
J. Gearing: Hardened alloy steel spur or helical gears and self-locking, alloy bronze worm gear set.
1. Accurately cut to ensure minimum backlash.
K. Bearings:
1. Anti-friction bearing with caged balls or rollers throughout.
2. Sealed-for-life type thrust bearings housed in a separate thrust base.
L. Drive bushing:
1. Easily detachable for machining to suit the valve stem or gearbox input shaft.
2. Positioned in a detachable base of the actuator.
M. Lubrication:
1. Provide totally enclosed actuator gearing with oil or grease filled gear case suitable for operation at any angle.
2. Actuators requiring special or exotic lubricants are not acceptable.
Electric Actuators
13447-9 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/13447 (DraftFinal)
2.04 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Source Testing:
1. Design and performance test reports in accordance with AWWA C542.
2. Test each actuator with a simulated load.
a. Simulate a typical valve load.
3. Furnish test reports and the Manufacturer’s Certificate of Source Testing.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. As specified in Section 15050 - Common Work Results for Mechanical Equipment.
B. Install the equipment in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
C. Position visual indicators so that they are most easily visible.
D. Installation Verification:
1. Furnish Manufacturer’s Certificate of Installation Verification.
3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. As specified in Section 01756 - Commissioning, Section 15958 - Mechanical Equipment Testing, and this Section.
B. Functional Testing:
1. Installed actuator:
a. Test witnessing: Witnessed.
b. Conduct Level 2 General Equipment Performance Tests. c. Conduct Level 2 Vibration Tests.
d. Conduct Level 2 Noise Tests.
2. Electrical Instrumentation and Controls:
a. Test witnessing: Witnessed.
b. Conduct testing as specified in Section 17950 - Commissioning for Instrumentation and Controls.
3. Furnish test reports and the Manufacturer’s Certificate of Functional Compliance.
C. Manufacturer’s Representative on-site requirements:
a. Installation: 2 trips, 2-day minimum each.
b. Functional testing: 2 trips, 2-day minimum each.
3.03 OWNER TRAINING
A. Perform Owner Training as specified in Section 01756 - Commissioning.
1. Number of sessions: 2.
a. Operations: 2 hours per session.
b. Maintenance: 4 hours per session.
Electric Actuators
13447-10 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/13447 (DraftFinal)
3.04 INTELLIGENT ACTUATOR SCHEDULE
A. Provide actuators indicated on the Drawings:
1. Major process actuators are listed in the Intelligent Actuator Schedule indicated on the Drawings.
END OF SECTION
2880 GATEWAY OAKS DRIVE, SUITE 300 • SACRAMENTO, CALIFORNIA 95833 • P. 916.565.4888 • F. 916.565.4880
CONTRACT DOCUMENTS FOR
DESIGN-ASSIST CONSTRUCTION OF
AQUIFER STORAGE AND RECOVERY WELLS
13 (Campus Oaks) AND 19 (Misty Wood) PROJECT
VOLUME 3B of 4:
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
DIVISIONS 15-17
RFP #08-135
INCLUDING:
Specifications for Construction
Draft Final Submittal
December 2024
CITY OF ROSEVILLE
AQUIFER STORAGE AND RECOVERY WELLS
13 (Campus Oaks) AND 19 (Misty Wood) PROJECT
The Specifications contained herein have been prepared by, or under the direct supervision of the following Registered Engineers
Bid Documents and Conditions of the Contract Prepared by:
City of Roseville
Janice R. Gainey, PE
Expires 9/30/26
Technical Specifications Prepared by:
Carollo Engineers
Michael E. Ducker, PE
Expires 9/30/26
DRAFT DOCUMENTS
These Draft Documents are released for
the purpose of information exchange
review and planning only under the
authority of Janice R. Gainey,
December 11, 2024, California C-79928.
They are not to be used for bidding,
permit, or construction purposes.
DRAFT DOCUMENTS
These Draft Documents are released for
the purpose of information exchange
review and planning only under the
authority of Michael E. Ducker,
December 11, 2024, California C-63626.
They are not to be used for bidding,
permit, or construction purposes.
Table of Contents
00010-1 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/00010 (DraftFinal)
CITY OF ROSEVILLE
AQUIFER STORAGE AND RECOVERY WELLS
13 (CAMPUS OAKS) AND 19 (MISTY WOOD) PROJECT
TABLE OF CONTENTS
VOLUME 3A OF 4
DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION NO. TITLE
01140 WORK RESTRICTIONS
01312 PROJECT MEETINGS
01321 SCHEDULES AND REPORTS
01322 WEB BASED CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENT MANAGEMENT
01330 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
01340 PHOTOGRAPHIC AND VIDEOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION
01357 DELEGATED DESIGN PROCEDURES
01410 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
01450 QUALITY CONTROL
01455 REGULATORY QUALITY ASSURANCE
01500 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
01550 TRAFFIC CONTROL
01562 TEMPORARY TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION
01573 EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL
01601 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
01722 FIELD ENGINEERING
01734 WORK WITHIN PUBLIC RIGHT-OF-WAY
01756 COMMISSIONING
01757 DISINFECTION
01770 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
01782 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
01783 WARRANTIES AND BONDS
01850 DESIGN CRITERIA
DIVISION 02 - SITE CONSTRUCTION
SECTION NO. TITLE
02050 SOILS AND AGGREGATES FOR EARTHWORK
02084 PRECAST DRAINAGE STRUCTURES
02200 SITE CLEARING
02240 DEWATERING
02260 EXCAVATION SUPPORT AND PROTECTION
02280 SUBSURFACE UTILITY ENGINEERING
02300 EARTHWORK
Table of Contents
00010-2 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/00010 (DraftFinal) 02312 CONTROLLED LOW STRENGTH MATERIAL (CLSM)
02318 TRENCHING
02581 PRECAST ELECTRICAL HANDHOLES AND ELECTRICAL MANHOLES 02620 FILTER FABRIC
02621 STABILIZATION FABRIC
02742A ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVING (CA)
02762 PAVEMENT MARKINGS
02772 CONCRETE CURBS, GUTTERS, AND SIDEWALKS
02820 FENCES AND GATES
DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE
SECTION NO. TITLE
03055 ADHESIVE-BONDED REINFORCING BARS AND ALL THREAD RODS IN
CONCRETE
03071 EPOXIES
03072 EPOXY RESIN/PORTLAND CEMENT BONDING AGENT
03102 CONCRETE FORMWORK
03150 CONCRETE ACCESSORIES
03200 CONCRETE REINFORCING
03300 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03366 CONCRETE FINISHES
03600 GROUTING
DIVISION 04 - MASONRY
SECTION NO. TITLE
04055 ADHESIVE BONDING REINFORCING BARS AND ALL THREAD RODS IN
MASONRY
04090 MASONRY ACCESSORIES
04100 MORTAR AND MASONRY GROUT
04220 CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY
04221 BRICK MASONRY
DIVISION 05 - METALS
SECTION NO. TITLE
05120 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING
05190 MECHANICAL ANCHORING AND FASTENING TO CONCRETE AND
MASONRY
05500 METAL FABRICATIONS
DIVISION 06 - WOOD AND PLASTICS
SECTION NO. TITLE
06072 PRESERVATIVE PRESSURE TREATED WOOD
06074 FIRE RETARDANT TREATED WOOD
06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY
Table of Contents
00010-3 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/00010 (DraftFinal) 06174 SHOP-FABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES
06611 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC FABRICATIONS
DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
SECTION NO. TITLE
07190 WATER REPELLENTS
07220 ROOF AND DECK INSULATION
07415 STANDING SEAM SHEET METAL ROOFING
07722 ROOF HATCHES
07840 FIRESTOPPING
07900 JOINT SEALANTS
DIVISION 08 - DOORS AND WINDOWS
SECTION NO. TITLE
08110 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
08320 FLOOR ACCESS DOORS
08332 OVERHEAD COILING DOOR
08710 DOOR HARDWARE
08910 LOUVERS
DIVISION 09 - FINISHES
SECTION NO. TITLE
09250 GYPSUM BOARD
09523 ACOUSTICAL PANELS
09910 PAINTING
09960 HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS
DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES
SECTION NO. TITLE
10400 SIGNAGE
10520 FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES
10810 TOILET ACCESSORIES
DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT
SECTION NO. TITLE
11242 LIQUID CHEMICAL DOUBLE DIAPHRAGM METERING PUMPS
11249 PACKAGED FLUORIDE SYSTEM
11309 PACKAGED GRINDER PUMP STATION
11313 VERTICAL TURBINE PUMPS
DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION
SECTION NO. TITLE
13208 POLYETHYLENE TANKS
13447 ELECTRIC ACTUATORS
Table of Contents
00010-4 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/00010 (DraftFinal) VOLUME 3B OF 4
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL
SECTION NO. TITLE
15050 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT
15052 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR GENERAL PIPING
15057 FUSION BONDED EPOXY LINING
15061 PIPE SUPPORTS
15062 PREFORMED CHANNEL PIPE SUPPORT SYSTEM
15076 PIPE IDENTIFICATION
15082 PIPING INSULATION
15110 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR VALVES
15111 BALL VALVES
15112 BUTTERFLY VALVES
15114 CHECK VALVES
15115 GATE, GLOBE, AND ANGLE VALVES
15117 SPECIALTY VALVES
15118 PRESSURE CONTROL VALVES
15119 AIR AND VACUUM RELIEF VALVES
15120 PIPING SPECIALTIES
15125 STRAINERS
15211 DUCTILE IRON PIPE: AWWA C151
15229 REINFORCED CONCRETE PIPE: ASTM C76
15230 PLASTIC PIPING AND TUBING
15247 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPE: GRAVITY
15286 STAINLESS STEEL PIPE AND TUBING
15320 CORROSION PROTECTION
15400 PLUMBING SYSTEMS
15430 EMERGENCY EYE/FACE WASH AND SHOWER EQUIPMENT
15500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC
15739 VRF HEAT PUMPS
15762 HEATING UNITS
15830 FANS
15936 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL DEVICES FOR HVAC
15954 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
15956 PIPING SYSTEMS TESTING
15958 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT TESTING
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL
SECTION NO. TITLE
16050 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL
16060 GROUNDING AND BONDING
16070 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
16075 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
Table of Contents
00010-5 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/00010 (DraftFinal) 16123 600-VOLT OR LESS WIRES AND CABLES
16125 FIBER OPTIC CABLE AND APPURTENANCES
16130 CONDUITS
16133 DUCT BANKS
16134 BOXES
16140 WIRING DEVICES
16150 LOW VOLTAGE WIRE CONNECTIONS
16210 UTILITY COORDINATION
16222 LOW VOLTAGE MOTORS UP TO 500 HORSEPOWER
16239 GENERATOR CONNECTION CABINET
16265 REDUCED HARMONIC VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES
16272 DRY-TYPE TRANSFORMERS
16285 SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES
16290 ELECTRICAL POWER MONITORING
16305 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM STUDIES
16411 DISCONNECT SWITCHES
16412 LOW VOLTAGE MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS
16413 LOW VOLTAGE INSULATED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS
16422 MOTOR STARTERS
16442 INDIVIDUALLY MOUNTED CIRCUIT BREAKER SWITCHBOARDS 16444 LOW VOLTAGE MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS
16445 PANELBOARDS
16494 LOW VOLTAGE FUSES
16510 LIGHTING: LED LUMINAIRES
16710 FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS
16752 SECURITY
16950 FIELD ELECTRICAL ACCEPTANCE TESTS
DIVISION 17 - INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS
SECTION NO. TITLE
17050 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PROCESS CONTROL AND
INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEMS
17100 CONTROL STRATEGIES
17101A SPECIFIC CONTROL STRATEGIES - [PROCESS AREA]
17201 LEVEL MEASUREMENT: SWITCHES
17208 LEVEL MEASUREMENT: RADAR PULSE TIME OF FLIGHT (PTOF) 17301 FLOW MEASUREMENT: SWITCHES
17302 FLOW MEASUREMENT: MAGNETIC FLOWMETERS
17316 FLOW MEASUREMENT: ROTAMETERS (VARIABLE AREA
FLOWMETERS)
17401 PRESSURE/VACUUM MEASUREMENT: DIAPHRAGM SEALS
17402 PRESSURE/VACUUM MEASUREMENT: INSTRUMENT VALVES
17403 PRESSURE/VACUUM MEASUREMENT: SWITCHES
17404 PRESSURE/VACUUM MEASUREMENT: GAUGES
Table of Contents
00010-6 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/00010 (DraftFinal) 17405 PRESSURE/VACUUM MEASUREMENT: DIRECT
17406 PRESSURE/VACUUM MEASUREMENT: DIFFERENTIAL
17407 PRESSURE MEASUREMENT: SUBMERSIBLE
17505 ANALYZERS: RESIDUAL CHLORINE
17529 ANALYZERS: FLUORIDE
17710 CONTROL SYSTEMS: PANELS, ENCLOSURES, AND PANEL
COMPONENTS
17712 CONTROL SYSTEMS: UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLIES 10 KVA
AND BELOW
17720 CONTROL SYSTEMS: PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLERS
17730 CONTROL SYSTEMS: PCS COMPUTER EQUIPMENT
17733 CONTROL SYSTEMS: NETWORK MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
17903 SCHEDULES: I/O LIST
17950 COMMISSIONING FOR INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS
Common Work Results for Mechanical Equipment
15050-1 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15050 (DraftFinal) SECTION 15050
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
1. Mechanical equipment requirements for:
a. Basic design and performance criteria.
b. Prescriptive requirements for common components.
c. Installation requirements.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. American Bearing Manufacturers Association (ABMA):
1. 9 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings.
2. 11 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Roller Bearings.
B. American Gear Manufacturers Association (AGMA) Standards.
C. American Petroleum Institute (API):
1. 682 - Pumps—Shaft Sealing Systems for Centrifugal and Rotary Pumps.
D. ASTM International (ASTM):
1. A193 - Standard Specification for Alloy-Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting for High Temperature or High Pressure Service and Other Special Purpose Applications.
2. A194 - Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts for Bolts for High Pressure or High Temperature Service, or Both.
3. A320 - Standard Specification for Alloy-Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting for Low-Temperature Service.
4. F593 - Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bolts, Hex Cap Screws, and Studs.
5. F594 - Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Nuts.
E. Hydraulic Institute (HI):
1. 9.6.8 - Guideline for Dynamics of Pumping Machinery.
F. International Concrete Repair Institute (ICRI):
1. Guideline No. 310.2R, Selecting and Specifying Concrete Surface Preparation for Sealers, Coatings, Polymer Overlays, and Concrete Repair.
G. International Organization for Standardization (ISO):
1. 21940 - Mechanical Vibration - Rotor Balancing - Part 1: Introduction.
H. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):
1. MG-1 - Motors and Generators.
Common Work Results for Mechanical Equipment
15050-2 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15050 (DraftFinal) I. Society for Protective Coatings (SSPC):
1. SP-1-Solvent Cleaning.
1.03 TERMINOLOGY
A. The words and terms listed below are not defined terms that require initial capital letters, but, when used in this Section, have the indicated meaning.
1. Definitions used in this specification and equipment Submittals for terms related to rotor-dynamic pumps shall be in accordance with HI 9.6.8, Appendix A, as clarified below.
2. These definitions shall be applied to equipment other than pumps, unless otherwise specified in Technical Sections.
3. Resonant frequency:
a. Frequency of a periodic excitation force that is close to the natural frequencies of an object. Also known as critical frequency, critical speed, or resonant speed.
b. An undamped resonant frequency within the separation margin is always considered harmful under Level 1 analysis.
c. A resonant frequency that occurs within a separation margin of 15 percent above or below the operating speed range and has a log decrement greater than +0.3 is considered harmful under Level 2 and Level 3 analysis.
4. Rotordynamic analysis level:
a. Level of detail required for rotordynamic analysis is indicated in the Technical Sections schedules as None (no analysis required), Analysis Level 1, Analysis Level 2, or Analysis Level 3, which correlate to increasing levels of required detailed equipment design analysis. Analysis Levels 1, 2, and 3 are based on HI 9.6.8.
b. Where these specifications differ from HI the more stringent shall apply.
5. Separation margin:
a. Span of operating speeds within which interference between excitation orders and resonant frequencies indicate the possibility of harmful vibrations.
b. Separation margin for a specific application extends 15 percent above and 15 percent below the span of operating speed required for the specified performance conditions.
1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Roof coordination.
1. Show roof penetrations for mechanical equipment on roof drawing Submittal and include mechanical equipment information:
a. Type.
b. Size.
c. Location.
d. Configuration of penetration and the surround.
e. Weight.
f. Anchoring and support details.
Common Work Results for Mechanical Equipment
15050-3 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15050 (DraftFinal)
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Items in this Section are components of equipment or systems specified in other Sections.
1. Include data for this Section’s components with the equipment or system Submittal.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
A. General:
1. Equipment manufacturer’s responsibility extends to selection and mounting of gear drive units, motors or other prime movers, accessories, and auxiliaries to provide a complete, operable unit.
2. Manufacturer shall analyze rubber-bearing vertical-column pumps and equipment identified as non-reversing in the Technical Sections for reverse rotation and provide non reversing motor ratchets.
3. Equipment that prevents reverse rotation shall be capable of both:
a. Handling 150 percent of the maximum torque at maximum operating speed. b. 150 percent of torque that will be generated in reverse direction due to equipment shutoff head as calculated by the manufacturer.
4. Motor shall be designed to run safely in the reverse direction at up to 140 percent times the reverse runaway speed under shutoff head conditions.
B. Rotordynamic analysis and vibration testing:
1. Submit information for the rotordynamic analysis level specified for each piece of equipment as shown in the Technical Sections prior to manufacture of the equipment.
2. Rotordynamic analysis shall be performed on “like-new” and “as-worn” conditions, representing conditions when first installed and conditions when parts wear to the manufacturer’s maximum allowable operating tolerances. a. Conditions assumed for the “as-worn” condition shall be 2 times the “like-new” tolerances unless specified otherwise.
3. Rotordynamic analysis criteria:
a. Torsional excitation forcing function magnitudes shall be no less than 1 percent of the maximum transmitted torque at given speed. b. Motor mass elastic information in accordance with NEMA MG-1 shall be obtained from the original equipment manufacturer and included in the analysis. Motors shall be precision balanced to ISO 21940 Grade G2.5. c. Bearings:
1) At maximum bearing loads an L-10 life of 100,000 hours in accordance with ABMA 9-11 to be proven.
4. Submit factory and field testing requirements as specified in the Technical Sections and specified in Section 15958 - Mechanical Equipment Testing after manufacture and installation respectively.
Common Work Results for Mechanical Equipment
15050-4 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15050 (DraftFinal)
5. Repair, replace, and modify equipment exhibiting vibration performance that does not meet criteria specified in this Section at no additional cost to the Owner.
a. Acceptable remedies include adjustments to equipment component geometry, materials, energy absorbing couplings, etc.
b. Locking out speed interval(s) within equipment specified operating range is unacceptable.
6. Vibration analysis expert:
a. Provide when specified in the equipment Technical Sections. 1) Must be a 3rd party, unaffiliated with the equipment vendor or Contractor.
b. Analysis shall be provided by one of the following or equal:
1) Engineering Dynamics Inc. (EDI, Texas).
2) Mechanical Solutions, Inc. (MSI, New Jersey).
c. Analysis shall be:
1) Stamped by a registered professional mechanical engineer. 2) Verified in-situ by the vibration analysis expert, including certification that installation conforms to field conditions assumed in the reports. 3) Verified in-situ by the vibration analysis expert, including witness of at least 1 field vibration test, and certification that vibration measurements corroborate the rotordynamic analysis.
4) Supplemented with additional field investigation and analysis should conditions during field vibration testing activity indicate non-compliance with these specifications; supplemental field investigation and analysis shall indicate remedies to comply with the specifications and shall be stamped by a registered professional mechanical engineer.
7. Rotordynamic Analysis Level 1:
a. Before the equipment is released for manufacture it shall be determined that the equipment/motor structures do not have any harmful resonant frequencies in the lateral and torsional modes. Representative analysis results for identical equipment may be submitted.
b. Calculate rotor lateral and torsional and equipment structural components’ lateral frequencies with a spreadsheet calculation or finite element analysis software.
1) Equipment structure lateral frequency shall include the motor. 2) Speed changing drive systems (belt, gear) effects on rotational inertia and stiffness shall be incorporated.
c. Determine the equipment system components (rotor and structure) resonant frequencies.
d. An intersection of an equipment component resonant frequency with the 1x run speed excitation order that occurs within separation margin is unacceptable.
8. Rotordynamic Analysis Level 2:
a. Before the equipment and motor are released for manufacture it shall be determined that the equipment/motor structures do not have any harmful critical speeds in the lateral and torsional modes.
b. Calculate rotor lateral and torsional and structure lateral frequencies with finite element analysis software.
1) Equipment structure lateral frequency shall include the motor.
Common Work Results for Mechanical Equipment
15050-5 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15050 (DraftFinal) 2) Speed changing drive systems (belt, gear) effects on rotational inertia and stiffness shall be incorporated.
3) Rotational inertia of water within the impeller, in the wet well, and inside the equipment structure, e.g., the column of a vertical pump, shall be included in the calculation at both the high level and low level conditions.
c. Potentially harmful critical speeds shall be investigated further with a forced, damped analysis to determine component stresses do not exceed material properties.
d. Forced damped analysis:
1) Forced lateral analysis shall include forcing function magnitudes at least 10 percent of rotor disc weight at each disc position and hydraulic imbalance at 5 operating conditions spaced equally over the equipment operating range. If synchronous motors are used ensure that the rotor analysis includes startup, shutdown, and motor control transients.
2) Forced torsional analysis shall include not less than 1 percent of the maximum permitted torque at any given speed. Damping shall be 1 percent of critical at all shaft elements.
3) Equipment rotor total stress (steady-state and alternating torque components plus lateral-bending stresses) shall not exceed:
a) Constant torque: Total stress limited to 30 percent of the material fatigue limit and to a maximum of 18 percent of ultimate tensile strength.
b) Variable torque (including variable speed equipment): Total stress limited to 50 percent of the material fatigue limit and to a maximum of 4 percent of the material ultimate tensile strength. c) Submit documentation of material fatigue limit.
e. Report Submittals:
1) Confirmation of compliance with this Section, or detailed exceptions taken.
2) Software used for analysis.
3) Results with interpretation.
4) Preparer’s professional engineering stamp and seal.
5) Input data, including component properties, materials and connectivity to other components.
6) Schematic diagram of model mode shapes, nodes and elements. 7) Bearing stiffness and damping properties, impeller/diffuser interaction coefficients, and seal dynamic properties.
8) Campbell diagrams showing the system natural frequencies, excitation orders, and operating speed range for both lateral and torsional analysis.
a) Include equipment operating range; excitation lines at 1x, 2x run speed, and vane pass (or equivalent); and critical speeds associated with equipment system components, including the rotor, each major equipment structural component and the motor. 9) Forced, damped analysis indicating acceptable material stress limits are maintained at interference points shown on the Campbell diagram.
Common Work Results for Mechanical Equipment
15050-6 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15050 (DraftFinal)
9. Rotordynamic Analysis Level 3:
a. Before the equipment and motor are released for manufacture it shall be determined that the equipment/motor structures do not have any harmful critical speeds in the lateral and torsional modes.
b. Calculate rotor lateral and torsional and structure lateral frequencies with finite element analysis software.
1) Equipment structure lateral frequency shall include the motor. 2) Speed changing drive systems (belt, gear) effects on rotational inertia and stiffness shall be incorporated.
3) Rotational inertia of water within the impeller, in the wet well, and inside the equipment structure, e.g., the column of a vertical pump, shall be included in the calculation at both the high level and low level conditions.
c. Potentially harmful critical speeds shall be investigated further with a forced, damped analysis to determine component stresses do not exceed material properties.
d. Forced damped analysis:
1) Forced lateral analysis shall include forcing function magnitudes at least 10 percent of rotor disc weight at each disc position and hydraulic imbalance at 5 operating conditions spaced equally over the equipment operating range. If synchronous motors are used ensure that the rotor analysis includes startup, shutdown, and motor control transients.
2) Forced torsional analysis shall include 1 percent of the maximum permitted torque at any given speed. Damping shall be 1 percent of critical at all shaft elements.
3) Equipment rotor total stress (steady-state and alternating torque components plus lateral-bending stresses) shall not exceed:
a) Constant torque: Total stress limited to 30 percent of the material fatigue limit and to a maximum of 18 percent of ultimate tensile strength.
b) Variable torque (including variable speed equipment): Total stress limited to 50 percent of the material fatigue limit and to a maximum of 4 percent of the material ultimate tensile strength. c) Submit documentation of material fatigue limit.
e. Report Submittals:
1) Report 1: Executive Summary, including:
a) Confirmation of compliance with this Section, or detailed exceptions taken.
b) Software used for analysis.
c) Results with interpretation.
d) Preparer’s professional engineering stamp and seal.
e) Campbell diagrams showing the system natural frequencies, excitation orders, and operating speed range for both lateral and torsional analysis.
(1) Include equipment operating range; excitation lines at 1x, 2x run speed, vane pass (or equivalent), line- and twice-line frequency, motor-pole frequency, torsional harmonics from reciprocating drivers (including up to 6 times operating speed), control pulse frequencies induced by variable
frequency drives (VFDs) (with certification from VFD
Common Work Results for Mechanical Equipment
15050-7 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15050 (DraftFinal) manufacturer of frequencies up to 24 times motor running speed), any torque harmonic greater than 1 percent of
steady torque at primary excitation, and synchronous motor requirements; and critical speeds associated with equipment system components, including the rotor and each major
equipment structural component.
f) Report 1 shall not include detailed analysis elements listed for Submittal under Report 2 below, Submittal of full analysis details in Report 1 is unacceptable.
g) Following Submittal of Report 1, submit Report 2: Detailed Analysis, including responses to comments made on Report 1:
Rotor-dynamic Executive Summary.
2) Report 2: Rotor-dynamic detailed analysis, including:
a) Input data, including component properties, materials and connectivity to other components.
b) Schematic diagram of model mode shapes, nodes and elements. c) Bearing stiffness and damping properties, impeller/diffuser interaction coefficients, and seal dynamic properties.
d) Forced, damped analysis indicating acceptable material stress limits are maintained at interference points shown on the Campbell diagram.
e) Synchronous motor information, including time-integration study results showing transient peak stresses at startup, shutdown and motor control transient events. Provide tomographic diagrams, including root and keyway stress concentration locations and the corresponding speeds that result in reported peak stresses.
2.02 POWER TRANSMISSION SYSTEMS
A. V-belts, sheaves, shaft couplings, chains, sprockets, mechanical variable-speed drives, VFDs, gear reducers, open and enclosed gearing, clutches, brakes, intermediate shafting, intermediate bearings, and U-joints:
1. Rated for 24 hour-a-day continuous service, or for intermittent service with frequent stops-and-starts, whichever is most severe.
2. Sized with a service factor of 1.5 or greater:
a. Apply service factor to nameplate horsepower and torque of prime source of power and not to actual equipment loading.
b. Apply service factors in accordance with AGMA, or as specified in the Technical Sections.
2.03 BEARINGS
A. Oil or grease lubricated, ball or roller antifriction type, of standard manufacture.
1. Design lubrication system based on the equipment location to operate in the temperatures as specified in Section 01850 - Design Criteria. a. To safely start after being shut off for 24 hours and operate safely:
1) Suitable for the outdoor winter temperature as specified in Section 01850 - Design Criteria.
Common Work Results for Mechanical Equipment
15050-8 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15050 (DraftFinal) B. Oil-lubricated:
1. Provide either pressure lubricating system or separate oil reservoir splash-type system as specified in the Technical Section.
2. Design system to safely absorb heat energy generated in bearings when equipment is operating in the following conditions:
a. With the highest load and the temperature 15 degrees Fahrenheit above the outdoor summer temperature as specified in Section 01850 - Design Criteria.
C. Grease lubricated, except those specified to be factory sealed:
1. Fit with easily accessible grease supply, flush, drain, and relief fittings.
2. Lubrication lines and fittings:
a. Lines: Minimum 1/4-inch diameter stainless steel tubing. b. Multiple fitting assemblies: Mount fittings together in easily accessible location.
c. Use standard hydraulic-type grease supply fittings:
1) Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a) Alemite.
b) Zerk.
D. Ratings: In accordance with ABMA 9 or ABMA 11 L10 life for bearings rating life of not less than 50,000 hours.
2.04 BELT DRIVES
A. Sheaves:
1. Separately mounted on bushings by means of at least 3 pull-up bolts or cap tightening screws.
2. When 2 sheave sizes are specified, provide separate belts sized for each set of sheaves.
3. Statically balanced for all; dynamically balanced for sheaves that operate at a peripheral speed of more than 5,500 feet per minute.
4. Key bushings to drive shaft.
B. Belts:
1. Anti-static type when explosion-proof equipment or environment is specified.
2. When spare belts are specified, furnish 1 spare belt for every different type and size of belt-driven unit:
a. Where 2 or more belts are involved, furnish matched sets. b. Identify as to equipment, design, horsepower, speed, length, sheave size, and use.
c. Package in boxes labeled with identification of contents.
C. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1. Dodge, Dyna-V belts with matching Dyna-V sheaves and Taper-Lock bushings.
2. T.B. Woods, Ultra-V belts with matching Sure-Grip sheaves and Sure-Grip bushings.
Common Work Results for Mechanical Equipment
15050-9 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15050 (DraftFinal)
2.05 FLANGED PIPING CONNECTIONS
A. Unless specified otherwise in the Technical Sections or indicated on the Drawings, provide flat face flanges.
2.06 ASSEMBLY FASTENERS
A. General service: Stainless steel, Type 316:
1. Bolts: In accordance with ASTM F593, Alloy Group 2.
2. Nuts: In accordance with ASTM F594, Alloy Group 2.
3. Washers: Alloy group matching bolts and nuts.
B. High-temperature service or high-pressure service: Stainless steel, Type 316:
1. Bolts: In accordance with ASTM A193, Grade B8M, Class 1, heavy hex.
2. Nuts: In accordance with ASTM A194, Grade 8, heavy hex.
3. Washers: Alloy group matching bolts and nuts.
C. Low-temperature service: Stainless steel, Type 316:
1. Bolts: In accordance with ASTM A320, Grade B8M, Class 1, heavy hex.
2. Nuts: In accordance with ASTM A194, Grade B8M, heavy hex.
3. Washers: Alloy group matching bolts and nuts.
2.07 GUARDS AT HIGH-TEMPERATURE SURFACES
A. Exposed surfaces having an external surface temperature of 120 degrees Fahrenheit or higher and located within 7 feet, measured vertically from floor or working level, or within 15 inches measured horizontally from stairways, ramps, or fixed ladders.
B. Cover with a thermal insulating material unless otherwise guarded against contact.
1. Insulation thickness such that the insulation exterior temperature is below 120 degrees Fahrenheit.
2. Insulation Type 3 and cover Type 5 as specified in Section 15082 - Piping Insulation.
2.08 GUARDS AT MOVING COMPONENTS
A. On rotating components that are within 7.5 vertical feet of an operating floor or platform.
B. Allow visual inspection of moving parts without removal.
C. Allow access to lubrication fittings.
D. Easily removable for maintenance.
E. Prevent entrance of rain or dripping water for outdoor locations.
F. Size belt and sheave guards to allow for installation of sheaves 15 percent larger and addition of 1 belt.
Common Work Results for Mechanical Equipment
15050-10 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15050 (DraftFinal) G. Materials:
1. Sheet metal: Carbon steel, 12-gauge minimum thickness, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication.
2. Fasteners: Type 316 stainless steel.
2.09 SHOP FINISHES
A. Manufacturer’s standard primer and finish coatings.
1. Primer only if field coatings are to be applied.
2.10 GEAR MOTORS
A. Parallel shaft drives: Helical gearing.
B. Right-angle drives: Worm gearing.
C. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1. Baldor Electric Company.
2. Bodine Electric Company.
2.11 GEAR REDUCTION UNITS
A. Design and performance criteria:
1. Gear type:
a. Helical or herringbone.
2. AGMA Class II service:
a. Use more severe service condition when such is recommended by unit’s manufacturer.
3. Cast-iron housing with gears running in oil.
4. Anti-friction bearings.
5. Thermal horsepower rating based on maximum horsepower rating of prime mover, not actual load.
2.12 MOUNTING AND LIFTING PROVISIONS FOR EQUIPMENT
A. Equipment bases and base plates:
1. Provide equipment bases with machined support pads, dowels for alignment for mating of adjacent items, openings for electrical conduits, and openings to facilitate grouting.
2. Provide jacking screws in bases and supports for equipment and for equipment weighing 500 pounds or more.
3. Materials:
a. Match equipment material or steel.
b. Coating: Match equipment.
B. Steel support frames:
1. Carbon steel:
a. At exterior locations and at interior wet or moist locations, provide continuous welds on both sides to close seams and edges between steel members.
b. Grind closure welds smooth.
Common Work Results for Mechanical Equipment
15050-11 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15050 (DraftFinal) C. Lifting lugs or eyes:
1. Equipment units weighing 50 pounds or more:
a. Provide with lifting lugs or eyes to allow removal with lifting device.
2.13 NAMEPLATES
A. Fastened to equipment at factory in an accessible and visible location.
B. Metal engraved or stamped with text, holes drilled or punched for fasteners.
C. Material: Aluminum or stainless steel.
D. Fasteners: Number 4 or larger oval head stainless steel screws or drive pins.
E. Text:
1. Manufacturer’s name, equipment model number, equipment serial number, and identification tag number.
2. Additional items indicated in the Technical Sections.
3. Indicate the following additional information as applicable:
a. Maximum and normal rotating speed.
b. Service class in accordance with applicable standards.
4. Include for pumps:
a. Rated total dynamic head in feet of fluid.
b. Rated flow in gallons per minute.
c. Impeller, gear, screw, diaphragm, or piston size.
5. Include for motors:
a. Drive speed.
b. Motor horsepower with rated capacity.
6. Include for gear reduction units:
a. AGMA class of service.
b. Service factor.
c. Input and output speeds.
2.14 PUMP SHAFT COUPLINGS
A. General:
1. Type and ratings: Non-lubricated designed for not less than 50,000 hours of operating life.
2. Sizes: Provide as recommended by manufacturer for specific application, considering horsepower, speed of rotation, balance, and type of service.
3. Suitable for an ambient temperature range between -40 degrees to +200 degrees Fahrenheit.
B. Close-couplings for electric-motor-driven equipment:
1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a. Lovejoy.
b. T.B. Woods.
2. Provide flexible couplings designed to accommodate angular misalignment, parallel misalignment, and end float.
3. Manufacture flexible component of coupling from synthetic rubber or urethane.
Common Work Results for Mechanical Equipment
15050-12 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15050 (DraftFinal)
4. Provide service factor of 2.5 for electric motor drives and 3.5 for engine drives.
5. Do not allow metal-to-metal contact between driver and driven equipment.
C. Flexible couplings for direct connected electric-motor-driven equipment:
1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a. Rexnord.
b. T.B. Woods.
2. Provide flexible couplings designed to accommodate shock loading, vibration, and shaft misalignment or offset.
3. Provide flexible connecting element of rubber and reinforcement fibers.
4. Provide service factor of 2.0.
5. Connect stub shafts through collars or round flanges, firmly keyed to their shafts with neoprene cylinders held to individual flanges by through pins.
D. Spacer couplings:
1. Where cartridge-type mechanical seals or non-split seals are specified, provide a spacer-type coupling of sufficient length to remove the seal without disturbing the driver or driven equipment.
2.15 PUMP SEAL CHAMBER AND SEALS
A. Seal chamber (stuffing box):
1. Large enough to retrofit with double mechanical seal.
B. Seal types: Based on the following and as specified in the Technical Section:
1. Type 1: Packing:
a. Provide when specified in the Technical Section for wastewater, non-potable water, and sludge applications:
1) Asbestos free.
2) PTFE (Teflon™) free.
3) Braided graphite.
4) Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a) Chesterton, 1400.
b) John Crane.
b. Provide when specified for drinking water service:
1) Asbestos free.
2) Material: Braided PTFE (Teflon™).
3) Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a) Chesterton, 1725.
b) John Crane.
c. Design:
1) Packing gland to allow adjustment and repacking without dismantling pump, except to open up stuffing box.
2) Seal chamber (stuffing box) large enough to retrofit with double mechanical seal.
3) Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a) Chesterton, 1725.
b) John Crane.
2. Type 2: Mechanical seal, flushing, cartridge, single O-ring. a. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1) Chesterton, S10.
Common Work Results for Mechanical Equipment
15050-13 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15050 (DraftFinal) 2) John Crane, 5610 Series.
3. Type 3: Mechanical seal, flushing, cartridge, double O-ring:
a. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1) Chesterton, S20.
2) John Crane, 5620 Series.
4. Type 4: Mechanical seal, flushing, cartridge, double split-ring:
a. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1) Chesterton, S20.
2) John Crane, 5620 Series.
5. Type 5: Mechanical seal, flushing, cartridge, single split-ring:
a. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1) Chesterton, 442.
2) John Crane, 5860.
6. Type 6: Mechanical seal, flushless, cartridge, single split-ring:
a. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1) Chesterton, 156.
2) John Crane, 3740 Series.
C. Mechanical seals, Types 2 to 6:
1. Balanced hydraulically.
2. Spring:
a. Stationary, out of pumping fluid.
b. Material as specified in the Technical Section. Hastelloy C; Type Elgiloy or 17-7 PH stainless steel for split seals.
3. O-ring: Viton™ 747.
4. Gland: Type 316L stainless steel.
5. Set screws: Type 316L stainless steel.
6. Faces: Reaction bonded, silicon carbide/carbon.
7. Minimum differential pressures in either direction: 300 pounds per square inch gauge.
a. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1) Chesterton, 1400.
2) John Crane, equivalent product.
8. Drinking water service:
a. Asbestos free.
b. Material: Braided PTFE (Teflon™).
c. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1) Chesterton, 1725.
2) John Crane, equivalent product.
D. Flushing system:
1. Provide flushing connections:
a. 3/4-inch size.
b. Provide API 682 seal water plan arrangement as specified in the Technical Section:
1) Plan 11 - Product stream seal water from discharge thru seal. 2) Plan 13 - Product stream seal water through seal to suction. 3) Plan 23 - Closed loop seal water with cooler and pumping ring. 4) Plan 32 - Production seal water discharged to product stream. 5) Plan 54 - Production seal water excluded from product stream.
Common Work Results for Mechanical Equipment
15050-14 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15050 (DraftFinal)
2.16 SAFETY SIGNS
A. Material, sign size, and text: As specified in Section 10400 - Signage.
2.17 SHIPPING
A. Prior to shipment of equipment:
1. Bearings (and similar items):
a. Pack separately or provide other protection during transport. b. Greased and lubricated.
2. Gear boxes:
a. Oil filled or sprayed with rust preventive protective coating.
3. Fasteners:
a. Inspect for proper torques and tightness.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PRE-INSTALLATION
A. Field measurements:
1. Prior to Shop Drawings preparation, take measurements and verify dimensions indicated on the Drawings.
2. Ensure equipment and ancillary appurtenances fit within available space.
B. Sequencing and scheduling:
1. Coordinate details of equipment with other related parts of the Work, including verification that structures, piping, wiring, and equipment components are compatible.
2. Equipment anchoring: Obtain anchoring material and setting drawings from equipment manufacturers in adequate time for templates to be constructed and anchors to be cast-in-place.
3.02 LUBRICATION LINES AND FITTINGS
A. Support and protect lines from source to point of use.
B. Fittings:
1. Bring fittings to outside of equipment in manner such that they are readily accessible from outside without necessity of removing covers, plates, housings, or guards.
2. Mount fittings together wherever possible using factory-mounted multiple fitting assemblies securely mounted, parallel with equipment lines, and protected from damage.
3. For underwater bearings: Bring fittings above water surface and mount on edge of structure above.
Common Work Results for Mechanical Equipment
15050-15 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15050 (DraftFinal)
3.03 ALIGNMENT OF DRIVERS AND EQUIPMENT
A. Where drive motors or other drivers are connected to driven equipment by flexible coupling, disconnect coupling halves and align driver and equipment after driven equipment has been leveled on its foundation.
B. Comply with procedures of appropriate HI, AGMA standards, alignment tolerances of equipment manufacturers and the following requirements to bring components into angular and parallel alignment:
1. Maximum total coupling offset (not the per-plane offset): Not to exceed 0.5 mils per inch of coupling length for spacer couplings based on coupling length (not dial separation).
2. Utilize jacking screws, wedges, or shims as recommended by the equipment manufacturer and as specified in the equipment sections.
C. Use reverse-indicator arrangement dial-type or laser-type alignment indicators:
1. Mount on the driver/coupling flange and equipment/coupling flange.
2. Alignment instrumentation accuracy shall be sufficient to read angular and radial misalignment at 10 percent or less of the manufacturer’s recommended acceptable misalignment.
D. Alignment and calculations shall include measurement and allowance for thermal growth, spacer coupling length, indicator separation, and axial spacing tolerances of the coupling.
E. When alignment satisfies most stringent tolerance of system components, grout between base and foundation.
1. Allow minimum 48 hours for grout to harden.
2. After grout hardens, remove jacking screws, tighten anchor bolts and other connections, and recheck alignment.
3. Correct alignment as required.
3.04 EQUIPMENT SUPPORT AND ANCHORING TO STRUCTURES
A. Anchor equipment to structures as indicated on the Drawings and as specified.
B. Obtain final anchor bolt layouts for equipment prior to:
1. Detailing reinforcement for equipment pads.
2. Preparation of Shop Drawings for metal structures supporting equipment.
C. Anchor bolt templates:
1. Provide templates as specified in the Technical Sections.
2. Use final anchor bolt layout to construct templates for setting anchor bolts.
3. Make templates:
a. Rigid, and non-deformable during use.
b. With longitudinal axes of anchors parallel.
c. With longitudinal axes of anchors perpendicular to surface supporting the equipment.
4. Templates may be reused for multiple locations of the same equipment only if:
a. Templates are in “like-new” condition prior to each reuse.
Common Work Results for Mechanical Equipment
15050-16 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15050 (DraftFinal) b. Anchor layout has not been deformed or damaged by previous installation, removal, or handling of templates.
5. Sequence:
a. Set and support templates prior construction of structures surrounding anchors.
b. Position anchors in templates to provide designated embedment in supporting structure, with required projection for installation of grout, base plates, and hardware for tightening.
c. Construct concrete or masonry around anchors using methods that preserve required anchor positions and alignment, and clearances to edges of supports or structures.
D. Anchor adjustment sleeves:
1. Use of adjustment sleeves around anchors:
a. Is at the option of the Contractor.
b. Does not relieve the Contractor of obligation to construct and use templates for setting of anchors.
c. May required increased anchor embedment length to develop the strength of the anchor in the embedded length below the adjustment sleeve.
2. Submittal requirements for anchor adjustment sleeves:
a. Provide within sufficient time for Engineer approval and not less than 10 working days before setting those items.
b. Proposed locations of sleeves.
c. Details and dimensions of sleeves.
d. Sleeve materials of construction, and coatings.
e. Information on sleeve filler material and means of filler removal. f. Type, details, and dimensions of anchor bolts or anchor rods to be used with sleeves.
g. Calculations showing development of anchor load capacity below the bottom of the sleeve.
h. Plan for removal of sleeve fillers, if any.
i. Plan for placement and consolidation of flowable grout inside sleeves and to a level equal to top of concrete slab or equipment pad surrounding the sleeve.
3.05 GROUTING UNDER EQUIPMENT BASES, BASE PLATES, SOLE PLATES,
AND SKIDS
A. General:
1. Comply with the equipment manufacturer’s installation instructions, including:
a. Tolerances for level.
b. Tolerances for vertical and horizontal alignment.
c. Requirements or recommendations for grouting spaces and grout installation.
d. Recommendations for tightening of equipment anchors after grout has cured.
2. Install equipment over grout as indicated on the Drawings or specified only after:
a. Equipment is leveled and in proper alignment.
b. Piping connections are complete and in alignment with no strain transmitted to equipment.
Common Work Results for Mechanical Equipment
15050-17 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15050 (DraftFinal)
3. Install flowable grout, as specified in Section 03600 - Grouting, placed with forms and head boxes.
a. Use flowable, non-shrink grout.
b. Use flowable, non-shrink epoxy grout, only where indicated on the Drawings, where specified in Technical Sections, or when approved in advance by the Engineer.
c. Grouting with dry-pack materials is not permitted.
B. Prepare equipment bases, base plates, soleplates, and skids for grouting:
1. Concrete equipment bases:
a. Roughen surface in accordance with ICRI, Guideline No. 310.2R, Surface Preparation Profiles CSP-3 and CSP-4.
b. Clean roughened concrete surfaces.
2. Base plates, soleplates, and skids:
a. Clean surfaces in accordance with SSPC-SP-1-Solvent Cleaning, to remove dirt, dust, oil, grease, paint, and other material.
C. Level equipment for grouting:
1. Use removable jack screws, or removable steel wedges and shims to support and level equipment bases, base plates, sole plates, and skids. a. Do not use leveling nuts placed on equipment anchors to support or level equipment bases, base plates, sole plates, and skids.
2. Removable jack screws:
a. Provide number, size, and locations of jack screws required to support and level equipment in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. b. Drill and tap equipment base plates, sole plates, and skids for jack screws. c. Support jack screws on circular steel plates that have been epoxy bonded to the equipment foundation.
1) Provide plates fabricated from Type 316 stainless steel where edges of support plates will have grout side cover of 3 inches or less in the finished Work.
d. Make provision for removal of jack screws after grouting:
1) Prevent grout from bonding to jack screws by wrapping jack screw threads that will be in contact with grout with multiple layers of tape or other material acceptable to the Engineer.
e. Place and cure grout.
f. After grout is placed and cured:
1) Remove jack screws and material used to prevent grout from bonding to jack screws.
2) Provide jack screws to the Owner for future use.
3) Fill jack screw holes with grout.
4) Cure grout as specified.
3. Removable steel wedges and shims:
a. Use for equipment bases, base plates, sole plates, and skids where it is not practical to use jack screws.
b. Provide number, size, and locations of wedges and shims required to support and level equipment in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.
Common Work Results for Mechanical Equipment
15050-18 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15050 (DraftFinal) c. Make provision for removal of wedges and shims after grouting:
1) Prevent grout from bonding to wedges and shims by wrapping wedges and shims that contact grout with multiple layers of tape or other material acceptable to the Engineer.
2) Locate and orient wedges and shims to allow for removal after grouting, and to facilitate placement of grout in the remaining voids. d. Place and cure grout.
e. After grout is placed and cured:
1) Remove wedges and shims, and material used to prevent grout from bonding to them.
2) Fill jack screw holes with grout.
3) Cure grout as specified.
D. Construct grout forms:
1. Provide forms:
a. Rigid with adequate strength to withstand placement of grout. b. With surfaces that will produce a smooth, uniform finish for grout edges exposed in the finished Work.
c. That allow grout to flow horizontally beyond the perimeter of the equipment base plate a distance not less than the thickness of the grout, and not less than 1 inch.
2. Install forms:
a. Seal form cracks and joints with elastomeric sealant to make form watertight.
b. Line form surfaces in contact with grout with polyethylene film, or coat with 2 coats of heavy-duty paste wax.
3. Construct grout “head box” over entire length of one side of form. a. Make head box height sufficient to force grout to flow under full dimensions of equipment base and to the surrounding form faces.
E. Pre-grouting procedures:
1. Concrete surfaces receiving flowable, non-shrink grout:
a. Saturate concrete surface in contact with grout and concrete surfaces extending not less than at least 6 inches beyond limits of grout with clean water for a minimum of 24 hours prior to grouting.
b. Just prior to grout placement, remove standing water using clean rags or oil-free compressed air. Provide saturated surface dry (SSD) concrete for grout placement.
2. Concrete surfaces receiving flowable, non-shrink epoxy grout:
a. Do not saturate concrete prior to grout placement.
F. Grout placement and curing:
1. Place and cure grout as specified in Section 03600 - Grouting and in this Section.
2. Grouting:
a. Keep level of grout in head box above bottom of equipment bases, base plates, sole plates, and skids always to drive flow under base. b. Maintain continuous grout flow from head box to opposite sides of forms without trapping air or forming voids.
c. Vibrate, rod, or chain grout to facilitate grout flow, to consolidate grout, and to remove entrapped air.
Common Work Results for Mechanical Equipment
15050-19 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15050 (DraftFinal)
3. After grout sets, remove forms and trim grout edges at 45-degree angle from bottom edge of equipment bases, base plates, sole plates, and skids.
4. Cure grout as specified in Section 03600 - Grouting.
G. After grout is cured:
1. Remove jack screws or wedges and shims, and material used to prevent grout from bonding to leveling devices.
2. Fill pockets from removed leveling devices with grout.
3. Cure filled voids as specified in Section 03600 - Grouting.
4. Tighten equipment anchors in accordance with the equipment manufacturer’s requirements.
3.06 FIELD FINISHES
A. When touchup or repair is required, apply primer and coating systems as recommended by the equipment manufacturer.
END OF SECTION
Common Work Results for General Piping
15052-1 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15052 (DraftFinal) SECTION 15052
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR GENERAL PIPING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
1. Basic materials and methods for metallic and plastic piping systems.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME):
1. B1.1 - Unified Inch Screw Threads (UN, UNR, and UNJ Thread Forms).
2. B18.2.1 - Square, Hex, Heavy Hex, and Askew Head Bolts and Hex, Heavy Hex, Hex Flange, Lobed Head, and Lag Screws (Inch Series).
3. B18.2.2 - Nuts for General Applications: Machine Screw Nuts; and Hex, Square, Hex Flange, and Coupling Nuts (Inch Series).
4. PCC-1 - Pressure Boundary Bolted Flange Joint Assembly.
B. American Water Work Association (AWWA):
1. C105 - Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile-Iron Pipe Systems.
2. C110 - Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Fittings.
3. C111 - Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings.
4. C115 - Flanged Ductile-Iron Pipe with Ductile-Iron or Gray-Iron Threaded Flanges.
5. C151 - Ductile-Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast.
C. ASTM International (ASTM):
1. A193 - Standard Specification for Alloy-Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting for High Temperature or High Pressure Service and Other Special Purpose Applications.
2. A194 - Standard Specification for Carbon Steel, Alloy Steel, and Stainless Steel Nuts for Bolts for High Pressure or High Temperature Service, or Both.
3. A307 - Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts, Studs, and Threaded Rod 60,000 PSI Tensile Strength.
4. A563 - Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts.
5. B88 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube.
6. D395 - Standard Test Methods for Rubber Property—Compression Set.
7. D412 - Standard Test Methods for Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic Elastomers—Tension.
8. D573 - Standard Test Method for Rubber—Deterioration in an Air Oven.
9. D1149 - Standard Test Methods for Rubber Deterioration—Cracking in an Ozone Controlled Environment.
10. D1330 - Standard Specification for Rubber Sheet Gaskets.
11. D2513 - Standard Specification for Polyethylene (PE) Gas Pressure Pipe, Tubing and Fittings.
12. F37 - Standard Test Methods for Sealability of Gasket Materials.
Common Work Results for General Piping
15052-2 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15052 (DraftFinal)
13. F593 - Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bolts, Hex Cap Screws, and Studs.
14. F594 - Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Nuts.
15. F2329 - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating, Hot-Dip, Requirements of Application to Carbon and Alloy Steel Bolts, Screws, Washers, Nuts, and Special Threaded Fasteners.
D. California Health and Safety Code.
E. NSF International (NSF):
1. 61 - Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects.
1.03 TERMINOLOGY
A. The words and terms listed below are not defined terms that require initial capital letters, but, when used in this Section, have the indicated meaning.
1. Buried pipes: Pipes that are buried in the soil with or without a concrete pipe encasement.
2. Exposed pipe: Pipes that are located above ground, or located inside a structure, supported by a structure, or cast into a concrete structure.
3. Pipes adjacent to a wet wall: Pipe centerline within 10 inches of the wet wall.
4. Underground pipes: Buried pipes - see 1. above.
5. Underwater pipes: Pipes below the top of walls in basins or tanks containing water.
6. Wet wall: A wall with water on at least one side.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. Materials as specified in the Agreement and Contract RFP in Volumes 1 and 2 including special requirements for materials in contact with drinking water.
B. Coatings and linings requirements stated in the Pipe Schedule, as modified in the individual pipe Technical Sections, and as specified in Section 09960 - High-Performance Coatings.
2.02 LINK TYPE SEALS
A. Characteristics:
1. Modular mechanical type, consisting of interlocking neoprene or synthetic rubber links shaped to continuously fill the annular space between the pipe and wall opening.
2. Links to form a continuous rubber belt around the pipe.
3. Provide a nylon polymer pressure plate with Type 316 stainless steel hardware. Isolate pressure plate from contact with wall sleeve.
4. Hardware to be Type 316 stainless steel.
a. Provide anti-galling lubricant for threads.
Common Work Results for General Piping
15052-3 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15052 (DraftFinal) B. One of the following or equal:
1. Link-Seal.
2. Pipe Linx.
2.03 FLANGE BOLTS AND NUTS
A. General:
1. Washer: Provide for each nut.
a. Shall be of the same material as the nut.
2. Nuts: Heavy hex-head.
3. Cut and finish flange bolts to project:
a. Face of the bolt shall exceed face of nut by 1/8-inch minimum. b. A maximum of 1/4 inch beyond outside face of nut after assembly.
4. Tap holes for cap screws or stud bolts when used.
5. Lubricant for stainless steel bolts and nuts:
a. Chloride-free.
b. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1) Huskey, FG-1800 Anti-Seize.
2) Weicon, Anti-Seize High-Tech.
B. Ductile iron pipe:
1. On exposed pipes with pressures equal to or less than 150 pounds per square inch gauge (psig):
a. Bolts: In accordance with ASTM A307, Grade B.
b. Nuts: In accordance with ASTM A563, Grade A.
c. Bolts and nuts: Hot-dip galvanized in accordance with ASTM F2329.
2. On exposed pipes with pressures greater than 150 psig:
a. Bolts: In accordance with ASTM A193, Grade B7.
b. Nuts: In accordance with ASTM A194, Grade 2H.
c. Bolts and nuts: Hot-dip galvanized in accordance with ASTM F2329.
3. On underwater pipes and pipes adjacent to wet walls:
a. Bolts: In accordance with ASTM A193, Grade B8M.
b. Nuts: In accordance with ASTM A194, Grade 8M.
2.04 MECHANICAL JOINTS BOLTS AND NUTS
A. Bolts, including T-bolts:
1. High strength low alloy steel in accordance with AWWA C111. a. Fluoropolymer coated.
2. Type 316 stainless steel in accordance with ASTM F593.
B. Heavy hex nuts:
1. High strength low alloy steel in accordance with AWWA C111. a. Fluoropolymer coated.
2. Type 316 stainless steel in accordance with ASTM F594.
Common Work Results for General Piping
15052-4 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15052 (DraftFinal)
2.05 GASKETS
A. General.
1. Gaskets shall be suitable for the specific fluids, pressure, and temperature conditions.
2. Capable of being applied on surface of piping with cavities to provide for an improved seal with the internal piping pressure.
B. Gaskets for flanged joints in ductile iron and steel piping for sewage service:
1. Suitable for pressures equal to and less than 200 pounds per square inch gauge, temperatures equal to and less than 250 degrees Fahrenheit, and raw sewage service.
2. Gasket Material:
a. SBR or neoprene elastomer with minimum Shore A hardness value of 70. b. Reinforcement: Cloth or synthetic fiber.
c. Thickness: Minimum 3/32-inch thick for less than 10-inch pipe; minimum 1/8-inch thick for 10 inch and larger pipe.
3. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a. Pipe less than 48 inches in diameter:
1) Garlock, Style 7797.
2) John Crane, similar product.
b. Pipe 48 inches in diameter and larger:
1) Garlock, Style 3760.
2) John Crane, similar product.
C. Gaskets for flanged joints in ductile iron or steel water piping:
1. Suitable for hot or cold water, pressures equal to and less than 150 pounds per square inch gauge, and temperatures equal to and less than 160 degrees Fahrenheit.
2. Material:
a. SBR or neoprene elastomer, compressed, with non-asbestos fiber reinforcement.
3. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a. Garlock, Bluegard 3300.
a. John Crane, similar product.
D. Gaskets for flanged joints in ductile iron drinking water piping in accordance meeting NSF 61 requirements:
1. Suitable for hot or cold water, pressures equal to or less than 150 pounds per square inch gauge, and temperatures equal to or less than 160 degrees Fahrenheit.
2. Material:
a. EPDM material with 80 Shore A durometer rating.
3. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a. Garlock, 98206.
b. John Crane, similar product.
E. Gaskets for mechanical joints in ductile iron drinking water piping in accordance with NSF 61 requirements:
1. In accordance with AWWA C110, C111, and C115.
Common Work Results for General Piping
15052-5 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15052 (DraftFinal)
2. Material: Vulcanized styrene butadiene copolymer (SBR). a. Temperature range: 20 to 150 degrees Fahrenheit.
b. Operating pressure: 250 psi.
c. Durometer, Shore A (within 5): 75.
d. ASTM D412 tensile strength: 1,500 psi.
e. ASTM D412 elongation: 150 percent.
f. ASTM D395 B, compression set, 25 percent deflection, maximum percentage 22 hours at 158 degrees Fahrenheit: 20.
g. ASTM D573 minimum aging: 60 percent.
h. ASTM D1149 resistance to surface ozone: No cracking.
3. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a. American Cast Iron Pipe Co.
b. EBAA Iron, Inc.
c. Star Pipe Products.
F. Gaskets for integrally restrained push-on joints in ductile iron drinking water piping in accordance with NSF 61 requirements:
1. In accordance with AWWA C110, C111, and C115.
2. Material: Vulcanized styrene butadiene copolymer (SBR). a. Temperature range: 20 to 150 degrees Fahrenheit.
b. Operating pressure: 250 psi.
c. Durometer, Shore A:
1) Main body: 50 to 65.
2) Harder portion (if used): 80 to 85.
d. ASTM D412 tensile strength:
1) Main body: 2,000 psi.
2) Harder portion (if used): 1,200 psi.
e. ASTM D412 elongation:
1) Main body: 300 percent.
2) Harder portion (if used): 125 percent.
f. ASTM D395 B, compression set, 25 percent deflection, maximum percentage 22 hours at 158 degrees Fahrenheit: 20.
g. ASTM D573 minimum aging: 60 percent.
h. ASTM D1149 resistance to surface ozone: No cracking.
3. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a. American Cast Iron Pipe Co, Fast-grip gasket.
b. U.S. Pipe, Field Lok 350 Gaskets.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. General:
1. Piping drawings:
a. Except in details, piping is indicated diagrammatically. Not every offset and fitting, or structural difficulty that may be encountered has been indicated on the Drawings. Sizes and locations are indicated on the Drawings.
Common Work Results for General Piping
15052-6 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15052 (DraftFinal) b. Perform minor modifications to piping alignment where necessary to avoid structural, mechanical, or other type of obstructions that cannot be removed or changed.
1) Modifications are intended to be of minor scope, not involving a change to the design concept or a change to the Contract Price or Contract Times.
2. Piping alternatives:
a. Provide piping as specified in this Section, unless indicated on the Drawings or specified otherwise.
b. Alternative pipe ratings:
1) Piping with greater pressure rating than specified may be substituted in lieu of specified piping without changes to the Contract Price. 2) Piping of different material may not be substituted in lieu of specified piping.
c. Valves in piping sections: Capable of withstanding specified test pressures for piping sections and fabricated with ends to fit piping. d. Grooved joints: Use couplings, flange adapters, and fittings of the same manufacturer.
1) Manufacturer’s factory trained representative:
a) Provide on-site training for the Contractor’s field personnel. b) Periodically visit the jobsite to verify the Contractor is following best recommended practices.
2) Distributor’s representative is not considered qualified to conduct the training or jobsite visits.
e. Flanged joints: Where one of the joining flanges is raised face type, provide a matching raised face type flange for the other joining flange.
3. Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings, piping at pipe joints, fittings, couplings, and equipment shall be installed without rotation, angular deflection, vertical offset, or horizontal offset.
B. Wall and slab penetrations:
1. Provide sleeves for piping penetrations through aboveground masonry and concrete walls, floors, ceilings, roofs, unless specified or otherwise indicated on the Drawings.
2. For piping 1 inch in nominal diameter and larger, provide sleeves with minimum inside diameters of 1 inch plus outside diameter of piping. For piping smaller than 1 inch in nominal diameter, provide sleeve of minimum twice the outside diameter of piping.
a. Arrange sleeves and adjacent joints so piping can be pulled out of sleeves and replaced without disturbing the structure.
b. Cut ends of sleeves flush with surfaces of concrete, masonry, or plaster. c. Conceal ends of sleeves with escutcheons where piping runs through floors, walls, or ceilings of finished spaces within buildings. d. Seal spaces between pipes and sleeves with link-type seals when not otherwise specified or indicated on the Drawings.
e. Seal openings around piping running through interior walls and floors of chlorine rooms and chlorine storage rooms gastight with synthetic rubber sealing compound.
3. Provide flexibility in piping connecting to structures to accommodate movement due to soil settlement and earthquakes. Provide flexibility using details indicated on the Drawings.
Common Work Results for General Piping
15052-7 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15052 (DraftFinal)
4. Core drilled openings:
a. Do not damage or cut existing reinforcing bars, electrical conduits, or other items embedded in the existing concrete without acceptance by the Engineer.
b. Determine location of reinforcing bars or other obstructions with a non-destructive indicator device.
c. Remove dust and debris from hole using compressed air.
C. Exposed piping:
1. Install in straight runs parallel to the axes of structures, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings.
a. Install piping runs plumb and level, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings.
1) Slope plumbing drain piping with a minimum of 1/4 inch per foot downward in the direction of flow.
2. Install after installing equipment and after piping and fitting locations have been determined.
3. Support piping: As specified in Section 15061 - Pipe Supports:
a. Do not transfer pipe loads and strain to equipment.
4. In addition to the joints indicated on the Drawings, provide unions, flexible couplings, flanged joints, flanged coupling adapters, and other types of joints or means which are compatible with and suitable for the piping system, and necessary to allow ready assembly and disassembly of the piping.
5. Assemble piping without distortion or stresses caused by misalignment:
a. Match and properly orient flanges, unions, flexible couplings, and other connections.
b. Do not subject piping to bending or other undue stresses when fitting piping.
c. Do not correct defective orientation or alignment by distorting flanged joints or subjecting flange bolts to bending or other undue stresses. d. Flange bolts, union halves, flexible connectors, and other connection elements shall slip freely into place.
e. Alter piping assembly to fit when proper fit is not obtained. f. Install eccentric reducers or increasers with the top horizontal for pump suction piping.
D. Buried piping:
1. Bury piping with minimum 3-foot cover without air traps, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings.
2. Where 2 similar services run parallel to each other, piping for such services may be laid in the same trench.
a. Lay piping with sufficient room for assembly and disassembly of joints, for thrust blocks, for other structures, and to meet separation requirements of public health authorities having jurisdiction.
3. Laying piping:
a. In finished trenches free from water or debris. Begin at the lowest point with bell ends up slope.
b. Place piping with top or bottom markings with markings in proper position. c. On an unyielding foundation with uniform bearing under the full length of barrels.
Common Work Results for General Piping
15052-8 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15052 (DraftFinal) d. Where joints require external grouting, banding, or pointing, provide space under and immediately in front of the bell end of each section laid with sufficient shape and size for grouting, banding, or pointing of joints. e. At the end of each day’s construction, plug open ends of piping temporarily to prevent entrance of debris or animals.
4. Concrete encase buried pipe installed under concrete slabs or structures.
E. Venting piping under pressure:
1. Lay piping under pressure flat or at a continuous slope without air traps, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings.
2. Install plug valves as air bleeder cocks at high points in piping. a. Provide 1-inch plug valves for water lines and 2-inch plug valves for sewage and sludge lines, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings.
3. Provide additional pipe taps with plug cocks and riser pipes along piping as required for venting during initial filling, disinfecting, and sampling.
4. Before piping is placed into service, close plug valves and install plugs. Protect plugs and plug valves from corrosion as specified in Section 09960 - High-Performance Coatings.
F. Restraining buried piping:
2. At valves and at fittings where piping changes direction, changes size, and at ends:
a. When piping is underground, use concrete thrust blocks, mechanical restraints, or push-on restraints.
b. Determine thrust forces by multiplying the nominal cross-sectional area of the piping by the design test pressure of the piping.
3. Provide restraints with ample size to withstand thrust forces resulting from test pressures:
a. During testing, provide suitable temporary restraints where piping does not require permanent restraints.
4. Place concrete thrust blocks against undisturbed soil.
5. Place concrete so piping joints, fittings, and other appurtenances are accessible for assembly and disassembly.
6. Provide underground mechanical restraints where specified in Piping Schedule in the Drawings.
G. Restraining above ground piping:
1. At valves and fittings where piping changes direction, changes size, and at ends:
a. When piping is aboveground or underwater, use mechanical or structural restraints.
b. Determine thrust forces by multiplying the nominal cross-sectional area of the piping by the design test pressure of the piping.
2. Provide restraints with ample size to withstand thrust forces resulting from test pressures:
c. During testing, provide suitable temporary restraints where piping does not require permanent restraints.
Common Work Results for General Piping
15052-9 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15052 (DraftFinal) H. Connections to existing piping:
1. Expose existing piping to which connections are to be made with sufficient time to permit, where necessary, field adjustments in line, grade, or fittings:
a. Protect domestic water/potable water supplies from contamination:
1) Make connections between domestic water supply and other water systems in accordance with requirements of public health authorities. 2) Provide devices approved by the owner of the domestic water supply system to prevent flow from other sources into the domestic supply system.
2. Make connections to existing piping and valves after sections of new piping to be connected have been tested and found satisfactory.
3. Provide sleeves, flanges, nipples, couplings, adapters, and other fittings needed to install or attach new fittings to existing piping and to make connections to existing piping.
4. For flanged connections, provide stainless steel bolts with isolation bushings and washers, and full-face flange gaskets.
I. Connections between ferrous and nonferrous metals:
1. Connect ferrous and nonferrous metal piping, tubing, and fittings with dielectric couplings especially designed for the prevention of chemical reactions between dissimilar metals.
2. Nonferrous metals include aluminum, copper, and copper alloys.
J. Flanged connections between dissimilar metals such as ductile iron pipe and steel pipe:
1. Provide stainless steel bolts with isolation bushings and washers, and full-face flange gaskets.
3.02 CLEANING
A. Piping cleaning:
1. Upon completion of installation, clean piping interior of foreign matter and debris.
2. Perform special cleaning when required by the Contract Documents.
B. Chlorine piping:
1. General:
a. Coordinate with the Owner and attend a pre-cleaning meeting with the Owner before cleaning chlorine piping.
b. Work with the Owner during cleaning and conform to plant operational and shut down constraints.
c. Clean chlorine piping in accordance with the requirements of the Chlorine Institute-Pamphlet 6 and meet the following requirements.
2. Steel piping:
a. Dry chlorine gas or liquid chlorine piping:
1) Do not put water into any of the chlorine gas or liquid piping. 2) Blow chlorine piping clean of loose debris with compressed air at 4,000 fpm.
3) Clean chlorine piping by pulling clean cloths saturated with an approved solvent through piping:
a) Do not use hydrocarbons or alcohols that may react with chlorine.
Common Work Results for General Piping
15052-10 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15052 (DraftFinal) b) Use solvents in accordance with the manufacturer’s safety recommendations to avoid serious physiological effects. c) Remove dirt and debris of any nature from the chlorine lines. 4) Disassemble and clean valves and equipment that have oil residues before installation.
5) Dry piping immediately before effecting final connections for service. a) Keep piping sealed to prevent moisture from entering chlorine piping.
b) Supply compressors, air dryers, and dew point testing equipment necessary to dry and test for dryness the new chlorination system piping.
6) Drying procedure:
a) Pass dry commercial-grade nitrogen gas that has a dew point of -40 degrees Fahrenheit or less through the piping until exhausted air at three engineer-approved locations has a dew point of -40 degrees Fahrenheit.
b) Confirm dew point with a hygrometer.
c) Re-dry the chlorine piping system in the event subsequent work opens any part of the system to the atmosphere.
3. PVC piping:
a. Cleaning chlorine gas vacuum piping:
1) Blow pipe clean of loose debris with instrument-grade clean and dry compressed air.
2) Ensure that pipe is open and not valved off at the end of the section to be cleaned so that pipe does not become pressurized.
3) Do not pressurize PVC with compressed air.
4) Do not flush chlorine gas vacuum piping with water.
b. Cleaning chlorine solution piping:
1) Flush with potable water to clear loose debris.
C. Conduct pressure and leak test, as specified.
D. As indicated on the Drawings.
END OF SECTION
Fusion Bonded Epoxy Lining
15057-1 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15057 (DraftFinal) SECTION 15057
FUSION BONDED EPOXY LINING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes: Fusion bonded epoxy lining for steel or ductile iron pipe and fittings.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. ASTM International (ASTM):
1. D1002 - Standard Test Method for Apparent Shear Strength of Single-Lap-Joint Adhesively Bonded Metal Specimen by Tension Loading (Metal-to-Metal).
2. G8 - Standard Test Methods for Cathodic Disbonding of Pipeline Coatings.
B. American Water Works Association (AWWA):
1. C116 - Standard for Protective Fusion-Bonded Epoxy Coatings for the Interior and Exterior Surfaces of Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Fittings.
2. C213 - Fusion-Bonded Epoxy Coating for the Interior and Exterior of Steel Water Pipelines.
C. Society for Protective Coatings (SSPC):
1. SP 7 – Brush-Off Blast Cleaning.
2. SP 10 - Near-White Blast Cleaning.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product data.
B. Test reports: Include manufacturer's certification that lining passed tests.
C. Manufacturer's application instructions.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 EPOXY RESIN POWDER
A. Manufacturer: One of the following or equal:
1. 3M.
2. Morton Thiokol.
Fusion Bonded Epoxy Lining
15057-2 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15057 (DraftFinal) B. Material: Thermosetting, fusion bonded dry powder epoxy, 100 percent solids, with following performance characteristics when applied:
1. Cathodic disbondment resistance: Average maximum 48 millimeters when tested in accordance with ASTM G8.
2. Adhesion shear resistance: Minimum 4,700 pounds per square inches when tested in accordance with ASTM D1002.
2.02 FABRICATION
A. Blast clean fitting interior surfaces of pipe and fittings in accordance with SSPC-SP 7 or SSPC-SP 10.
B. Apply epoxy resin powder to blasted surfaces by either fluidized bed method or electrostatic coating method in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and AWWA C116 or AWWA C213.
C. Fuse lining to piping in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and AWWA C116 or AWWA C213.
D. Pipe and fittings: Minimum lining thickness: 16-mil.
E. Valve: Lining thickness: 10 to 12-mils, except that:
1. Lining thickness in grooves for gaskets: 5-mil.
2. Do not coat seat grooves in valves with bonded seat.
2.03 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Test lining with either 100 volt per mil thickness holiday detectors or low voltage wet sponge holiday detectors.
B. Reject pipe and fitting with linings that contain pinholes, discontinuities or other defects.
C. Lining thickness: Measured with a non-destructive magnetic type thickness gauge.
D. Verify lining integrity with a wet sponge-testing unit operating at approximately 60 volts, or as recommended by the lining manufacturer.
E. Consider tests successful when lining thickness meets specified requirements and when no pinholes are found.
F. Correct defective lining disclosed by unsuccessful tests, and repeat test.
G. Repair pinholes with liquid epoxy recommended by manufacturer of the epoxy used for lining.
Fusion Bonded Epoxy Lining
15057-3 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15057 (DraftFinal) PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install pipe and fitting as specified in Section 15052 - Common Work Results for General Piping.
END OF SECTION
Pipe Supports
15061-1 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15061 (DraftFinal) SECTION 15061
PIPE SUPPORTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
1. Supports for pipe, fittings, valves, and appurtenances.
B. Contractor shall be responsible for the design of pipe supports.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. ASTM International (ASTM):
1. A123 - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products.
2. A380 - Standard Practice for Cleaning, Descaling, and Passivation of Stainless Steel Parts, Equipment, and Systems.
3. A967 - Standard Specification for Chemical Passivation Treatments for Stainless Steel Parts.
B. Manufacturers Standardization Society (MSS):
1. SP-58 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design, Manufacture, Selection, Application, and Installation.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit as specified in Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures.
B. Product data:
1. Design features.
2. Load capacities.
3. Material designations by UNS alloy number or ASTM Specification and Grade.
4. Data needed to verify compliance with the Specifications.
5. Catalog data.
6. Clearly mark submittal information to show specific items, materials, and accessories or options being furnished.
C. Submit sealed and signed calculations for all pipe supports. Calculations shall meet the requirements as specified in Section 01850 - Design Criteria.
1. Calculations and other information to substantiate supports and anchors shall meet minimum design strength as specified in Section 01850 - Design Criteria.
1.04 WARRANTY
A. Provide warranty as specified in Section 01783 - Warranties and Bonds.
Pipe Supports
15061-2 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15061 (DraftFinal) PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. As specified in the Agreement and Contract RFP in Volumes 1 and 2.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. General:
1. Hot dip galvanized:
a. Fabricate as specified in Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications. b. Hot dip after fabrication of support in accordance with ASTM A123. c. Repair galvanized surface as specified in Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications.
2. Stainless steel:
a. Fabricate as specified in Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications. b. Finish requirements: Remove free iron, heat tint oxides, weld scale, and other impurities, and obtain a passive finished surface. c. At the shop, perform pickling and passivation on all surfaces inside and out in accordance with ASTM A380 or ASTM A967.
d. Field welding is prohibited unless specifically allowed by the Owner. All field welds shall be passivated.
B. Outdoor areas: Areas exposed to the natural outdoor environment:
1. Hot Dip Galvanized.
C. Indoor areas: Areas exposed to an indoor environment including galleries and tunnels:
1. Hot Dip Galvanized and coated.
D. Chemical containment areas and chemical piping:
1. Fiberglass reinforced plastic, unless otherwise noted.
E. Fasteners:
1. As specified in Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications.
2.03 PIPE SUPPORTS
A. Hanger rods: Sized to match suspended pipe hanger, or as indicated on the Drawings:
1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a. For stainless steel piping:
1) Bergen-Power, Figure 133.
2) Nibco-Tolco, Figure 103.
b. For all other piping, unless indicated on the Drawings:
1) Anvil International, Figure 140.
2) Bergen-Power, Figure 133.
3) Cooper B-Line Systems, Inc., Figure B3205.
Pipe Supports
15061-3 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15061 (DraftFinal) B. Hanger rods, continuously threaded: Sized to match suspended pipe hanger, or as indicated on the Drawings:
1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a. For stainless steel piping:
1) Bergen-Power, Figure 94.
2) FM Stainless Fasteners.
b. For steel and ductile iron piping:
1) Anvil International, Figure 146.
2) Bergen-Power, Figure 94.
C. Eye bolts:
1. For stainless steel piping:
a. Type 316 stainless steel, welded and rated equal to full load capacity of rod.
2. For all other piping, unless indicated on the Drawings:
a. Welded and rated equal to full load capacity of rod.
D. Welded eyebolt rod:
1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a. For stainless steel piping:
1) FM Stainless Fasteners.
2) Nibco-Tolco, Figure 101.
b. For all other piping, unless indicated on the Drawings:
1) Anvil International, Figure 278.
2) Bergen-Power, Figure 93.
3) Cooper B-Line Systems, Inc., Figure B3210.
E. Adjustable ring hangers: MSS SP-58, Type 7 or Type 9 (system dependent):
1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a. For stainless steel piping:
1) Bergen-Power, Figure 100SS.
2) Nibco-Tolco, Figure 1C.I.
b. For all other piping, unless indicated on the Drawings:
1) Anvil International, Figure 69.
2) Cooper B-Line Systems, Inc., Figure B3172.
F. Adjustable clevis hangers: MSS SP-58, Type 1:
1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a. For stainless steel piping:
1) Cooper B-Line Systems, Inc., Figure B3100 or B3102.
2) FM Stainless Fasteners, Figure 60.
b. For all other piping, unless indicated on the Drawings:
1) Anvil International, Figure 260 or Figure 590.
2) Bergen-Power, Figure 100.
3) Cooper B-Line Systems, Inc., Figure B3100 or B3102.
G. Adjustable clevis hangers for insulated pipe: Oversize:
1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a. For stainless steel piping:
1) Nibco-Tolco, Figure 1A.
Pipe Supports
15061-4 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15061 (DraftFinal) b. For all other piping, unless indicated on the Drawings:
1) Anvil International, Figure 300.
2) Bergen-Power, Figure 100EL.
3) Cooper B-Line Systems, Inc. Figure B3108.
H. Single rod hangers for steam pipe: MSS SP-58, Type 43; malleable iron or steel yoke and roller hangers; swivel to allow rotation of yoke on rod:
1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a. For stainless steel piping:
1) Cooper B-Line Systems, Inc., Figure B3110.
2) FM Fasteners, Figure 81.
3) Nibco-Tolco, Figure 324.
b. For all other piping, unless indicated on the Drawings:
1) Anvil International, Figure 181.
2) Cooper B-Line Systems, Inc., Figure B3110.
I. Double rod hangers for steam pipe: MSS SP-58, Type 41:
1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a. For stainless steel piping:
1) FM Stainless Fasteners, Figure 71.
b. For all other piping, unless indicated on the Drawings:
1) Anvil International, Figure 171.
2) Cooper B-Line Systems, Inc., Figure B3114.
J. Brackets: MSS SP-58, Type 32 with back plate; rated for 1,500 pounds:
1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a. For stainless steel piping:
1) Cooper B-Line Systems, Inc., Figure B3066.
2) FM Stainless Fasteners, Figure 98.
3) Nibco-Tolco, Figure 30M.
b. For all other piping, unless indicated on the Drawings:
1) Anvil International, Figure 195.
2) Cooper B-Line Systems, Inc., Figure B3066.
K. Brackets, heavy duty: MSS SP-58, Type 33 with back plate; rated for 3,000 pounds:
1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a. Anvil International, Figure 199.
b. Cooper B-Line Systems, Inc., Figure B3067.
L. Standard U-bolt: MSS SP-58, Type 24:
1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a. For stainless steel piping:
1) Cooper B-Line Systems, Inc., Figure B3188.
2) FM Stainless Fasteners, Figure 37.
3) Nibco-Tolco, Figure 110.
b. For all other piping, unless indicated on the Drawings:
1) Anvil International, Figure 137.
2) Bergen-Power, Figure 283.
3) Cooper B-Line Systems, Inc., Figure B3188.
Pipe Supports
15061-5 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15061 (DraftFinal) M. Riser clamps: MSS SP-58, Type 8:
1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a. For stainless steel piping:
1) Cooper B-Line Systems, Inc., Figure B3373.
2) FM Stainless Fasteners, Figure 61.
b. For all other piping, unless indicated on the Drawings:
1) Anvil International, Figure 261.
2) Bergen-Power, Figure 126.
3) Cooper B-Line Systems, Inc., Figure B3373.
N. Pipe clamps: MSS SP-58, Type 4:
1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a. For stainless steel piping:
1) Cooper B-Line Systems, Inc., Figure 3140.
2) Nibco-Tolco, Figure 4.
b. For all other piping, unless indicated on the Drawings:
1) Anvil International, Figure 212.
2) Bergen-Power, Figure 175.
3) Cooper B-Line Systems, Inc., Figure B3140.
O. Adjustable offset pipe clamp:
1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a. For stainless steel piping:
1) Cooper B-Line Systems, Inc., Figure B3149.
2) FM Stainless Fasteners, Figure 63.
3) Nibco-Tolco, Figure 4.
b. For all other piping, unless indicated on the Drawings:
1) Anvil International, Figure 100.
2) Cooper B-Line Systems, Inc., Figure B3149.
P. Offset pipe clamp:
1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a. For stainless steel piping:
1) Cooper B-Line Systems, Inc., Figure 3148.
2) Nibco-Tolco, Figure 8.
b. For all other piping, unless indicated on the Drawings:
1) Anvil International, Figure 103.
2) Cooper B-Line Systems, Inc., Figure B3148.
Q. Floor stand or stanchion saddles: MSS SP-58, Type 37. Provided with U-bolt hold down yokes:
1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a. For stainless steel piping:
1) FM Stainless Fasteners, Figure 59.
2) Nibco-Tolco, Figure 318.
b. For all other piping, unless indicated on the Drawings:
1) Anvil International, Figure 259.
2) Bergen-Power, Figure 125.
3) Cooper B-Line Systems, Inc., Figure B3090.
c. Threaded pipe stand support stanchion. Match pipe support material:
1) Anvil International, Figure 63T.
Pipe Supports
15061-6 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15061 (DraftFinal) 2) Bergen-Power, Figure 138.
3) Cooper B-Line Systems Inc., Figure B3088ST.
R. Spring hangers:
1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a. For stainless steel piping:
1) Bergen-Power, Figure 920.
b. For all other piping, unless indicated on the Drawings:
1) Anvil International, Figure B-268, Type G.
2) Bergen-Power, Figure 920.
S. One hole pipe clamps:
1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a. For stainless steel piping: Engineer knows of no product. b. For all other piping:
1) Anvil International, Figure 126.
2) Carpenter & Paterson, Figure 237S.
T. Welded beam attachment: MSS SP-58, Type 22:
1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a. For stainless steel piping:
1) Cooper B-Line Systems, Inc., Figure 3083.
2) Nibco-Tolco, Figure 304.
b. For all other piping, unless indicated on the Drawings:
1) Anvil International, Figure 66.
2) Bergen-Power, Figure 113A or 113B.
3) Cooper B-Line Systems, Inc., Figure B3083.
U. Heavy pipe clamp: MSS SP-58, Type 4:
1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a. For stainless steel piping:
1) Nibco-Tolco, Figure 4H.
b. For all other piping, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings:
1) Anvil International, Figure 216.
2) Bergen-Power, Figure 298.
V. PTFE pipe slide assembly: MSS SP-58, Type 35 with lateral and vertical restraint:
1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a. For stainless steel piping:
1) Nibco-Tolco, Figure 426.
b. For all other piping, unless indicated on the Drawings:
1) Anvil International, Figure 257, Type 3.
2) Cooper B-Line Systems, Inc., Figure B3893.
W. Anchor bolts, concrete anchors, concrete inserts, powder-actuated fasteners, and sleeve anchors: As specified in Section 05120 - Structural Steel Framing.
2.04 THERMAL PIPE HANGER SHIELD
A. Provided at hanger, support, and guide locations on pipe requiring insulation.
Pipe Supports
15061-7 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15061 (DraftFinal) B. Consist of an insulation layer encircling the entire circumference of the pipe and a steel jacket encircling the insulation layer.
C. Same thickness as the piping system insulation specified in Section 15082 - Piping Insulation.
D. Standard shield shall be used for hot systems and the vapor barrier shield shall be used for cold systems.
E. Stainless steel band clamps shall be used where specified to protect against slippage between the pipe wall and the thermal shield.
F. Standard shield:
1. Insulation:
a. Hydrous calcium silicate, high density, waterproof.
b. Compressive strength: 100 pounds per square inch average. c. Flexural strength: 75 pounds per square inch average. d. K factor: 0.38 at 100 degrees Fahrenheit mean.
e. Temperature range: 20 degrees Fahrenheit to 500 degrees Fahrenheit.
2. Steel jacket:
a. Jacket shall be galvanized steel.
b. Gauge shall be the manufacturer’s standard supplied for the given pipe size.
3. Connection:
a. Shield shall have butt connection to pipe insulation. b. Steel jacket and insulation ends shall be flush.
G. Vapor barrier shield:
1. Insulation:
a. Hydrous calcium silicate, high density, waterproof.
b. Compressive strength: 100 pounds per square inch average. c. Flexural strength: 75 pounds per square inch average. d. K factor: 0.38 at 100 degrees Fahrenheit mean.
e. Temperature range: 20 degrees Fahrenheit to 500 degrees Fahrenheit.
2. Steel jacket:
a. Jacket shall be of galvanized steel.
b. Gauge shall be the manufacturer’s standard supplied for the given pipe size.
3. Connection:
a. Shield shall have butt connection to pipe insulation.
H. Insulation shall extend 1 inch each side of steel jacket for vapor tight connection to the pipe insulation vapor barrier.
Pipe Supports
15061-8 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15061 (DraftFinal) PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Support, suspend, or anchor exposed pipe, fittings, valves, and appurtenances to prevent sagging, overstressing, or movement of piping; and to prevent thrusts or loads on or against connected pumps, blowers, and other equipment.
B. Field verify support location, orientation, and configuration to eliminate interferences prior to fabrication of supports.
C. Carefully determine locations of inserts. Anchor to formwork prior to placing concrete.
D. Use flush shells only where indicated on the Drawings.
E. Do not use anchors relying on deformation of lead alloy.
F. Do not use powder-actuated fasteners for securing metallic conduit or steel pipe larger than 1 inch to concrete, masonry, or wood.
G. Suspend pipe hangers from hanger rods and secure with double nuts.
H. Install continuously threaded hanger rods only where indicated on the Drawings.
I. Use adjustable ring hangers or adjustable clevis hangers for 4-inch and smaller diameter pipe.
J. Use adjustable clevis hangers for pipe larger than 4 inches in diameter.
K. Secure pipes with double nutted U-bolts or suspend pipes from hanger rods and hangers.
1. For stainless steel piping, use stainless steel U-bolts.
2. For all other piping, use galvanized U-bolts.
L. Support spacing:
1. Support 2-inch and smaller piping on horizontal and vertical runs at maximum 5 feet on center, unless otherwise specified.
2. Support larger than 2-inch piping on horizontal and vertical runs at maximum 10 feet on center, unless otherwise specified.
3. Support exposed polyvinyl chloride and other plastic pipes at maximum 5 feet on center, regardless of size.
4. Support tubing, PVC pipe 1-inch and smaller, copper pipe and tubing, fiber-reinforced plastic pipe or duct, and rubber hose and tubing at intervals close enough to prevent sagging greater than 1/4-inch between supports.
5. Do not suspend or support valves, pipe and fittings from another pipe or conduit.
M. Install supports at:
1. Any change in direction.
2. Both sides of flexible pipe connections.
3. Base of risers.
4. Floor penetrations.
Pipe Supports
15061-9 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15061 (DraftFinal)
5. Connections to pumps, blowers, and other equipment.
6. Valves and appurtenances.
N. Securely anchor plastic pipe, valves, and headers to prevent movement during operation of valves.
O. Anchor plastic pipe between expansion loops and direction changes to prevent axial movement through anchors.
P. Provide elbows or tees supported from floors with base fittings where indicated on the Drawings.
Q. Support base fittings with metal supports or, when indicated on the Drawings, support on concrete piers.
R. Do not use chains, plumbers’ straps, wire, or similar devices for permanently suspending, supporting, or restraining pipes.
S. Support plumbing drainage and vents in accordance with plumbing code as specified in Section 01410 - Regulatory Requirements.
T. Supports, clamps, brackets, and portions of support system bearing against copper pipe: Copper plated, copper throughout, or isolated with neoprene or polyvinyl chloride tape.
U. Where pipe is insulated, install over-sized supports and hangers.
V. Install thermal pipe shield in accordance with MSS SP-58, Type 40 on pipe supports for insulated pipes.
W. Install riser clamps at floor penetrations and where indicated on the Drawings.
X. Coat support system components as specified in Section 09960 - High-Performance Coatings.
END OF SECTION
Preformed Channel Pipe Support System
15062-1 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15062 (DraftFinal) SECTION 15062
PREFORMED CHANNEL PIPE SUPPORT SYSTEM
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes: Preformed channel pipe support system consisting of preformed channels, fittings, straps, and fasteners engineered to support piping.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC).
B. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI).
C. Manufacturer's Standardization Society (MSS):
1. SP-58 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design, and Manufacture.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit as specified in Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures.
B. Product data.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Design preformed channel pipe support system for loads in accordance with applicable provisions of:
1. AISC Manual of Steel Construction.
2. AISI Cold-Formed Steel Design Manual.
B. Product standards:
1. Pipe support materials: In accordance with MSS SP-58.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Fabricate preformed channel pipe support system using, as a minimum, parts specified below and meeting the requirements specified under Design Criteria.
1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a. Unistrut, Series P1000 or P1001; P5500 or P5501.
b. Allied Support Systems, Power Strut, Figure PS-200 or PS-200 2TS; PS-150 or PS-150 2TS.
c. Cooper Ind., B-Line, Channel Type B22 or B22A; B12 or B12A.
Preformed Channel Pipe Support System
15062-2 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15062 (DraftFinal)
2.02 DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
A. Design responsibility:
1. The manufacturer of the preformed channel pipe support system is responsible for the design of the support system.
2. Prepare design calculations utilizing the design criteria included in these Specifications.
3. Prepare detailed shop drawings illustrating the layout of the support system and identifying the components of the support system.
B. Design criteria:
1. Include live, dead, and seismic loads associated with piping, valves, and appurtenances. Consider the content of the pipes in load calculations.
2. Minimum gauge thickness: 12-gauge.
3. Allowable stress of channels:
a. Steel channels: The lesser of 25,000 pounds per square inch, or
0.66 times yield stress of steel.
b. Stainless steel channels: 0.66 times the yield stress of the stainless steel alloy.
4. Maximum deflection: 1/240 of span.
5. Allowable column loads: As recommended by manufacturer in published instruction for column's unsupported height and "K" value for calculating effective column length of not less than 1.0.
6. Future loads:
a. Support systems indicated on the Drawings may include spaces intended to accommodate future pipes.
b. Assume such spaces are occupied by 6-inch diameter ductile iron pipes.
Only the number of pipes that would physically fit into the space need be considered.
c. Include the weight of the pipe contents in determining future loads.
Assume pipe contents are water.
7. Seismic design criteria: As specified in Section 01850 - Design Criteria as specified for mechanical equipment.
8. Spacing of supports: As required to comply with design requirements but not more than 5 feet.
C. Supports below the top of walls of water bearing structures: Use Type 316 stainless steel for support system components.
1. Supports in other locations: Use hot-dipped galvanized components unless other materials are specifically indicated on the Drawings.
2.03 ACCESSORIES
A. Preformed channel concrete inserts: Minimum 12 inches long:
1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a. Unistrut, Series P-3200.
b. Allied Support Systems, Figure 282.
c. Cooper Ind., B-Line Series B32I.
Preformed Channel Pipe Support System
15062-3 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15062 (DraftFinal) B. 90-degree angle fittings:
1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a. Unistrut, P1026.
b. Allied Support Systems, Power Strut, P603.
C. Pipe straps:
1. For pipes 8 inches in diameter and smaller: Use 2-piece universal strap with slotted hex head screw and nut.
a. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1) Unistrut, Series P1109 through P1126.
2) Allied Support Systems, PS1100.
3) Cooper Ind., B-Line Series B2000.
2. For pipes greater than 8 inches in diameter: Unless different material is otherwise indicated on the Drawings use 1-piece 1-inch wide by 1/8-inch thick steel strap, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication.
3. For stainless steel pipes: Use type of strap required for the pipe sizes specified above, but use Type 316 stainless steel materials.
D. Prefabricated double channel bracket:
1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a. Unistrut, P2542-P2546.
b. Cooper Ind., B-Line Series B297.
E. Touch-up paint for galvanized surfaces:
1. Manufacturers: The following or equal:
a. Galvinox, Galvo-Weld.
F. Touch-up paint for painted surfaces: Same formulation as factory paint.
G. Cushion strip:
1. For solvent welded plastic pipes in elevated temperatures, use a thermoplastic elastomer, cushion wrap designed for use from -50 degrees Fahrenheit to 275 degrees Fahrenheit. Contractor to add a cushion strip at each pipe support strap that meets this criteria.
a. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1) Anvil, AS 3792.
2) Unistrut, P2600 Unicushion.
2.04 FABRICATION
A. Hot-dip galvanize support system components after fabrication to required length and shape.
B. Do not galvanize or paint stainless steel components.
Preformed Channel Pipe Support System
15062-4 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15062 (DraftFinal) PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install preformed channel concrete inserts for vertical support, quantity based on manufacturer's structural design calculations.
B. Fasten preformed channel pipe supports to existing walls using Z-fittings and concrete anchors as indicated on the Drawings.
C. Fasten preformed channel pipe supports to preformed channel concrete inserts embedded in ceiling using U-shaped fittings.
D. Suspend threaded rods from concrete inserts embedded in ceiling. Support preformed channel pipe supports with threaded rods.
E. Touchup cut or damaged galvanized surfaces.
F. Prevent contact between pipes and support components of dissimilar metals. Utilize rubber coated, plastic coated, or vinyl coated components, stainless steel components, or wrap pipe with PVC or polyethylene tape.
G. Install support as near as possible to concentrated loads.
H. Install support within 2 feet of horizontal and vertical changes in pipe alignment.
I. Adjust supports or install shims to obtain specified slope or elevation.
END OF SECTION
Pipe Identification
15076-1 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15076 (DraftFinal) SECTION 15076
PIPE IDENTIFICATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes: Pipe identification including the following:
1. Pipe identification markers, flow direction arrows, tags, and bands.
2. Underground warning tape.
3. Tracer wire.
4. Witness markers.
5. Valve identification.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME):
1. A13.1 - Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit as specified in Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures.
B. Submit following:
1. Product data.
2. Samples.
3. Manufacturer's installation instructions.
4. Submit following as specified in Section 01770 - Closeout Procedures:
a. Operation and Maintenance Data.
b. Warranty.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 EXPOSED AND IN-CHASE PIPE IDENTIFICATION
A. For piping with outer diameter greater than or equal to 3/4-inch, provide lettered pipe markers and flow direction arrows:
1. General requirements:
a. Pipe markers shall include the following, minimum:
1) Printed text identifying the pipe fluid.
a) The text shall be all capital letters matching the text listed in the "Service" column of the Piping Schedule for the corresponding piping system.
2) An arrow identifying the direction of fluid flow.
a) The arrow can either be integral to the text marker or provided separately. If provided separately, the arrow must be placed immediately adjacent to each text marker, with the arrow aligned Pipe Identification
15076-2 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15076 (DraftFinal) with the text such that the text and arrow are both visible from the same viewpoint.
b) The arrow color shall match the text color, and the arrow background color shall match the text background color. b. Suitable for outdoor application from -40 degrees to 180 degrees Fahrenheit; in accordance with ASME A13.1 requirements. c. Lettering:
Outside Pipe Diameter Including Covering Lettering Height Less than 0.75 inches N/A
0.75 to 1.5 inches 1/2-inch
1.5 inches to 2 inches 3/4-inch
2.5 inches to 4 inches 1-1/4 inches
8 inches to 10 inches 2-1/2 inches
Over 10 inches 3-1/2 inches
d. Marker colors:
Fluid service Text/arrow color Background color
Flammable and oxidizing fluids Black Yellow
Potable, cooling, boiler feed, nontoxic solutions,
low hazard liquids, and other waters
White Green
Compressed air White Blue
Fire quenching fluids (foam, fire water, CO2
Halon)
White Red
Toxic and corrosive fluids Black Orange
Combustible fluids White Brown
2. Coating: As specified in Section 09960 - High-Performance Coatings.
3. Pipe identification tags: Aluminum or stainless steel with stamped-in 1/4-inch high identifying lettering.
4. Pipe identification tag chains: Aluminum or stainless steel.
5. Self-adhesive type markers:
a. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1) Seton, (of Brady Corporation), Opti Code Pipe Markers. 2) Lab Safety Supply.
3) Marking Services, Inc.
b. Materials:
1) Self-adhesive vinyl.
6. Snap-on markers: Markers with 3/4-inch high letters for 3/4 to 4-inch pipe or covering, or 5-inch high letters for 5-inch or larger pipe or cover:
a. Manufacturers: One of following or equal:
1) Brady BradySnap-On B-915.
2) Seton (of Brady Corporation) Setmark.
Pipe Identification
15076-3 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15076 (DraftFinal) B. For piping with outer diameter less than 3/4-inch, provide identification tags and flow direction arrows:
1. Manufacturer: One of the following or equal:
a. Seton (of Brady Corporation).
2. Tag and chain materials:
a. Copper piping: Brass.
b. Ferrous piping: Type 316 stainless steel.
c. Plastic piping: Stainless steel or Aluminum.
3. Flow direction arrow colors shall adhere to the same requirements as for piping with outer diameter greater than or equal to 3/4 -inch, as specified in this Section.
C. Pipe bands:
1. When bands are required by the Piping Schedule for a specific piping system, provide solid-colored 4-inch wide bands.
a. Color as specified in the Piping Schedule.
2. Self-adhesive type.
3. Suitable for outdoor application from -40 degrees to 180 degrees Fahrenheit.
2.02 BURIED PIPELINE IDENTIFICATION
A. Underground warning tape:
1. Manufacturer: One of the following or equal:
a. Seton Name Plate Co.(of Brady Corporation).
b. T. Christy Enterprises, Inc.
2. Material:
a. Polyethylene tape for prolonged underground use.
b. Minimum tape thickness: 4 mils.
c. Overall tape width: 4 inches.
d. Message: “CAUTION” with the name of the service followed by “LINE BURIED BELOW.” in black lettering on colored background in accordance with approved APWA colors.
Service Color
Potable water Blue
Reclaimed water, irrigation, and slurry lines Purple
Sewers and drain lines Green
Gas, oil, steam, petroleum, chemicals, or other service Yellow Telephone Orange
e. Solid aluminum core.
B. Tracer wire:
1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a. Kris-Tech Wire.
b. Aegion Corrpro.
2. Materials: One of the following or equal:
a. Solid copper conductor.
b. Thickness minimum: 10 gauge.
Pipe Identification
15076-4 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15076 (DraftFinal) c. Insulation:
1) Match insulation color to the color of the pipe being installed. 2) UF type, direct bury.
3) 30 mil HMWPE.
3. Splicing kit:
a. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1) Rexel, 3M-82 A1N.
4. Station box:
a. Lid and collar materials: Cast iron.
b. Lid type: Locking.
c. Able to withstand heavy traffic loading.
d. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1) CP Test & Valve Products, Inc., Glenn Test Station.
2) Farwest Corrosion Control.
C. Witness markers:
1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a. Carsonite Composites, Utility Marker.
b. Hampton Technical Associates, Inc.
2. Materials:
a. Glass fiber and resin reinforced thermosetting composite material. b. UV resistant.
3. Constructed as a single piece.
4. Pointed at the bottom end.
5. Information to be included on the marker:
a. “Caution” (type of service) “Pipeline”.
b. Phone number for Underground Service Alert.
c. Phone number for Owner in case of emergency.
d. Station number.
e. Offset:
1) Only provide offset if marker is not directly over the pipe. f. Name of appurtenance or fitting (e.g., 45, BO, ARV, etc.).
2.03 VALVE AND GATE IDENTIFICATION
A. Provide valve and gate schedule for each valve and gate in the Work with the following information:
1. Identification number.
2. Location.
3. Type.
4. Function.
5. Normal operating position.
B. Identification tag requirements.
1. Diameter: 2 inches.
2. Material:
a. Buried applications: Stainless steel or PVC.
b. Buried applications with concrete marker: Brass.
c. Above ground and in-chase applications: 19 gauge aluminum or PVC.
3. Stamp tags in 1/4-inch high letter.
Pipe Identification
15076-5 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15076 (DraftFinal)
4. Provide non-corrosive metal wire suitable for attaching the tag to the operator base.
5. Secure tags to valve or gate:
a. Attach tags in such a way as to allow free and full operation of the valve or gate.
6. Buried applications with concrete marker: Secure tags to concrete marker.
C. Submittal requirements:
1. Submit 2 samples of the type of tag proposed and the manufacturer’s standard color chart and letter styles to the Engineer for review.
D. Manufacturer: The following or equal:
1. Seton Name Plate Co.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify satisfactory conditions of substrate for applying identification.
B. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation and application of products as specified in the Agreement and Contract RFP in Volumes 1 and 2.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Prepare and coat surfaces as specified in Section 09960 - High-Performance Coatings.
B. Prepare surface in accordance with identification product manufacturer's instructions.
3.03 EXPOSED AND IN-CHASE PIPING IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify exposed and in-chase piping with flow direction arrows and lettering (for piping with outer diameter greater than or equal to 3/4-inch) or tags (for piping with outer diameter less than 3/4-inch).
B. Color code: Paint piping with colors as scheduled in Piping Color Code and Marker Schedule or as selected by Owner. Where tags are used, color code pipe as scheduled.
C. Provide lettering (or tags for pipes with outer diameter less than 3/4-inch) and flow direction arrows near equipment served, adjacent to valves, both sides of walls and floors where pipe passes through, at each branch or tee, and at intervals of not more than 50 feet in straight runs of pipe.
1. Label all chemical tank fill pipelines at locations that are visible from chemical fill stations.
Pipe Identification
15076-6 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15076 (DraftFinal)
2. Place markers on piping so they are visible from operator's position in walkway or working platform near piping. Locate markers along horizontal centerline of pipe, unless better visibility is achieved elsewhere.
3. Do not apply markers, arrows, or tags to piping that is regularly submerged.
D. Where scheduled in the Piping Schedule, space 4-inch wide solid-color bands along piping at 10-foot intervals for stainless steel pipe and 5-foot intervals for other pipe.
1. Do not apply bands to piping that is regularly submerged.
3.04 BURIED PIPING IDENTIFICATION
A. Underground warning tape:
1. Non-detectable warning tape:
a. Place continuous run of warning tape in pipe trench, 12 inches above the pipe.
2. Detectable warning tape:
a. Place continuous run of warning tape in pipe trench, 12 inches above the pipe or a greater height if necessary to limit the tape bury depth to 36 inches. Do not bury detectable warning tape deeper than 36 inches.
B. Tracer wire:
1. Install on all non-metallic pipe.
2. Install an electrically continuous run of tracer wire along the entire length of the pipe with wire terminations in valve boxes, vaults, or structures.
3. Install tracer wire on top of the pipe and secure to pipe with tape a minimum of every 10 feet.
4. Where approved by the Engineer, splice sections of wire together using approved direct bury wire nuts.
a. Twisting the wires together is not acceptable.
C. Witness markers:
1. Install over pipe in unpaved open-space areas at intervals not greater than 200 feet.
2. Place markers at appurtenances located in unpaved areas.
3. Embed markers at least 18 inches into the soil.
3.05 APPLICATION
A. Identify piping with legend markers, directional arrow markers, and number markers; use self-adhesive arrow roll tape to secure ends of piping markers and indicate flow direction.
B. Provide legend markers, directional arrow markers, and number markers where piping passes through walls or floors, at piping intersections and at maximum 15-foot spacing on piping runs.
C. Provide piping marker letters and colors as scheduled.
Pipe Identification
15076-7 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15076 (DraftFinal)
3.06 PIPING COLOR CODE AND MARKER SCHEDULE
Service Fluid Pipe Color Marker Legend
Chemical Drain Charcoal CHEMICAL DRAIN
Cooling Water Blue COOLING WATER
Domestic Cold Water Light Blue DOMESTIC COLD WATER
Domestic Hot Water Light Blue DOMESTIC HOT WATER
Deionized Water Blue DEIONIZED WATER
Drain Charcoal DRAIN
Exhaust Gas Yellow EXHAUST GAS
Engine Jacket Water Dark Blue ENGINE JACKET WATER
Fuel Oil Orange FUEL OIL
Grit Black GRIT
Instrumental Air Purple INSTRUMENTATION AIR
Engine Lube Oil Red ENGINE LUBE OIL
Pumped Drain Charcoal PUMPED DRAIN
Process Water Dark Blue PROCESS WATER
Raw Wastewater Buff NONE USED
Return Water Silver/Grey RETURN WATER
Sample Green FLUID BEING SAMPLED
Sanitary Drain Charcoal SANITARY DRAIN
Service Air Green SERVICE AIR
Sodium Hypochlorite Yellow CHLORINE SOLUTION
Sodium Bisulfite Yellow SODIUM BISULFITE
SOLUTION
Tank Drain Charcoal TANK DRAIN
Vent Pipe Yellow VENT PIPE
Washdown Water (W3) Medium Blue WASHDOWN WATER
Letters
Color of
Pipe
Color of
Bands
Color of
Letters
Finished or Potable (cold) Light blue None Black
Potable (hot) Light blue Red Black
Non-potable or Raw Light blue Dark Gray Black
Distilled or Demineralized Light Blue Black Black
Pipe Identification
15076-8 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15076 (DraftFinal) Letters
Color of
Pipe
Color of
Bands
Color of
Letters
Service Water (lines downstream
from backflow prevention unit
Dark Blue White Red
Sample Dark Blue Black White
Fire Protection Red None Black
Hydrants Aluminum None Black
Filter-to-Waste Light Brown None Black
Wash Water Drain Light Gray None Black
Sewage Light Gray None Black
Solids Dark Brown None White
Scum Dark Brown None White
Drain Dark Gray None White
Sump Pump Pipe Line Dark Gray Red White
Chlorine (gas, liquid, or vent) Yellow None Black
Chlorine (solution) Yellow Red Black
Ferric Chloride Orange Yellow Black
Alum Orange Yellow Black
Ammonia Yellow Dark Brown Black
Auxiliary Chemical Yellow Dark Blue Black
Sulfuric Acid Yellow Orange Black
Sodium Hydroxide Yellow Dark Green Black
Algaecide (Potassium Permanganate,
Copper Sulfate)
Orange White Black
Polymer Orange Dark Green Black
Polyphosphate Orange Dark Gray Black
Carbon Black None White
Ozone None Red White
Stainless Steel Pipe White Red White
Ozone Off Gas
Stainless Steel Pipe None Orange White
Other Pipe White Orange White
Compressed Air Light Green None Black
Instrument Air Light Green Dark Green Black
Pipe Identification
15076-9 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15076 (DraftFinal) Letters
Color of
Pipe
Color of
Bands
Color of
Letters
Backwash Air (Low Pressure)
Stainless Steel Pipe None None Black
Other Pipe Light Green None Black
Process Air (Ozone-Low Pressure)
Stainless Steel Pipe None None Black
Other Pipe Light Green None Black
Laboratory Vacuum Dark Green Light Green Red
Natural Gas Red Yellow White
Refrigerant Yellow White Black
Heating Water (supply) Light Gray White Black
Heating Water (return) Light Gray Black Black
Condenser Water (supply) Light Gray Dark Brown Black
Condenser Water (return) Light Gray Red Black
Chilled Water (supply) Light Brown Dark Gray White
Chilled Water (return) Light Brown Red White
END OF SECTION
Piping Insulation
15082-1 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15082 (DraftFinal) SECTION 15082
PIPING INSULATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
1. Insulation for piping and related systems that are not plumbing systems.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO):
1. Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges.
B. ASTM International (ASTM):
1. C177 - Standard Test Method for Steady-State Heat Flux Measurements and Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Guarded-Hot-Plate Apparatus.
2. C518 - Standard Test Method for Steady-State Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus.
3. C533 - Standard Specification for Calcium Silicate Block and Pipe Thermal Insulation.
4. C547 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Pipe Insulation.
5. C552 - Standard Specification for Cellular Glass Thermal Insulation.
6. C795 - Standard Specification for Thermal Insulation for Use in Contact with Austenitic Stainless Steel.
7. C929 - Standard Practice for Handling, Transporting, Shipping, Storage, Receiving, and Application of Thermal Insulation Materials for Use in Contact with Austenitic Stainless Steel.
8. C1136 - Standard Specification for Flexible, Low Permeance Vapor Retarders for Thermal Insulation.
9. E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
10. E96 - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials.
C. California Energy Commission:
1. Title 24 - Building Energy Efficiency Standards.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Buried: Piping that is installed below buildings, foundations, or finish grade, either in soil or encased in concrete in soil.
B. Concealed: Piping above suspended ceilings and within walls, partitions, shafts, or service spaces and spaces not normally exposed to view but not buried.
C. Exterior: Piping that is installed outside a building or within a pipe trench or tunnel.
Piping Insulation
15082-2 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15082 (DraftFinal) D. Flame Spread and Smoke Density: Burning characteristics determined in accordance with ASTM E84.
E. Interior: Piping that is installed inside a building.
F. K Factor: Thermal conductivity determined in accordance with ASTM C177 or C518.
G. Mineral Fiber: Fibers manufactured of glass, rock, or slag processed from a molten state, with or without a binder.
H. Water Vapor Permeance: Water vapor transmission determined in accordance with ASTM E96 and expressed in units of perm-inch.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit as specified in Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures.
B. Product data: As specified in Section15050 - Common Work Results for Mechanical Equipment.
1. Insulation properties: Include K factor, thickness, density, operating temperature limits, tensile strength, compressive strength, moisture absorption, flame spread, and smoke developed in accordance with ASTM E84 and corrosivity to stainless steel piping in accordance with ASTM C795.
2. Jacket properties: Include covering material, cover thickness, tensile strength, tear strength, permeability in accordance with ASTM E96, flame spread, and smoke developed in accordance with ASTM E84, closure type or devices, and accessories.
3. Insulating blankets: Include materials, performance characteristics, method of attaching to equipment, listing of locations where insulating blankets will be installed.
4. Manufacturer's application instructions: Include assembly and application drawings and detailed instructions.
1.05 WARRANTY
A. As specified in Section 01783 - Warranties and Bonds.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. As specified in the Agreement and Contract RFP in Volumes 1 and 2, with additional requirements in Section 15050 - Common Work Results for Mechanical Equipment and Section 15500 - Common Work Results for HVAC.
B. In accordance with California Energy Commission Title 24.
Piping Insulation
15082-3 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15082 (DraftFinal)
2.02 DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
A. As specified in Sections 15050 Common Work Results for Mechanical Equipment and 15500 - Common Work Results for HVAC.
B. Insulation thicknesses: Provide insulation thickness in inches in accordance with the following table. Insulation thickness shown is nominal. Manufacturing tolerance of 15 percent variation is permissible.
TABLE 1. Required Insulation Thicknesses
Required Insulation Thicknesses (inches)
Service Temperature Range
as Designated in Insulation
Schedule at End of this
Section
Nominal Pipe Diameters
1 inch
and Less
1.25 to
2 inches
2.5 to
4 inches
5 to
10 inches
Over
10 inches
Above 200 degrees Fahrenheit 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 3.5
100 to 200 degrees Fahrenheit 1.5 1.5 1.5 2.0 2.5
40 to 100 degrees Fahrenheit 0.5 1.0 1.0 1.5 2.0
Below 40 degrees Fahrenheit 1.0 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.0
Heat Traced Pipes 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.5 2.0
Aeration Air Pipes 0.5 0.5 1.0 1.0 1.0
2.03 PIPE INSULATION
A. Insulation types: Provide in accordance with the insulation types listed and scheduled.
B. Insulation, Type 1:
1. Insulation material: Closed cell elastomeric insulation.
2. Minimum temperature range: Minus 40 degrees Fahrenheit to plus 220 degrees Fahrenheit.
3. K factor at 75 degrees Fahrenheit: Not more than 0.27 BTU-inch/hour-square feet-degrees Fahrenheit.
4. Fire ratings:
a. Flame spread: 25 or less.
b. Smoke density: 50 or less for insulation thicknesses up to 1.5 inches.
5. Joints: Seal with manufacturer’s recommended contact adhesive to form continuous water barrier.
6. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a. Armacell, AP Armaflex.
b. Aeroflex USA Inc., Aerocel® AC.
C. Insulation, Type 2:
1. Insulation material: Preformed mineral fiberglass insulation made from glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin.
a. In accordance with ASTM C547, Class 1.
b. Provide with factory installed vapor barrier.
1) Material: White Kraft paper bound to aluminum foil in accordance with ASTM C1136, Type I.
Piping Insulation
15082-4 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15082 (DraftFinal) 2) Longitudinal lap seals: Pressure-sensitive, self-sealing longitudinal lap strip with factory applied adhesive.
3) Circumferential butt seals: 4-inch wide tape or similar properties or 4-inch wide overlap with adhesive seal.
4) Vapor barrier permeability: 0.02 perms or lower.
5) Vapor barrier flame spread rating: 25 or less.
2. Minimum temperature range: Minus 0 degrees Fahrenheit to plus 850 degrees Fahrenheit.
3. K factor at 75 degrees Fahrenheit: Not more than 0.23 BTU-inch/hour-square feet degrees Fahrenheit.
4. Maximum moisture absorption, volume percent: 5.
5. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a. Owens-Corning , Fiberglas™ FLEXWRAP® ASJ.
b. Johns Manville, Micro-Lok® HP.
c. Knauf Insulation, Earthwool® Redi-Klad® 1000° Pipe Insulation.
D. Insulation, Type 3:
1. Insulation material: Rigid cellular glass in accordance with ASTM C552, Type II.
2. Temperature range: Minus 450 degrees Fahrenheit to plus 900 degrees Fahrenheit.
3. K factor at 75 degrees Fahrenheit: Not more than 0.32 BTU-inch/hour-square feet-degrees Fahrenheit.
4. Minimum average density: 7.5 pounds per cubic foot.
5. Maximum moisture absorption, volume percent: 5.
6. Minimum compressive strength: 87 pounds per square inch.
7. Moisture permeability: 0.00 perm-inch.
8. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a. Owens- Corning, Foamglas® One™.
E. Insulation, Type 4:
1. Insulation material: Asbestos-free, rigid calcium silicate in accordance with ASTM C533; Type I for process temperatures up to 1,200 degrees Fahrenheit.
2. K factor at 500 degrees Fahrenheit: 0.55 for Type I.
3. Maximum average (dry) density: 14.5 pounds per cubic foot.
4. Compressive strength: 100 pounds per square inch, to produce a 5-percent compression.
5. Manufacturers: The following or equal: In accordance with ASTM C533 Type I:
a. Johns Manville, Thermo-12 Gold.
2.04 INSULATION JACKETS
A. Jacket, Type 1:
1. Material: 28 ounces per square yard polyvinyl chloride on polyester fabric; total thickness 0.028-inch minimum.
2. Fire rating: 25 maximum flame spread, smoke developed 50 or less.
3. Color: As selected by the Engineer from manufacturer's standard colors.
4. Overlap: 1-inch minimum at joints and fittings.
5. Joint seal: Self-sealing lap tape.
6. Fittings: Factory made with full thickness insulation.
Piping Insulation
15082-5 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15082 (DraftFinal)
7. Manufacturers: The following or equal:
a. Techlite® Insulation, 379 SSL Series.
B. Jacket, Type 2:
1. Material: Ultraviolet-resistant polyvinyl chloride jacketing, 20 mil minimum thickness.
2. Fire rating: 25 maximum flame spread, smoke developed 50 or less.
3. Color: White.
4. Overlap: 1-inch minimum at joints and fittings.
5. Joint seal: PVC solvent welded or adhesive as recommended by the manufacturer.
6. Fittings: Factory made with full thickness insulation.
7. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a. Johns Manville, Zeston® 2000 PVC.
b. Proto Corp., LoSMOKE PVC.
c. Speedline® Corp., Smoke-Safe™ PVC.
C. Jacket, Type 3:
1. Material: Aluminum, Alloy 3003 or 3105; 0.016-inch (26-gauge) minimum thickness.
2. Overlap: Overlap circumferential joints 4 inches minimum; overlap longitudinal joints 1-inch minimum; longitudinal joints oriented to minimize water entry.
3. Bands: 0.5-inch wide, 0.0508-inch (16-gauge) thick aluminum, same alloy as jacket or 0.0179-inch thick Type 304 stainless steel; install on 18-inch centers, uniformly spaced and at all fitting joints.
4. Joint seal: Apply waterproof adhesive at joints and overlaps.
5. Fittings: Custom fit of same materials.
6. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a. ECOIN Insulation.
b. Haomei Aluminum.
2.05 VAPOR BARRIERS
A. Vapor barrier, Type 1:
1. Material: White Kraft paper bound to aluminum foil in accordance with ASTM C1136, Type 1.
2. Permeability: 0.02 perms or lower.
3. Maximum flame spread rating: 25.
4. Edge seal: Pressure-sensitive tape lap seal.
5. Circumferential joints: 4-inch wide tape or 4-inch overlap with adhesive seal.
B. Vapor barrier, Type 2:
1. Material: Mastic.
2. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a. Benjamin Foster, No. 30-76.
b. Insul-Coustic, No. I.C.-580.
c. Foster Products, 36-10/46-10 Weatherite.
d. Childers Products CP10/11 VI-CRYL.
Piping Insulation
15082-6 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15082 (DraftFinal)
2.06 RELATED MATERIALS
A. Cover adhesive: Premium adhesive as recommended by the insulation cover supplier for heavy-duty service in corrosive, wet environments. Standard-duty adhesives are not permitted.
2.07 REMOVABLE INSULATING BLANKETS
A. In piping systems specified to be insulated, use removable insulating blankets for valves, meters, strainers, filters, catalytic converters, engine exhaust silencers, pumps, and other in-line piping appurtenances and equipment requiring periodic servicing, regardless of pipe size.
B. Size limits: Use removable insulating blankets for equipment and piping appurtenances 3 inches in nominal size and larger. For equipment and piping appurtenances less than 3 inches that do not require periodic servicing, insulate with molded sections of insulation or by field cutting insulation to conform to the shape of the component and to fit tightly around the component.
C. Manufacturers: One of the following, or equal:
1. Thermal Energy Products, Inc., Energy Wrap.
2. Accessible Products, Thermazip 2000 Jacket.
3. Owens Corning, Temp-Mat.
D. Low temperature insulating blankets rated up to 800 degrees Fahrenheit:
1. Use: For service temperatures up to 800 degrees Fahrenheit.
2. Insulation: Fiberglass fiber, K factor 0.27 at 75 degrees Fahrenheit.
3. Cover: 17-ounce fabric with both sides covered with silicone-impregnated glass cloth suitable for temperatures up to 800 degrees Fahrenheit.
4. Cover fasteners: Use one of the following systems:
a. Grommets in the blanket and stainless steel wire.
b. 1-inch wide straps with stainless steel rectangular ring buckles and Velcro on strap tail.
E. High temperature insulating blankets rated up to 1,400 degrees Fahrenheit:
1. Rated for sustained service temperatures up to 1,400 degrees Fahrenheit.
2. Insulation: Ceramic fiber, K factor 0.50 at 600 degrees Fahrenheit, insulation material suitable for up to 2,300 degrees Fahrenheit, thickness to match adjacent piping insulation specified thickness.
3. Cover: 17-ounce silicone impregnated fiberglass cloth suitable for temperatures up to 1,400 degrees Fahrenheit.
4. Cover fasteners: Use one of the following systems:
a. Grommets in the blanket and stainless steel wire.
b. 1-inch wide straps with stainless steel rectangular ring buckles and Velcro on strap tail.
2.08 SHIPPING, SPARE PARTS, MAINTENANCE PRODUCTS, AND SPECIAL TOOLS A. As specified in the Agreement and Contract RFP in Volumes 1 and 2.
Piping Insulation
15082-7 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15082 (DraftFinal) PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. As specified in the Agreement and Contract RFP in Volumes 1 and 2.
B. Handle and store insulation for use on stainless steel in accordance with ASTM C929.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Pressure test piping and complete application of coating system before applying insulation.
B. When piping is to be heat traced, install and functionally test heat tracing before installation of insulation.
C. Before beginning installation of piping insulation, verify that the Engineer has accepted piping tests, pipe coating applications, and heat tracing tests.
3.03 INSULATION SCHEDULE
A. Table 2. Insulation Schedule, does not include insulation required for plumbing systems. Plumbing systems insulation: As specified in Section 15400 - Plumbing Systems.
Table 2. Insulation Schedule
Service
Designation(1) Location(2)
Insulation
Type(3)
Jacket
Type(3)
Service
Temp. °F(4) Vapor Barrier
Hot Water Supply
and Return
(non-plumbing)
Interior or
Exterior 2 or 3 2 or 3 100 to 200 Required
Engine Jacket Water Interior 2 or 3 2 or 3 Above 200 Required Heat Traced Pipes(6) Exterior 1 or 2 2 N/A Install on Type 2 insulation
Notes:
(1) Refer to the Pipe Schedule in Section 15052 - Common Work Results for General Piping for service designations.
(2) Insulation jackets are not required for interior installations that are concealed. See definitions for description of concealed locations.
(3) Contractor may select from options listed.
(4) Unless noted otherwise, use service temperature range provided in this table to establish insulation thickness as required by Table 1. Required Insulation Thicknesses. (5) Service temperature based on engine rating. Use Type I calcium silicate for exhaust temperatures up to 1,200 degrees Fahrenheit; use Type II calcium silicate for exhaust temperatures above 1,200 degrees Fahrenheit.
(6) Insulate piping systems that are specified to be heat traced.
Piping Insulation
15082-8 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15082 (DraftFinal)
3.04 INSTALLATION
A. Install insulation and jacket materials in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Apply insulation in smooth, clean manner with tight and finished smooth joints. Fit insulation tightly against surfaces. Insulate each continuous run of pipe with full-length sections of insulation with a single piece cut to length to complete the run of pipe. Do not use cut pieces or scraps to complete the installation.
C. Butt longitudinal and circumferential insulation joints firmly together.
D. Maintain the integrity of vapor barrier jacketing. Do not use staples to hold vapor barrier overlaps in place.
E. Apply sealant or cement when previous applications of adhesives and cement have thoroughly dried.
F. Apply insulation to permit expansion or contraction of pipelines without damage to insulation or jacketing.
G. Fittings:
1. Insulate fittings by covering with mitered sections of insulation or utilize factory-made prefabricated fitting shapes.
2. Terminate preformed pipe jackets or covering at sufficient distance from flanges to permit removal of bolts.
3. Overlap flange and flanged fitting insulation on adjacent pipe covering by at least 2 inches.
H. Valves:
1. Insulate valves 3 inches in nominal size and larger with removable insulating blankets.
2. Size blanket to extend up to packing gland only so that replacement of packing does not require removal of insulating blanket.
I. Provide continuous insulation through and over pipe supports and provide protection saddles at supports.
J. Extend insulation against insulation end protection shields or covers so that insulation voids do not exist and provide watertight end seals and covers where insulation terminates.
K. Insulate pipeline strainers to permit removal of strainer basket without disturbing insulation on strainer body.
L. Provide continuous pipe insulation and covering through sleeves or openings in walls and floors. When buried pipe enters a building through a below grade wall or slab penetration, begin insulation system on interior side of penetration.
M. Apply pre-molded pipe insulation with extended legs when used on pipe traced with either tubing or electric cable type.
Piping Insulation
15082-9 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15082 (DraftFinal) N. Thermally isolate all insulation closure locations (end caps, transitions, etc.) Type 1 or 2 jacket installation on piping with potential reach temperatures greater than 150 degrees Fahrenheit.
O. Apply piping identification on jackets as specified in Section 15076 - Pipe Identification.
END OF SECTION
Common Work Results for Valves
15110-1 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15110 (DraftFinal) SECTION 15110
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR VALVES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes: Basic requirements for valves.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. American Water Works Association (AWWA):
1. C111/A21.11 - Standard for Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron Pressure Pipe Fittings.
B. ASTM International (ASTM):
1. A126 - Standard Specification for Gray Iron Casting for Valves, Flanges, and Pipe Fittings.
2. A480 - Standard Specification for General Requirements for Flat-Rolled Stainless and Heat-Resisting Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip.
3. A536 - Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings.
C. NSF International (NSF):
1. 61 - Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects.
D. Society for Protective Coatings (SSPC):
1. SP7 - Brush-Off Blast Cleaning.
2. SP10 - Near-White Blast Cleaning.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit as specified in Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures.
B. Product data:
1. Submit the following information for each valve:
a. Valve type, size, pressure rating, Cv factor.
b. Coatings.
c. Power valve actuators:
1) Information on valve actuator including size, manufacturer, model number, limit switches, mounting; and motor enclosure, seating and unseating torque coefficient, dynamic torque, and bearing friction for calculation of maximum operating torque.
2) Complete wiring diagrams and control system schematics. d. Manual valve actuators:
1) Information on valve actuator including size, manufacturer, model number.
e. Certified drawings with description of component parts, dimensions, weights, and materials of construction.
Common Work Results for Valves
15110-2 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15110 (DraftFinal) f. Certifications of reference standard compliance:
1) Submit certification that the valves and coatings are suitable in potable water applications in accordance with NSF 61.
g. Clearly mark submittal information to show specific items, materials, and accessories or options being furnished.
C. Provide vendor operation and maintenance manual as specified in Section 01782 - Operation and Maintenance Manuals.
1. Furnish bound sets of installation, operation, and maintenance instructions for each type of manual valve 4 inches in nominal size and larger, and all non-manual valves. Include information on valve operators.
D. Provide Manufacturer’s Certificate of Source Testing as specified in Section 01756 - Commissioning.
E. Provide Manufacturer’s Certificate of Installation and Functionality Compliance as specified in Section 01756 - Commissioning.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer qualifications:
1. Valves manufactured by manufacturers whose valves have had successful operational experience in comparable service.
1.05 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Protect valves and protective coatings from damage during handling and installation; repair coating where damaged.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
A. Pressure rating:
1. Suitable for service under minimum working pressures of 150 pounds per square inch gauge.
2. When a piping system is specified in the Piping Schedule to be tested at a pressure greater than 150 pounds per square inch gauge, provide valves for that piping system with design working pressure which is sufficient to withstand the test pressure.
B. Valve to piping connections:
1. Metallic valves:
a. Valves 3 inches nominal size and larger: Flanged ends. b. Valves less than 3 inches nominal size: Screwed ends.
Common Work Results for Valves
15110-3 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15110 (DraftFinal)
2. Plastic valves in plastic piping systems:
a. Up to 4 inches: Provide solvent or heat welded unions, except for plastic butterfly valves.
1) Plastic butterfly valves shall be flanged per Section 15112 - Butterfly Valves.
b. 6 inches and above: Provide solvent or heat-welded flanges.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Stainless steel: In accordance with ASTM A480, Type 316, or Type 304, UNS Alloy S31600 or S30400.
B. Valve and operator bolts and nuts (not including flange bolts and nuts, which are specified in Section 15052 - Common Work Results for General Piping):
1. Fabricated of stainless steel for the following installation conditions:
a. Submerged in sewage or water.
b. In an enclosed space above sewage or water.
c. In structures containing sewage or water, below top of walls. d. At openings in concrete or metal decks.
2. Where dissimilar metals are being bolted, use stainless steel bolts with isolation bushings and washers.
3. Underground bolts: Low-alloy steel in accordance with AWWA C111/A21.11.
C. Bronze and brass alloys: Use bronze and brass alloys with not more than 6 percent zinc and not more than 2 percent aluminum in the manufacture of valve parts; UNS Alloy C83600 or C92200 unless specified otherwise.
D. Cast iron valve bodies: In accordance with ASTM A126, Class 30 minimum.
E. Ductile iron valve bodies: In accordance with ASTM A536, Grade 65-45-12 minimum unless specified otherwise.
2.03 INTERIOR PROTECTIVE LINING
A. When specified in the particular valve specification, provide valves with type of protective lining specified in the particular valve Specification.
B. Apply protective lining to interior, non-working surfaces, except stainless steel surfaces.
C. Lining types:
1. Fusion bonded epoxy:
a. Manufacturers: The following or equal:
1) 3-M Company, ScotchKote 134; certified to NSF 61 for drinking water use.
b. Clean surfaces in accordance with SSPC SP 7 or SP 10, as recommended by epoxy manufacturer.
c. Apply in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions. d. Lining thickness: 0.010 to 0.012-inch, except that:
1) Lining thickness in grooves for gaskets: 0.005-inch. 2) Do not coat seat grooves in valves with bonded seat.
Common Work Results for Valves
15110-4 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15110 (DraftFinal) e. Quality control:
1) Lining thickness: Measured with a non-destructive magnetic type thickness gauge.
2) Verify lining integrity with a wet sponge-testing unit operating at approximately 60 volts, or as recommended by the lining manufacturer.
3) Consider tests successful when lining thickness meets specified requirements and when no pinholes are found.
4) Correct defective lining disclosed by unsuccessful tests, and repeat test.
5) Repair pinholes with liquid epoxy recommended by manufacturer of the epoxy used for lining.
2. High solids epoxy:
a. Product equivalent to high solids epoxy as specified in Section 09960 - High-Performance Coatings.
1) Certified in accordance with NSF 61 for drinking water use. 2) Interior: Coat valve interior with manufacturer's equivalent high performance high solids epoxy coating system with a certifiable performance history for the service conditions and as approved by the Engineer. Manufacturer shall provide for approval, coating information sufficient to allow Engineer to assess equivalence to the specified high solids epoxy as specified in Section 09960 - High-Performance Coatings.
b. Clean surfaces to meet SP-7 or SP-10, or as recommended by coating manufacturer.
c. Quality control: After coating is cured, check coated surface for porosity with a holiday detector set at 1,800 volts, or as recommended by coating manufacturer.
1) Repair holidays and other irregularities and retest coating. 2) Repeat procedure until holidays and other irregularities are corrected.
2.04 UNDERGROUND VALVES
A. Provide underground valves with flanged, mechanical, or other type of joint required for the type of pipe to which the valve is to be connected.
B. Coating and wrapping:
1. After installation, encase valves in polyethylene wrap as specified for ductile iron piping in Section 15211 - Ductile Iron Pipe: AWWA C151. a. Ascertain that polyethylene wrapping does not affect operation of valve.
2.05 STEAM VALVES
A. Valves in steam or steam condensate piping: Ductile iron body in accordance with ASTM A536, Grade 65-45-12 minimum or cast steel or forged steel.
2.06 VALVE BOXES
A. Provide cast-iron valve boxes at each buried valve to access valve and valve operators.
Common Work Results for Valves
15110-5 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15110 (DraftFinal) B. Do not support boxes on valve, valve operator, or pipe.
C. Boxes:
1. 2-piece, fabricated of cast iron; provide cover, with asphalt varnish or enamel protective coating.
2. Adjustable to grade, install centered around the upper portions of the valve and valve operator.
D. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1. Tyler Pipe Industries, Inc.
2. Neenah Foundry Co.
2.07 VALVE OPERATORS
A. Valve operator "Open" direction: Open counterclockwise.
B. Provide valves located below operating level or deck with extensions for key operation or floor stands and handwheels, as indicated on the Drawings.
C. Provide manually operated valves located not more than 6 feet above the operating level with tee handles, wrenches, or handwheels.
1. Make the valve operator more conveniently accessible by rolling valves, located more than 5 feet but less than 6 feet above the operating level, toward the operating side.
2. Secure tee handles and wrenches to the valve head or stem, except where a handle or wrench so secured constitutes a hazard to personnel; in which case, stow handle or wrench immediately adjacent to the valve on or in a suitable hanger, bracket, or receptacle.
D. Fit valves located more than 6 feet above operating level with chain operated handles or valve wheels.
1. Chains: Sufficient length to reach approximately 4 feet above the operating level.
2. Where chains constitute a nuisance or hazard to operating personnel, provide holdbacks or other means for keeping the chains out of the way.
E. Provide an operator shaft extension from valve or valve operator to finished grade or deck level when buried valves, and other valves located below the operating deck or level, are specified or indicated on the Drawings to be key operated; provide 2 inches square AWWA operating nut, and box and cover as specified, or a cover where a box is not required.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Preparation prior to installation:
1. Install valves after the required submittal on installation has been accepted.
2. Determine after flanged valves and flanged check valves are selected, the face-to-face dimensions of flanged valves and flanged check valves.
Common Work Results for Valves
15110-6 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15110 (DraftFinal) B. Fabricate piping to lengths taking into account the dimensions of flanged valves and flanged check valves.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Provide incidental work and materials necessary for installation of valves including flange gaskets, flange bolts and nuts, valve boxes and covers, concrete bases, blocking, and protective coating.
B. Where needed, furnish and install additional valves for proper operation and maintenance of equipment and plant facilities under the following circumstances:
1. Where such additional valves are required for operation and maintenance of the particular equipment furnished by Contractor.
2. Where such additional valves are required as a result of a substitution or change initiated by Contractor.
C. Valve and actuator orientation:
1. Contractor shall coordinate with valve supplier final orientation of valve and actuator assembly based on Contractor's selection of equipment manufacturers and the valve and piping arrangement as indicated on the Drawings.
a. Contractor shall rotate valve and/or actuator mounting orientation as specified in this Section unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings.
2. Install valves with their stems in vertical position above the pipe, except as follows:
a. Butterfly valves, gate valves aboveground, globe valves, ball valves, and angle valves may be installed with their stems in the horizontal position. b. Install buried plug valves with geared operators with their stems in a horizontal position.
3. Install valves so that handles clear obstructions when the valves are operated from fully open to fully closed.
D. Place top of valve boxes flush with finished grade or as otherwise indicated on the Drawings.
E. Valves with threaded connections:
1. Install valves by applying wrench on end of valve nearest the joint to prevent distortion of the valve body.
2. Apply pipe joint compound or Teflon™ tape on external (male) threads to prevent forcing compound into valve seat area.
F. Valves with flanged connections:
1. Align flanges and gasket carefully before tightening flange bolts.
2. When flanges are aligned, install bolts and hand tighten.
3. Tighten nuts opposite each other with equal tension before moving to next pair of nuts.
G. Valves with soldered connections:
1. Do not overheat connection to prevent damage to resilient seats and metal seat rings.
Common Work Results for Valves
15110-7 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15110 (DraftFinal)
2. Position valves in full open position before starting soldering procedure.
3. Apply heat to piping rather than to valve body.
3.03 FIELD APPLIED COATING OF VALVE EXTERIOR
A. Match color and be compatible with manufacturer’s coating system and as specified in Section 09960 - High-Performance Coatings.
1. When shop applied finish coating matches field applied coating on adjacent piping, touch up shop coating in damaged areas in accordance with instructions recommended by the paint manufacturer.
2. When shop applied coating does not match field coating on adjacent piping, or when damage has occurred to the shop applied coating that requires more than touchup, blast clean valve surfaces or utilize other surface preparation recommended by the manufacturer of the coating material and apply the coating system used for coating adjacent piping.
3.04 COMMISSIONING
A. As specified in Section 01756 - Commissioning and this Section.
B. Manufacturer services from each manufacturer for all valves supplied:
1. Provide Manufacturer’s Certificate of Source Testing.
2. Provide Manufacturer’s Certificate of Installation and Functionality Compliance.
C. As specified elsewhere for specific valve types, sizes or actuators.
1. Source testing.
2. Manufacturers on site services for Owner Training, Installation Testing, Functional Testing, and during the Process Operational Period.
END OF SECTION
Ball Valves
15111-1 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15111 (DraftFinal) SECTION 15111
BALL VALVES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes: Ball valves.
B. As specified in Section 15110 - Common Work Results for Valves.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME):
1. B16.1 - Gray Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: Classes 25, 125, and 250.
2. B16.5 - Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: NPS 1/2 through 24.
B. American Water Works Association (AWWA):
1. C507 - Standard for Ball Valves 6 Inch Through 48 Inch.
C. ASTM International (ASTM):
1. A48 - Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings.
2. A216 - Standard Specification for Steel Castings, Carbon, Suitable for Fusion Welding, for High-Temperature Service.
3. A351 - Standard Specification for Castings, Austenitic, for Pressure-Containing Parts.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit as specified in Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures.
B. Product data: As specified in Section 15110 - Common Work Results for Valves:
1. Metal body ball valves: 6 inches and larger only: Submit affidavit of compliance in accordance with AWWA C507.
2. Operation and maintenance manual.
C. Commissioning submittals:
1. Provide Manufacturer’s Certificate of Installation and Functionality Compliance as specified in Section 01756 - Commissioning.
1.04 WARRANTY
A. Provide warranty as specified in Section 01783 - Warranties and Bonds.
Ball Valves
15111-2 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15111 (DraftFinal) PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
A. General: Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings use:
1. Metal body ball valves on metallic pipelines.
2. Plastic body ball valves on plastic pipelines.
B. Do not use metal body ball valves in sodium hypochlorite or sodium bisulfite systems.
C. Metal body ball valves, less than 6-inch size:
1. Manufacturers: One of the following, or equal:
a. Conbraco Industries, Inc., Apollo Valves.
b. Flow-Tek, Inc.
c. Metso Automation/Jamesbury.
d. NIBCO, Inc.
2. General:
a. Type: Non-lubricated, full port and capable of sealing in either direction. b. End connections:
1) Threaded or solder ends for sizes 3-inch and smaller. 2) Class 150 flanged for sizes larger than 3 inches.
a) Flanges: In accordance with ASME B16.1 standards.
c. Stem packing: Manually adjustable while valve is under pressure. d. Shafts:
1) Rigidly connected to the ball by a positive means.
a) Design connection to transmit torque equivalent to at least 75 percent of the torsional strength of the shaft.
e. Handles: Stainless steel latch lock handle with vinyl grip and stainless steel nut designed to open and close the valve under operating conditions.
f. Temperature limits: Suitable for operation between minus 20 and 350 degrees Fahrenheit.
3. Materials:
a. Valves in copper lines: Bronze body.
b. Valves in steel and ductile iron piping: Ductile iron or cast steel body. c. Valves in stainless steel piping: Stainless steel body, material type to match piping material as specified in Section 15052 - Common Work Results for General Piping.
d. Ball: Type 304 or 316 stainless steel, Type 316 in digester gas applications.
e. Seats: PTFE.
f. Stem seals: PTFE or Viton™.
g. Bearings: Self-lubricated, corrosion resistant material that will not contaminate potable water.
h. Valves for combustible fluid applications (digester gas, natural gas, fuel oil, etc.) must be of fire safe design.
Ball Valves
15111-3 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15111 (DraftFinal)
4. Venting requirements:
a. Metal ball valves for hydrogen peroxide service:
1) Provide valve with factory drilled 0.125-inch hole in the upstream side of the ball.
2) Provide an engraved Type 316 stainless steel tag permanently attached to the valve stem stating, "One side of ball drilled for sodium hypochlorite service".
2.02 PLASTIC BODY BALL VALVES – FULL PORT (BAV40)
A. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1. Asahi America.
2. Chemtrol Division, NIBCO, Inc.
3. Georg Fischer Piping Systems.
4. Hayward Flow Control.
a. For sodium hypochlorite service, provide model TB-Z. Model TBH-Z shall not be used.
5. IPEX USA, LLC.
6. Plast-O-Matic Valves, Inc.
B. General:
1. Type: Non-lubricated and capable of sealing in either flow direction.
2. End connections:
a. 4 inches and smaller size: Socket end true unions for solvent welded connection to adjacent piping.
b. 6-inch size: Socket end true unions with attached flanges for flanged connection to adjacent piping.
3. All valves shall have integral ISO 5211 mounting pad for actuator installation.
4. All valves shall have integral plate for lock-out/tag-out.
5. Stem: Double o-ring seal with shear point above seal.
6. Pressure rating: Suitable for the test pressure and maximum temperature of the corresponding piping system listed in the Piping Schedule.
C. Materials:
1. Body and ball:
a. PVC piping systems: PVC.
b. CPVC piping systems: CPVC.
2. Seats: PTFE (Teflon™).
3. O-rings: FKM (Viton™).
D. Limit switches, when indicated on the Drawings:
1. Mechanical cam type with watertight enclosure and suited for remote indication of valve open-close status.
2. Mount on valve actuator.
3. Contacts: 120-volt alternating current, 20 amperes at 75 to 100 percent power factor and 24-volt direct current, 5 amperes minimum.
E. Valve actuator:
1. Valves shall be quarter turn operated with valve seat adjustability.
Ball Valves
15111-4 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15111 (DraftFinal)
2. Manually operated valves: Lever.
3. Electric motor operated valves, when indicated on the Drawings: Provide electric motor operator as specified in Section 13447 - Electric Actuators.
F. Venting requirements:
1. PVC and CPVC ball valves for hypochlorite service:
a. Provide valve with factory drilled 0.125-inch hole in the upstream side of the ball.
b. Provide an engraved plastic tag permanently attached to the valve stem stating, "One side of ball drilled for hypochlorite service". c. Provide an arrow inscribed on the valve body to indicate direction of flow.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install each type of valve in accordance with manufacturers' printed instructions.
3.02 COMMISSIONING
A. As specified in Section 01756 - Commissioning and this Section.
B. Manufacturer services:
1. Provide certificates:
a. Manufacturer's Certificate of Installation and Functionality Compliance.
C. Functional testing:
1. Valves:
a. Test witnessing: Witnessed.
b. Conduct pressure and leak test, as specified in Section 15956 - Piping Systems Testing.
END OF SECTION
Butterfly Valves
15112-1 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15112 (DraftFinal) SECTION 15112
BUTTERFLY VALVES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
1. Butterfly valves:
a. As specified in Section 15110 - Common Work Results for Valves.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME):
1. B16.1 - Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings, Classes 25, 125, and 250.
2. B16.5 - Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings, NPS 1/2 through NPS 24.
B. American Water Works Association (AWWA):
1. C110 - Standard for Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Fittings.
2. C504 - Rubber-Seated Butterfly Valves.
3. C540 - Standard for Power-Actuating Devices for Valves and Sluice Gates.
4. C550 - Protective Interior Coatings for Valves and Hydrants.
5. C606 - Standard for Grooved and Shouldered Joints.
C. ASTM International (ASTM):
1. A126 - Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges, and Pipe Fittings.
2. A216 - Standard Specification for Steel Castings, Carbon, Suitable for Fusion Welding, for Higher-Temperature Service.
3. A276 - Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes.
4. A351 - Standard Specification for Castings, Austenitic, for Pressure-Containing Parts.
5. A395 - Standard Specification for Ferritic Ductile Iron Pressure-Retaining Castings for Use at Elevated Temperatures.
6. A479 - Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes for Use in Boilers and Other Pressure Vessels.
7. A515 - Standard Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon Steel, for Intermediate - and Higher-Temperature Service.
8. A516 - Standard Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon Steel, for Moderate - and Lower-Temperature Service.
9. A536 - Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings.
10. A564 - Standard Specification for Hot-Rolled and Cold-Finished Age-Hardening Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes.
11. A582 - Standard Specification for Free-Machining Stainless Steel Bars.
12. A743 - Standard Specification for Castings, Iron-Chromium, Iron-Chromium-Nickel, Corrosion Resistant, for General Application.
Butterfly Valves
15112-2 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15112 (DraftFinal)
13. A890 - Standard Specification for Castings, Iron-Chromium-Nickel-Molybdenum Corrosion-Resistant, Duplex (Austenitic/Ferritic) for General Application.
14. B462 - Standard Specification for Forged or Rolled UNS N06030, UNS N06022, UNS N06035, UNS N06200, UNS N06059, UNS N10362, UNS N06686, UNS N08020, UNS N08024, UNS N08026, UNS N08367, UNS N10276, UNS N10665, UNS N10675, UNS N10629, UNS N08031, UNS N06045, UNS N06025, UNS R20033 Alloy Pipe Flanges, Forged Fittings, and Valves and Parts for Corrosive High-Temperature Service.
15. B584 - Standard Specification for Copper Alloy Sand Castings for General Applications.
16. B691 - Standard Specification for Iron-Nickel-Chromium-Molybdenum Alloys (UNS N08366 and UNS N08367) Rod, Bar, and Wire.
17. D429 - Standard Test Methods for Rubber Property-Adhesion to Rigid Substrate.
D. Compressed Gas Association (CGA):
1. Standard G-4.1 - Cleaning Equipment for Oxygen Service.
E. NSF International (NSF):
1. Standard 61 - Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects.
F. United States Code of Federal Regulations (CFR):
1. 21 - Food and Drugs.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit as specified in Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures.
B. Product data: As specified in Section 15110 - Common Work Results for Valves.
1. For general purpose AWWA butterfly valves, include description of the method of attachment of the disc edge to the valve disc.
2. Interior epoxy coatings: Affidavit of compliance attesting that epoxy coatings applied to interior surfaces of butterfly valves comply with all provisions in accordance with AWWA C550.
3. Certification, for valves and coatings in contact with potable water, that the products used are suitable for contact with drinking water in accordance with NSF Standard 61.
C. Commissioning Submittals:
1. Provide Manufacturer’s Certificate of Installation and Functionality Compliance as specified in Section 01756 - Commissioning.
1.04 WARRANTY
A. Provide warranty as specified in Section 01783 - Warranties and Bonds.
Butterfly Valves
15112-3 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15112 (DraftFinal) PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
A. Design requirements:
1. Valve pressure rating shall be greater than or equal to the piping system test pressure specified in the Piping Schedule at the maximum service temperature.
2. General purpose AWWA butterfly valves:
a. Design standard: Provide valves designed and manufactured in accordance with AWWA C504.
b. Class:
1) Provide butterfly valves in accordance with AWWA Class 150B, unless otherwise specified.
2) Provide butterfly valves in accordance with AWWA Class 250B in piping systems with test pressure greater than 150 pounds per square inch gauge and less than 250 pounds per square inch gauge.
3. High pressure butterfly valves.
4. Piping systems designed for test pressures greater than 250 pounds per square inch gauge and less than 450 pounds per square inch gauge: Provide ASME B16.5, Class 300 flanged high pressure valves.
5. Industrial class butterfly valves:
a. Industrial class butterfly valves capable of 150 pounds per square inch gauge leak tight shut off.
6. Stainless steel butterfly valves:
a. Stainless steel butterfly valves capable of a minimum of 100 pounds per square inch gauge leak tight shut off and with special cleaning, packaging, and handling.
B. Usage:
1. Provide and install butterfly valve types as outlined in the Butterfly Valve Application Schedule at the end of this Section.
C. Design requirements for butterfly valves with power actuating devices:
1. Design valves and actuators for maximum operating torque, in accordance with and using safety factors required in AWWA C540, using the following values:
a. Maximum water velocity: 16 feet per second with valve fully open. b. Maximum pressure differential across the closed valve equal to the pressure class designation.
c. Coefficient for seating and unseating torque, dynamic torque, and bearing friction in accordance with valve manufacturer's published recommendations.
2. Valve disc: Seat in an angular position of 90 degrees to the pipe axis and rotate an angle of 90 degrees between fully open and fully closed positions:
a. Do not supply valves with stops or lugs cast with or mechanically secured to the body of the valve for limiting the disc travel.
3. Unacceptable thrust bearings: Do not provide valves with thrust bearings exposed to the fluid in the line and consisting of a metal bearing surface in rubbing contact with an opposing metal bearing surface.
Butterfly Valves
15112-4 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15112 (DraftFinal) D. Performance requirements:
1. Tight shutoff at the pressure rating of the valve with pressure applied in either direction.
2. Suitable for the following service conditions:
a. Throttling.
b. Frequent operation.
c. Operation after long periods of inactivity.
d. Installation in any position and flow in either direction.
2.02 GENERAL PURPOSE AWWA BUTTERFLY VALVES (BFV00)
A. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1. DeZURIK/Sartell Model BAW.
2. Mueller/Pratt Co.
B. Valve body:
1. Material: Cast iron, ASTM A126, Grade B, or ductile iron, ASTM A536, Grade 65-45-12.
2. Body design:
a. Flanged body valves:
1) Usage: Comply with limitations specified in the Butterfly Valve Application Schedule.
2) Flanges: In accordance with ASME B16.1 Class 125 flanges for Class 150B valves, in accordance with ASME B16.1 Class 250 flanges for Class 250B valves.
C. Disc:
1. Material: Cast iron or ductile iron with Type 316 stainless steel edge that matches seat in valve body.
2. Secure valve disc to shaft by means of smooth-sided, taper or dowel pins, Type 316 stainless steel, or Monel.
3. Extend pins through shaft and mechanically secure in place.
D. Shaft and bearings:
1. Shaft design:
a. Valves 20-inches and less: 1-piece, through disc design. b. Valves greater than 20-inch size: 2-piece, stub shaft design.
2. Shaft seal: Vee type, chevron design.
3. Shaft material for Class 150B valves: Type 316 stainless steel, ASTM A276.
4. Shaft material for Class 250B valves: Type 17-4 pH stainless steel, ASTM A564.
5. Shaft bearings: Self-lubricating sleeve type:
a. Valves 20 inches and less: Nylatron.
b. Valves greater than 20-inch size: Teflon™ with stainless steel or fiberglass backing.
E. Seats:
1. Seat materials:
a. Match gasket material that is specified in the Piping Schedule for the specific piping system.
b. Low-pressure air applications: EPDM.
Butterfly Valves
15112-5 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15112 (DraftFinal) c. In all other applications: EPDM.
2. For valves 20 inches in nominal size and smaller, bond or vulcanize seat into the valve body.
3. For valves 24 inches in nominal size and larger, retain seats mechanically or by adhesive:
a. Mechanical retainage: Retain seat by a clamping ring with segmented clamping ring locks with adjusting locking screws.
1) Clamping ring, ring locks, and adjusting locking screws: Type 316 stainless steel.
2) Provide means to prevent ring locks and screws used to retain seats from loosening due to vibration or cavitation.
b. Adhesive retainage: Inset the seat within a groove in the valve body and retain in place with epoxy injected behind the seat so that the seat expands into the body.
c. Do not provide valves with seats retained by snap rings or spring-loaded retainer rings.
4. Resilient seat: Withstand 75 pounds per inch pull when tested in accordance with ASTM D429, Method B.
F. Valve packing:
1. Valves 4 to 48 inches nominal size: Self-adjusting V-type packing or chevrontype packing. NBR or EPDM to match seat material.
2. Valves 54 inches nominal size and larger: Adjustable V-type packing with bronze packing gland or self-adjusting V-type packing. NBR or EPDM to match seat material.
2.03 BUTTERFLY VALVE ACTUATORS
A. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1. Motorized actuators are specified in Section 13447.
2.04 COATING REQUIREMENTS FOR METAL VALVES
A. Shop coat interior and exterior metal surfaces of valves, except as follows:
1. Interior machined surfaces.
2. Surfaces of gaskets and elastomeric seats and stem seals.
3. Bearing surfaces.
4. Stainless steel surfaces and components.
B. Coating material for components in contact with potable water applications:
1. Formulate interior coating material from materials in accordance with CFR 21, AWWA C550, and NSF 61.
2. Submit affidavit of compliance attesting that epoxy coatings applied to interior surfaces of butterfly valves in accordance with CFR 21, AWWA C550, and NSF 61.
C. Interior surfaces:
1. Interior surfaces, except for valves used in low-pressure air service: High solids epoxy.
2. Interior surfaces of valves used in low-pressure air service: High temperature coating for range of 150 to 350 degrees Fahrenheit.
Butterfly Valves
15112-6 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15112 (DraftFinal) D. Exterior surfaces:
1. Exterior surfaces of valves, actuators, and accessories coating as specified in Section 09960 - High-Performance Coatings, Attachment A - Coating Schedule for the following conditions:
a. Submerged valves: High solids epoxy.
b. Buried valves: Coal tar epoxy.
c. Other valves: High solids epoxy with polyurethane topcoat.
2. Coating product in contact with potable water must be in accordance with AWWA C550 and NSF 61.
3. High temperature coating: As specified in Section 09960 - High-Performance Coatings and in accordance with AWWA C550.
4. Polished and machined surfaces: Apply rust-preventive compound:
a. Houghton, Rust Veto 344.
b. Rust-Oleum, R-9.
E. Field applied coatings of valve exterior:
1. Match color and be compatible with manufacturer’s coating system and as specified in Section 09960 - High-Performance Coatings. a. When shop applied finish coating matches field applied coating on adjacent piping, touch up shop coating in damaged areas in accordance with instructions recommended by the paint manufacturer. b. When shop applied coating does not match field coating on adjacent piping, or when damage has occurred to the shop applied coating that requires more than touchup, blast clean valve surfaces or utilize other surface preparation recommended by the manufacturer of the coating material and apply the coating system used for coating adjacent piping.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install valves with valve shafts horizontal, unless a vertical shaft is required to suit a particular installation, and unless a vertical shaft is indicated on the Drawings.
B. Install pipe spools or valve spacers in locations where butterfly valve disc travel may be impaired by adjacent pipe lining, pipe fittings, valves, or other equipment.
3.02 COMMISSIONING
A. As specified in Section 01756 - Commissioning, and this Section.
B. Manufacturer services:
1. Provide certificates:
a. Manufacturer’s Certificate of Installation and Functionality Compliance.
C. Functional Testing:
1. Valves:
a. Test witnessing: Witnessed.
b. Conduct pressure and leak test, as specified in Section 15110 - Common Work Results for Valves.
Butterfly Valves
15112-7 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15112 (DraftFinal) D. Manufacturer services from each supplier for all motor operated butterfly valve assemblies supplied:
1. As specified in Section 15110 - Common Work Results for Valves.
2. On site services.
Manufacturer Rep Onsite
Training Requirements Installation Testing Functional Testing Maintenance
(hours per
session)
Operation
(hours per
session) Trips
Days
(each trip) Trips
Days
(each trip)
0.5 0.5 1 1 1 1
3.03 BUTTERFLY VALVE APPLICATION SCHEDULE
A. Acceptable butterfly valve types and body styles are listed in the Butterfly Valve Application Schedule. Furnish and install butterfly valves in accordance with this Schedule.
Butterfly Valve Application Schedule
Valve Type and Style Acceptable Applications
General Purpose AWWA Butterfly
Valves - Flanged Body Design
Aboveground or submerged in the following service
applications only:
• Acceptable in all service applications except oxygen
and ozone service and high-pressure service.
• May be used in buried applications when required by
the specified piping system.
END OF SECTION
Check Valves
15114-1 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15114 (DraftFinal) SECTION 15114
CHECK VALVES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
1. Swing check valves:
a. General swing check valves.
2. Ball check valves:
a. Plastic ball check valves.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME):
1. B16.1 - Gray Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: Classes 25, 125, and 250.
B. American Water Works Association (AWWA):
1. C508 - Standard for Swing-Check Valves for Waterworks Service 2 Inch Through 24 Inch NPS.
C. ASTM International (ASTM):
1. A126 - Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges, and Pipe Fittings.
2. A213 - Standard Specification for Seamless Ferritic and Austenitic Alloy-Steel Boiler, Superheater, and Heat-Exchanger Tubes.
3. A276 - Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes.
4. A313 - Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Spring Wire.
5. A536 - Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings.
6. A582 - Standard Specification for Free-Machining Stainless Steel Bars.
7. A743 - Standard Specification for Castings, Iron-Chromium, Iron-Chromium-Nickel, Corrosion Resistant, for General Application.
8. B16 - Standard Specification for Free-Cutting Brass Rod, Bar and Shapes for Use in Screw Machines.
9. B61 - Standard Specification for Steam or Valve Bronze Casting.
10. B62 - Standard Specification for Composition Bronze or Q=Ounce Metal Castings.
11. B584 - Standard Specification for Copper Alloy Sand Castings for General Applications.
D. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA).
E. NSF International (NSF):
1. 61 - Drinking Water Components Health Effects.
2. 372 - Drinking Water System Components - Lead Content.
F. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL).
Check Valves
15114-2 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15114 (DraftFinal)
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish Submittals as specified in Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures.
B. Product data:
1. As specified in the Agreement and Contract RFP in Volumes 1 and 2, and Section 15110 - Common Work Results for Valves.
C. Quality control submittals:
1. Provide Manufacturer’s Certificate of Installation Verification and Functionality Compliance as specified in Section 01756 - Commissioning.
1.04 WARRANTY
A. As specified in Section 01783 - Warranties and Bonds.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. As specified in the Agreement and Contract RFP in Volumes 1 and 2, and Section 15110 - Common Work Results for Valves.
B. When not otherwise specified as indicated on the Drawings, provide check valves suitable for service:
1. In either horizontal or vertical position.
2. For working pressures up to 150 pounds per square inch.
C. Check valve materials as follows unless otherwise specified.
1. Cast iron in accordance with ASTM A126, Grade B.
2. Ductile iron in accordance with ASTM A536, Grade 65-45-12.
3. Type 303 stainless steel in accordance with ASTM A582 (UNS S30300).
4. Type316 stainless steel, in accordance with ASTM A313.
D. Flanges: Drilled in accordance with ASME B16.1 Class 125/150, unless otherwise specified or indicated on the Drawings.
2.02 GENERAL SWING CHECK VALVES (CKV00)
A. Valves 1/4 inch through 3 inches:
1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a. Crane Valve Co., Number 36.
b. Lunkenheimer Co., Figure 554Y.
2. Design:
a. Y-pattern body with integral seat.
b. Female threaded ends.
c. Renewable hinged disc.
d. Threaded cap for access to valve seat without disassembly of piping. e. Integral seats suitable for regrinding.
Check Valves
15114-3 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15114 (DraftFinal)
3. Materials:
a. Body: Bronze in accordance with ASTM B62-83600.
b. Disc: Bronze in accordance with ASTM B62 C92200.
1) On valves less than 1-inch: Brass in accordance with ASTM B16. c. Hinge: Bronze in accordance with ASTM B584 C 87600.
d. Lock nut and hinge pin plug: Brass in accordance with ASTM B16 HO2. e. Hinge pin: Stainless steel in accordance with ASTM A276. f. Cap: Bronze in accordance with ASTM B61 C92200.
g. If used for steam service:
1) Body and disc: S1 steam bronze in accordance with ASTM B61.
B. Valves 4 inches through 24 inches:
1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a. APCO Model 250.
b. Crispin SWL Series.
c. Kennedy, Figure 106LW or M&H, Model 159.
d. Mueller Co., Model A-2600.
2. Design:
a. In accordance with AWWA C508.
b. Constructed to permit top entry and removal of internal components without removing the valve.
c. Equipped with outside lever and weight.
3. Materials:
a. Body: Cast iron, ASTM A126, Class B, or ASTM A536, Grade 65-45-12 ductile iron.
b. Disc:
1) Valve disc shall be ASTM A126 cast iron, ASTM A536 ductile iron, or ASTM B584 bronze.
2) 4-inch valves: Bronze or stainless steel rings and seats. 3) 6 inches and larger valves: Bronze-faced or stainless steel rings and seats.
4) Rubber seat Buna-N or EPDM.
c. Hinge pins: Stainless steel.
2.03 PLASTIC BALL CHECK VALVES (CKV65)
A. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1. Georg Fischer Piping Systems.
2. Plast-O-Matic Valves, Inc.
3. Hayward Flow Control.
4. Nibco, Chemtrol Series.
B. Design:
1. Ball type design.
2. Materials: As specified in the Check Valve Schedule.
3. Inlet pressure rating:
a. PVC, CPVC, or PVDF: 150 pounds per square inch at 77 degrees Fahrenheit.
b. PP: 100 pounds per square inch at 77 degrees Fahrenheit.
Check Valves
15114-4 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15114 (DraftFinal)
2.04 INTERIOR PROTECTIVE LININGS
A. As shown in the valve schedules and as specified in Section 15110 - Common Work Results for Valves.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 COMMISSIONING
A. As specified in Section 01756 - Commissioning and this Section.
3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Manufacturer services:
1. Provide the Manufacturer’s Certificate of Installation Verification.
B. Functional Testing:
1. Valves:
a. Test witnessing: Witnessed.
2. Conduct pressure and leak test, as specified in Section 15956 - Piping Systems Testing.
END OF SECTION
Gate, Globe, and Angle Valves
15115-1 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15115 (DraftFinal) SECTION 15115
GATE, GLOBE, AND ANGLE VALVES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
1. Gate, globe, angle, plug disc and plain hose valves, and yard hydrants.
2. As specified in Section 15110 - Common Work Results for Valves.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME):
1. B16.5 - Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: NPS 1/2 through NPS 24, Metric/Inch Standard.
2. B16.47 - Large Diameter Steel Flanges: NPS 26 through NPS 60, Metric/Inch Standard.
3. B36 - Stainless Steel Pipe.
B. American Water Works Association (AWWA):
1. C515 - Standard for Reduced-Wall, Resilient-Seated Gate Valves for Water Supply Services.
2. C550 - Protective Interior Coatings for Valves and Hydrants.
C. ASTM International (ASTM):
1. B98 - Standard Specification for Copper-Silicon Alloy Rod, Bar, and Shapes.
D. Manufacturers Standardization Society (MSS) of the Valve and Fittings Industry:
1. SP-81 - Stainless-Steel or Stainless-Steel-Lined, Bonnetless, Knife Gate Valves with Flanged Ends.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit as specified in Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures.
B. Product data:
1. As specified in Section 15110 - Common Work Results for Valves.
C. Commissioning Submittals:
1. For valves larger than 16 inches:
a. Provide Manufacturer’s Certificate of Installation and Functionality Compliance as specified in Section 01756 - Commissioning.
Gate, Globe, and Angle Valves
15115-2 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15115 (DraftFinal)
1.04 WARRANTY
A. As specified in Section 01783 - Warranties and Bonds.
B. Interior epoxy coatings: Affidavit of compliance attesting that epoxy coatings applied to interior surfaces of valves comply in accordance with all provisions of AWWA C550.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 GATE VALVES - GENERAL SERVICE (GV00)
A. Aboveground:
1. Valves less than 3 inches in size for clean water and air service:
a. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1) Crane, Figure 431.
2) Jenkins, Figure 47.
3) Lunkenheimer Co., Figure 2151.
b. Design:
1) Size and configuration: Indicated on the Drawings.
2) Manufacturer’s standard bronze, solid wedge disc, rising stem, screwed end, Class 150 pounds.
2. Valves 3 inches in size and larger, single disk.
a. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1) American Flow Control, Series 2500.
2) M&H/Kennedy Valve Co.
3) Mueller.
b. Design:
1) Size, material, configuration: Indicated on the Drawings. 2) Resilient wedge type in accordance with AWWA C515.
3) Flange, iron body, and bonnet rated for 200 pound working pressure. a) Provide O-ring seal between valve body and bonnet.
4) Ductile or cast iron wedge encapsulated in nitrile rubber and capable of sealing in either flow direction.
5) Bronze stem with double or triple O-ring or braided packing stem seals.
6) Rising stem configuration with handwheel diameter sized to allow opening of valve with no more than a 40-pound pull.
7) Coat interior and exterior surfaces of valve body and bonnet with fusion-bonded epoxy in accordance with AWWA C550.
3. Valves 3 inches in size and larger, double disc:
a. Flanged.
b. Materials:
1) 200 pound iron body.
2) Bronze mounted.
c. Configuration:
1) Outside screw and yoke (OS&Y).
2) Stems of silicon bronze in accordance with ASTM B98, Alloy No. C66100.
Gate, Globe, and Angle Valves
15115-3 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15115 (DraftFinal) d. Inside configuration:
1) Double disc; parallel seat.
2) Handwheel.
e. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1) M&H Valve Co., Figure 68-02.
f. Design:
1) Size, material, configuration: Indicated on the Drawings.
B. Underground:
1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a. American Flow Control.
b. M&H/Kennedy Valve Co.
c. Mueller Co.
2. Design:
a. Size, material, configuration: Indicated on the Drawings. b. Resilient wedge type in accordance with AWWA C515.
c. Stem:
1) Iron body, resilient seat, non-rising stem, double O-ring stem seal. 2) Rising stem configuration with handwheel diameter sized to allow opening of valve with no more than a 40-pound pull.
d. Ductile or cast iron wedge encapsulated in nitrile rubber and capable of sealing in either flow direction.
e. Bronze stem with double or triple O-ring or braided packing stem seals. f. Coat interior and exterior surfaces of valve body and bonnet with fusion-bonded epoxy in accordance with AWWA C550.
g. Valve operator: Provide standard AWWA 2-inch operating nut, matching valve key, and valve box for operating stem.
2.02 GATE VALVES - STEAM AND CONDENSATE SERVICE (GV20)
A. Valves 3 inches and smaller in size:
1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a. Crane, No. 428.
b. Jenkins, Figure 47U.
c. Lunkenheimer Co., Figure 2127.
2. Design:
a. Size and configuration: Indicated on the Drawings.
b. Bronze, screwed, rising stem, solid wedge, screwed bonnet, suitable for service under pressures equal to and less than 125 pounds per square inch gauge, steam working pressure (SWP).
B. Valves larger than 3 inches in size:
1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a. Crane No. 465-1/2.
b. Jenkins, Figure 651C.
c. Lunkenheimer Co., Figure 1430.
2. Design:
a. Size and configuration: Indicated on the Drawings.
Gate, Globe, and Angle Valves
15115-4 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15115 (DraftFinal) b. Suitable for service under pressures equal to and less than 125 pounds per square inch gauge, steam working pressure (SWP), flanged, iron body, bronze mounted, solid wedge, outside screw and yoke (OS&Y).
3. Size and configuration: Indicated on the Drawings.
2.03 GLOBE VALVES - NON-PILOT-CONTROLLED AND ANGLE VALVES (BLV00 AND GLV20)
A. General purpose globe and angle valves:
1. Valves 3 inches and smaller:
a. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1) Except in welded steel piping:
a) Crane, No. 1 Globe or No. 2 Angle.
b) Lunkenheimer Co. Figure No. 2140 Globe or No. 2141 Angle. 2) In welded steel piping:
a) Crane, No. 351.
b) Lunkenheimer Co., Figure No. 1123; or equal with flanged ends. b. Design:
1) Size and configuration: Indicated on the Drawings.
2) Valve: Class 125 threaded ends, rated for 250 degrees Fahrenheit at pressure of 170 pounds per square inch.
2. Valves larger than 3 inches:
a. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1) Crane, No. 351.
2) Lunkenheimer Co., Figure No. 1123.
b. Design:
1) Size and configuration: Indicated on the Drawings.
B. Plug disc globe valves: type for throttling or severe service:
1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a. Crane, No. 212P or No. 384P.
b. Lunkenheimer Co., 72-PS or 73-PS1.
2. Design:
a. Size and configuration: Indicated on the Drawings.
1) Material: Iron body stainless steel trimmed plug type seat and disc.
C. Hose valves:
1. Manufacturers:
a. Globe threaded valve: One of the following or equal:
1) Crane, No. 7TF.
2) Stockham, Figure No. B22T.
b. Angle threaded valve: One of the following or equal:
1) Crane, No. 17TF.
2) Stockham, Figure No. B222T.
2. Design:
a. Size and configuration: Indicated on the Drawings.
b. Valve: Globe or angle valve with threaded ends.
c. Disc: Renewable, made of Teflon™ or Buna-N.
d. Threaded ends rated for a pressure of 200 pounds per square inch.
Gate, Globe, and Angle Valves
15115-5 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15115 (DraftFinal) D. Yard hydrants:
1. Freezeless yard hydrant:
a. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1) Kupferle Foundry Co.
a) #1 Total Eclipse Yard Hydrant - 3/4 inch and 1 inch. 2) Murdock Company:
a) #M-75 - 3/4 inch or #M100 - 1 inch.
3) Zurn Company:
a) #1385 - 3/4 inch or 1 inch.
b. Design:
1) Self-draining, non-freezing, compression type.
a) Inlet connection size: Indicated on the Drawings.
b) Outlet connection size: Indicated on the Drawings.
c) Materials:
(1) Exterior casing pipe material: Indicated on the Drawings. (2) Interior operating rod material: Indicated on the Drawings. (3) Casing guard material: Indicated on the Drawings.
(4) Principal interior operating parts material: Brass and/or bronze and removable from yard hydrant for servicing
without excavation.
d) Provide 4 spoke, ball wheel handle operated.
2. Freezeless post hydrants (HYD01):
a. Manufacturers: The following or equal:
1) Kupferle Foundry Co.:
a) #2 Eclipse Post Hydrant.
2) Mueller Co.:
a) #A-411 Post Hydrant.
3) Murdock Co.:
a) #M-200 Post Hydrant.
b. Design:
1) Self-draining, non-freezing, compression type with a 2-3/16-inch valve opening.
2) Inlet connection size: Indicated on the Drawings.
3) Outlet connection size: Indicated on the Drawings.
4) Materials:
a) Exterior casing pipe material: Indicated on the Drawings. b) Interior operating rod material: Indicated on the Drawings. c) Top stock material: Indicated on the Drawings.
d) Principal interior operating parts material: Brass and/or bronze and removable from hydrant for servicing without excavation. 5) Provide 1-1/2-inch pentagon operating nut operated by a hydrant wrench or 10-inch handwheel:
a) Manufacturers: The following or equal:
(1) Kupferle Foundry Co.
2.04 NEEDLE VALVES (NV00)
A. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1. Crane No. 88 or No. 89.
Gate, Globe, and Angle Valves
15115-6 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15115 (DraftFinal)
2. Lunkenheimer Co., Figure No. 906-BS or No. 907-BS.
3. Powell, Figure No. 180.
B. Design:
1. Size and configuration: Indicated on the Drawings.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Mount yard hydrants on minimum 1-inch supply pipe or size indicated on the Drawings.
B. Mount post hydrants on minimum 2-inch supply pipe or size indicated on the Drawings.
C. Set yard and post hydrants in 4 cubic feet of 3/4 inch minimum crushed stone surrounding valve body to allow for proper drainage.
1. Install in accordance with AWWA recommendations for hydrants.
3.02 COMMISSIONING
A. As specified in Section 01756 - Commissioning and this Section.
B. Manufacturer services: For valves larger than 16 inches.
1. Provide certificates:
a. Manufacturer’s Certificate of Installation and Functionality Compliance.
C. Functional Testing:
1. Valves:
a. Test witnessing: Witnessed.
b. Conduct pressure and leak test as specified in Section 15110 - Common Work Results for Valves.
END OF SECTION
Specialty Valves
15117-1 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15117 (DraftFinal) SECTION 15117
SPECIALTY VALVES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes: Specialty valves.
B. As specified in Section 15110 - Common Work Results for Valves.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE):
1. 25 - Earthquake-Actuated Automatic Gas Shutoff Devices.
B. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME):
1. B16.42 - Ductile Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: Classes 150 and 300.
C. American Water Works Association (AWWA):
1. C511 - Standard for Reduced Pressure-Principle Backflow-Prevention Assembly.
2. C800 - Underground Service Line Valves and Fittings (Also Included:
Collected Standards For Service Line Materials).
D. ASTM International (ASTM):
1. A48 - Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings.
2. A126 - Standard Specification for Gray Iron Casting for Valves, Flanges, and Pipe Fittings.
3. A276 - Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes.
4. A536 - Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings.
5. B584 - Standard Specification for Copper Alloy Sand Castings for General Application.
6. D2000 - Standard Classification System for Rubber Products in Automotive Applications.
E. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):
1. 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 V Maximum).
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. NEMA Type 4 enclosure in accordance with NEMA 250.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit as specified in Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures.
B. Product data: As specified in Section 15110 - Common Work Results for Valves.
Specialty Valves
15117-2 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15117 (DraftFinal) C. Commissioning submittals:
1. Backflow preventer certification.
2. Provide Manufacturer’s Certificate of Installation and Functionality Compliance as specified in Section 01756 - Commissioning.
1.05 WARRANTY
A. Provide warranty as specified in Section 01783 - Warranties and Bonds.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS
A. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1. Febco backflow prevention:
a. Model LF860 all sizes.
2. Zurn/Wilkins:
a. Model 975XL for 1/2-inch through 2-inch.
b. Model 375AST for sizes 2 1/2 inch, 3 inch, 8 inch, and 10 inch. c. Model 375 and 375DA for sizes 4 inch and 6 inch.
3. Watts regulator: Series LF909.
B. Design: Reduced pressure chamber type in accordance with AWWA C511.
C. Backflow preventers shall be lead-free.
D. Include shutoff valves at each end of backflow preventer with properly located test cocks.
E. Shutoff valves:
1. Backflow preventers 2-inch and smaller: Provide with full-port, quarter turn, resilient seated ball valves.
2. Backflow preventers larger than 2-inch: Provide with resilient seated, outside stem and yoke gate valves.
2.02 MUD VALVES
A. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1. Clow Corp., Series F-3075T.
2. Waterman Industries, Inc., Model MV-11.
B. Design:
1. Provide mud valves with non-rising stem.
2. Provide standard AWWA 2-inch valve nut on stainless steel stem extension to height required.
C. Materials:
1. Body, cover, and yoke: Cast-iron.
2. Disc plug: Cast-iron.
3. Seat rings: Resilient Neoprene or Buna-N seating face.
Specialty Valves
15117-3 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15117 (DraftFinal)
4. Stem and stem nut: Bronze.
5. Cap screws to bolt valve to cast-iron pipe flange: Type 316 stainless steel.
2.03 SOLENOID VALVES
A. 2-way solenoid valves:
1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a. Automatic Switch Co., Series 8210.
1) Contractor shall provide external bypass to solenoid valve. External bypass shall use pipe of same material and size as main line and include a ball valve for manual operation.
b. Skinner Electric Valve Division, Series C.
B. Design:
1. Valves: Suitable for service under the following conditions:
a. Fluid potable water.
b. Temperature of fluid: 60 degrees Fahrenheit.
c. Piping test pressure: 150 pounds per square inch gauge.
2. Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings, provide valves that meet the following requirements:
a. Minimum NEMA Type 4 enclosure.
b. 120 VAC operation.
c. Suitable for use as indicated on the Drawings.
d. Minimum Class F coil insulation.
3. 2-way valves: Furnish with openings of size equal to or larger than the nominal size designation of the valve.
4. Furnish with manual/bypass operators.
C. Materials:
1. Body: Brass or bronze.
2. Seats: Resilient material.
2.04 PLASTIC BODY DIAPHRAGM VALVES
A. Type of service: Use plastic body diaphragm valves in the following services:
1. Sodium hypochlorite.
B. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1. Simtech.
2. Chemtrol.
3. Asahi-America (2-1/2 inch and less only for sodium hypochlorite service).
4. Georg Fischer Piping Systems.
5. Hayward Flow Control.
C. Materials:
1. Body: PVC with reinforcing ribs at body and end connections.
2. Diaphragm: Unless otherwise specified below, provide 2 diaphragm layers - Teflon™ diaphragm with EPDM backing or other material suitable for the intended use.
a. For sodium hypochlorite service: 3 diaphragm layers, Teflon™ (PTFE), PVDF, and ethylene propylene diene (EPDM) or Viton™ backing cushion.
Specialty Valves
15117-4 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15117 (DraftFinal)
3. Bonnet: PVC with cast iron or silicon bronze drive nut, double lead acme stem threads, acrylic protective cap and visual position indicator. a. Adjustable travel stop: Type 316 stainless steel.
b. Compressor: PVDF or cast iron.
4. Handwheel: Polypropylene.
5. Sleeve: Bronze or cast iron.
6. Stem: Type 316 stainless steel.
7. Bolt, nut, and washer: Type 316 stainless steel.
8. Thrust bearing: Teflon™ disc or carbon steel.
9. End connector: PVC.
10. End connector seal (flange gasket): Suitable for the intended use unless otherwise specified below.
a. For sodium hypochlorite and sodium bisulfite solution service: Hypalon 1/8-inch thick gaskets.
11. O-rings: Viton™.
12. Position indicator: Carbon steel.
D. Valve design:
1. End connections: Flanged.
2. Operator handle: Handwheel, with position indicator and adjustable travel stop to prevent overtightening. Provide acrylic stem cap.
3. Diaphragm valves: Weir type.
4. Pressure: 150 pound per square inch gauge at 70 degrees Fahrenheit.
E. Electric actuator:
1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a. Asahi/America.
b. Barton/ITT Fluid Technology Corporation.
c. Gemu.
2. General:
a. Reversing type motor.
b. Suitable for 115 volt, 1 phase, 60 hertz power supply. c. Travel stop limit switches with remote valve open and closed status indication.
d. Brushless, capacitor-run motors with integral thermal overload protection and auto reset.
e. Permanently lubricated gear train.
f. Visual position indicator.
g. Declutchable manual override.
3. Materials:
a. Actuator housing: Aluminum.
b. Output shaft: Type 316 stainless steel.
c. Electrical housing: NEMA Type 4.
d. Enclosure: NEMA Type 4.
e. Thermally bonded epoxy powder coating with Type 316 stainless steel trim.
Specialty Valves
15117-5 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15117 (DraftFinal)
2.05 CORPORATION STOPS
A. Type: In accordance with AWWA C800:
1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a. Ford.
b. Mueller Co.
2.06 CURB STOPS
A. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1. Ford.
2. Mueller Co.
B. Description: Round way solid tee head stops.
2.07 COCKS
A. Gauge cock:
1. Manufacturers: The following or equal:
a. Lunkenheimer Co., Figure 1178 or Figure 1180.
B. Air cock:
1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a. Swagelok, Model B-42S4.
b. Hoke, Inc., 7122G4B.
C. Plug cock:
1. Manufacturers: The following or equal:
a. Lunkenheimer Co., Figure 454.
2. Design: Plug cocks: Bronze, straightway pattern complete with lever.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install as specified in Section 15110 - Common Work Results for Valves in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions.
B. Install with a minimum clearance of 12 inches and with maximum clearance of 30 inches between the relief port and the floor or finished grade or top of containment wall.
C. Plastic body diaphragm valves for sodium hypochlorite service:
1. When valves are installed horizontally, install valves with valve stem position rotated as necessary such that no internal valve obstruction prevents the passage of vapors traveling along the top of adjacent piping from traveling through the valve.
Specialty Valves
15117-6 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15117 (DraftFinal) D. Backflow preventers:
1. Install with a minimum clearance of 12 inches and with maximum clearance of 30 inches between the relief port and the floor or finished grade or top of containment wall.
2. Install with sufficient side clearance for access for testing and maintenance.
3.02 COMMISSIONING
A. As specified in Section 01756 - Commissioning and this Section.
B. Manufacturer services:
1. Provide certificates:
a. Manufacturer’s Certificate of Installation and Functionality Compliance.
2. Manufacturer’s Representative onsite requirements:
a. For the following valves:
1) Flow control valves.
b. Installation: 1 trip, 1 day minimum.
c. Functional Testing: 1 trip, 1 day minimum each.
d. Training:
1) Maintenance: 2 hours per session, 2 sessions.
2) Operations: 2 hours per session, 2 sessions.
C. Functional testing:
1. Flow control valves:
a. Test witnessing: Witnessed.
b. Conduct pressure and leak test as specified in Section 15110 - Common Work Results for Valves.
2. Backflow preventer:
a. Test witnessing: Witnessed.
b. Conduct pressure and leak test as specified in Section 15110 - Common Work Results for Valves.
c. Backflow preventer certification.
3. Plastic body diaphragm valves:
a. Test witnessing: Witnessed.
b. Conduct pressure and leak test as specified in Section 15110 - Common Work Results for Valves.
END OF SECTION
Pressure Control Valves
15118-1 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15118 (DraftFinal) SECTION 15118
PRESSURE CONTROL VALVES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes: Pressure reducing and pressure relief valves for water, air, sludge and chemical service.
B. As specified in Section 15110 - Common Work Results for Valves.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME):
1. B16.42 - Ductile Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: Classes 150 and 300.
B. ASTM International (ASTM):
1. A536 - Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings.
C. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL).
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit as specified in Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures.
B. Product data: As specified in Section 15110 - Common Work Results for Valves.
C. Commissioning submittals:
1. Provide Manufacturer’s Certificate of Installation and Functionality Compliance as specified in Section 01756 - Commissioning.
1.04 WARRANTY
A. Provide warranty as specified in Section 01783 - Warranties and Bonds.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 METAL BODY PRESSURE REDUCING VALVES - WATER SERVICE (PRV00) A. Metallic pressure reducing valves for water service, 2 1/2 inches and smaller:
1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a. Watts, Series LF223.
b. Zurn Wilkins, 500 Series.
2. Direct operated, single seat type pressure reducing valve.
3. Downstream pressure adjustment range: 30 to 300 pounds per square inch gauge (psig).
Pressure Control Valves
15118-2 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15118 (DraftFinal)
4. Materials:
a. Body and spring cover: Bronze or brass alloy meeting the zinc and aluminum requirements of Section 15110 - Common Work Results for Valves.
b. Valve seat: Series 300 stainless steel.
c. Diaphragm: Reinforced Buna Nitrile.
d. Disk: Match the gasket/elastomer material of the corresponding piping system, as specified in the Piping Schedule.
B. Metallic pressure reducing valves for water service, 3 inches and larger:
1. Manufacturers: One of the following, or equal:
a. Cla-Val Model 90-01KO. Inlet Angled pattern (vertical inlet) with X43H Strainer.
2. Design:
a. Pilot controlled, hydraulically operated, diaphragm actuated, globe patterned valve.
b. Include anti-cavitation trim.
c. Rated for the test pressure of the corresponding piping system, as specified in the Piping Schedule.
d. Downstream pressure adjustment range: 30 to 300 psig. e. Pilot line: Equipped with a strainer.
f. Flanges: Class 150 , in accordance with ASME B16.42.
3. Materials:
a. Body and cover: Ductile Iron ASTM A536.
b. Valve trim: Bronze.
c. Pilot control: Cast bronze with Type 303 stainless steel trim. d. Diaphragm: Nylon reinforced Buna N.
e. NSF/ANSI 61 Fusion Bonded Epoxy.
2.02 PLASTIC BODY PRESSURE REDUCING VALVES - CHEMICAL OR WATER SERVICE (PRV40)
A. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1. Plast-O-Matic: Series PRHM.
B. Materials:
1. Valve body:
a. PVC piping systems: PVC.
b. CPVC piping systems: CPVC.
2. U-cups:
a. Match gasket/elastomer material of corresponding piping system, as indicated on the Piping Schedule.
3. Non-wetted metallic components: Stainless steel.
C. Design:
1. Diaphragm type.
2. Pressure rating: Not less than 150 pounds per square inch.
3. In-line or angle pattern design, size as indicated on the Drawings.
4. End connections: Threaded.
Pressure Control Valves
15118-3 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15118 (DraftFinal)
5. Downstream pressure set point:
a. Externally adjustable without removing valve from piping system. b. Adjustable from 5 to 125 psig.
2.03 PLASTIC BODY PRESSURE RELIEF VALVES FOR CHEMICAL OR WATER SERVICE (PRV24)
A. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1. Plast-O-Matic, Series RVT, RVDT or TRVDT.
2. Asahi/America.
3. Georg Fischer Piping Systems.
B. Materials:
1. Valve body:
a. PVC piping systems: PVC.
b. CPVC piping systems: CPVC.
2. U-cup seals:
a. Match gasket/elastomer material of corresponding piping system, as specified in the Piping Schedule.
3. Adjusting bolt, locknut, control spring and fasteners: Stainless steel.
C. Design:
1. Pressure rating: Not less than 150 pounds per square inch.
2. In-line or angle pattern design, size as indicated on the Drawings.
3. End connections:
a. 1 inch and smaller: Threaded.
b. Larger than 1 inch: Threaded.
4. Relief set point:
a. Externally adjustable without removing valve from piping system. b. Adjustment range:
1) Valve sizes 2 inches and smaller: 5 to 125 psig.
2) Valve sizes 3 inches and larger: 5 to 100 psig.
c. For chemical pump discharge applications, set valve to open at 10 pounds per square inch more than pump discharge pressure at maximum operating point, or as indicated on the Drawings.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install as specified in Section 15110 - Common Work Results for Valves.
3.02 COMMISSIONING
A. As specified in Section 01756 - Commissioning and this Section.
B. Manufacturer services:
1. Provide certificates:
a. Manufacturer's Certificate of Installation and Functionality Compliance.
Pressure Control Valves
15118-4 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15118 (DraftFinal) C. Functional testing:
1. Valves:
a. Test witnessing: Witnessed.
b. Conduct pressure and leak test as specified in Section 15110 - Common Work Results for Valves.
END OF SECTION
Air and Vacuum Relief Valves
15119-1 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15119 (DraftFinal) SECTION 15119
AIR AND VACUUM RELIEF VALVES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
1. Air release valves, air and vacuum valves, and air vents.
B. As specified in Section 15110 - Common Work Results for Valves.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME):
1. B16.1 - Gray Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: Classes 25, 125, and 250.
2. B16.5 - Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: NPS 1/2 through NPS 24, Metric/Inch Standard.
B. American Water Works Association (AWWA).
C. ASTM International (ASTM):
1. A126 - Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges, and Pipe Fittings.
2. A240 - Standard Specification for Chromium and Chromium-Nickel Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels and for General Applications.
3. A270 - Standard Specification for Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Sanitary Tubing.
4. B584 - Standard Specification for Copper Alloy Sand Castings for General Applications.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit as specified in Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures.
B. Product data: As specified in Section 15110 - Common Work Results for Valves.
C. Commissioning Submittals:
1. Provide Manufacturer’s Certificate of Installation and Functionality Compliance as specified in Section 01756 - Commissioning.
1.04 WARRANTY
A. Provide warranty as specified in Section 01783 - Warranties and Bond.
Air and Vacuum Relief Valves
15119-2 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15119 (DraftFinal) PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 METAL BODY AIR RELEASE VALVES - WATER SERVICE (ARV00) A. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1. Multiplex Manufacturing Co., Crispin PL Series.
2. Valve and Primer Corp., DeZURIK/APCO Series 200.
B. Design:
1. Pressure rating: 150 pounds per square inch gauge unless differently indicated on the Drawings.
2. Provide low pressure seat when the operating pressure is below 10 psi.
3. Inlet: Screwed, 2-inch.
4. Orifice size: 1/4-inch diameter.
C. Materials:
1. Valve body: Cast iron.
2. Float and internal trim: Type 316 stainless steel.
3. Seat or valve plunger: Buna-N.
2.02 METAL BODY AIR RELEASE VALVES - SEWAGE SERVICE (ARV20) A. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1. Multiplex Manufacturing Co., Crispin Series S.
2. Valve and Primer Corp., DeZURIK/APCO, Series 400.
B. Design:
1. Operation: Release accumulated air in sewage pipelines operating under pressure. After entrained air escapes through the orifice, the orifice is plugged by a needle mounted on a compound lever mechanism.
2. Internal components removable through top cover without removing valve from pipeline.
3. Pressure rating: 150 pounds per square inch.
4. Provide low pressure seat when the operating pressure is below 10 psi.
5. Orifice size: 1/4-inch diameter.
6. Connections: 2-inch threaded inlet and 1/2-inch threaded outlet.
C. Accessories:
1. Inlet shutoff valve. Utilize eccentric plug valve.
2. 2 blowoff valves for backflushing.
3. 10 feet of hose with quick disconnect couplings.
D. Materials:
1. Body: Cast iron or ductile iron.
2. Float: Type 316 stainless steel.
3. Needle: Buna-N.
Air and Vacuum Relief Valves
15119-3 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15119 (DraftFinal)
2.03 METAL BODY AIR AND VACUUM VALVES - WATER SERVICE (AVV00) A. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1. Multiplex Manufacturing Co., Crispin A Series.
2. Valve and Primer Corp., DeZURIK/APCO Series 140.
B. Design:
1. Minimum performance requirements:
a. Air in-flow through valve: Not less than 6 standard cubic feet per second. b. Air exhaust through valve: Not less than 6 standard cubic feet per second.
2. Pressure rating: Up to 125 pounds per square inch gauge unless differently indicated on the Drawings.
3. Inlet: Screwed.
C. Materials:
1. Body: Cast iron.
2. Float: Type 316 stainless steel.
2.04 METAL BODY COMBINATION AIR VALVES - WATER SERVICE (CAV00) A. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1. Multiplex Manufacturing Co., Crispin UL Series.
2. Valve and Primer Corp., DeZURIK/APCO, Series 140C.
B. Design:
1. Operation: Automatic exhaust of large quantities of air from pipelines during filling and draining and release of accumulated air while pipeline is under pressure.
2. Utilize compound lever system in conjunction with large and small orifices.
3. Internal parts removable through top cover without removing valve from pipeline.
4. Pressure rating: 125 pounds per square inch.
5. Inlet: Screwed, 1-inch size.
C. Materials:
1. Body: Cast iron.
2. Float: Type 316 stainless steel.
3. Needle: Buna-N.
4. Lever frame: Cast iron or Delrin.
2.05 PLASTIC BODY DEGASSING VALVE FOR SODIUM HYPOCHLORITE SERVICE (DGV40)
A. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1. Plast-O-Matic, DGV.
2. Primary Fluid Systems, Accu-Vent.
B. Materials:
1. Body:
a. PVC piping systems: PVC.
b. CPVC piping system: CPVC.
2. Elastomers: Match the gasket material specified in the Piping Schedule.
Air and Vacuum Relief Valves
15119-4 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15119 (DraftFinal)
3. Minimum pressure rating: 150 pounds per square inch gauge.
4. Connection: 1/4-inch NPT minimum.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install as specified in Section 15110 - Common Work Results for Valves and the manufacturer’s instructions.
B. Install air release valves and air and vacuum valves with suitable discharge lines to nearest drainage system.
3.02 COMMISSIONING
A. As specified in Section 01756 - Commissioning and this Section.
B. Manufacturer services:
1. Provide certificates:
a. Manufacturer’s Certificate of Installation and Functionality Compliance.
C. Functional Testing:
1. Valves:
a. Test witnessing: Witnessed.
b. Conduct pressure and leak test as specified in Section 15110 - Common Work Results for Valves.
END OF SECTION
Piping Specialties
15120-1 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15120 (DraftFinal) SECTION 15120
PIPING SPECIALTIES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
1. Piping specialties, including:
a. Pipe couplings for stainless steel piping.
b. Vibration control joints.
c. Transition fittings.
d. Pipe saddles.
e. Tapping sleeves.
f. Surge cushions.
g. Sight gauges.
h. Chemical Injector/Diffuser.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME):
1. B16.5 - Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: NPS 1/2 through NPS 24, Metric/Inch Standard.
B. American Water Works Association (AWWA):
1. C110 - Standard for Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Fittings.
2. C151 - Standard for Ductile-Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast.
C. ASTM International (ASTM):
1. A148 - Standard Specification for Steel Castings, High-Strength, for Structural Purposes.
2. A193 - Standard Specification for Alloy-Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting for High Temperature or High Pressure Service and Other Special Purpose Applications.
3. A194 - Standard Specification for Carbon Steel, Alloy Steel, and Stainless Steel Nuts for Bolts for High Pressure or High Temperature Service, or Both.
4. A536 - Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings.
D. NSF International (NSF):
1. 61 - Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects, Includes Errata.
2. 372 - Drinking Water System Components - Lead Content.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit as specified in Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures and Section 01601 - Product Requirements.
Piping Specialties
15120-2 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15120 (DraftFinal) B. Product data:
1. For each piping product in this Section as applicable:
a. Design features.
b. Load capacities.
c. Material designations by UNS alloy number or ASTM Specification and Grade.
d. Data needed to verify compliance with the Specifications. e. Catalog data.
f. Clearly mark Submittal information to show specific items, materials, and accessories or options being furnished.
C. Installation instructions:
1. Provide manufacturer’s installation instructions.
D. Calculations:
1. Provide calculations in accordance with NSF 372 for materials in contact with drinking water.
E. Manufacturer’s Certificate of Installation as specified in Section 01756 - Commissioning:
1. Provide as specified in this Section.
1.04 WARRANTY
A. As specified in Section 01783 - Warranties and Bonds.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. As specified in Section 01601 - Product Requirements.
B. Materials in contact with drinking waters: In accordance with NSF 61 and NSF 372.
2.02 PIPE COUPLINGS FOR STAINLESS STEEL PIPING
A. Flexible hose:
1. General:
a. Type: Flexible stainless steel hose.
1) Unbraided for pressures up to 150 pounds per square inch. 2) Single braided for pressures up to 225 pounds per square inch. 3) Double braided for pressures up to 360 pounds per square inch. b. End connections: Flanged, or as needed to comply with the specified type of joint:
1) Sizes 2-1/2 inches and smaller may have threaded nipples. 2) Sizes 2 inches through 12 inches may have grooved ends.
2. Design:
a. Open pitch spacing of corrugation.
b. 1 fixed and 1 floating raised face flanged end connection. c. Able to withstand up to 1-inch offset motion from centerline.
Piping Specialties
15120-3 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15120 (DraftFinal)
3. Materials:
a. Hose: Type 304 stainless steel.
b. Flanges: Carbon steel.
2.03 VIBRATION CONTROL JOINTS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Braided bronze flexible vibration joints 2 inches and less in size: One of the following or equal:
a. Flex-Weld, Inc., Keflex, Type KFCB.
b. Senior Flexonics Canada, Inc., Type BRC bronze connectors.
2. Flexible vibration joints larger than 2 inches: One of the following or equal:
a. Flex-Weld, Inc., Keflex, Series 151-TR-1215.
b. Senior Flexonics Canada, Inc., Type TCS.
3. Corrugated stainless steel with stainless steel braid flexible vibration joints:
One of the following or equal:
a. Flex-Weld, Inc., Keflex, Type USFNSS-31.
b. Senior Flexonics Canada, Inc., Type BSFS stainless steel connectors.
B. Design:
1. Flexible vibration joints 2 inches and smaller: Braided bronze, suitable for pressures of not less than 250 pounds per square inch gauge.
2. Flexible vibration joints larger than 2 inches: Flexible bellows type, suitable for pressures of not less than 150 pounds per square inch gauge, at 70 degrees Fahrenheit, except as follows:
a. Provide vibration joints in piping subject to test pressures higher than 150 pounds per square inch gauge, suitable for such higher pressures. b. Bellows: Stainless steel, equipped with a stainless steel liner. c. Ends: ASME Class 150 flanges.
3. Vibration joints in high-pressure air piping and in digester gas piping:
Corrugated Type 316 stainless steel with stainless steel braid, suitable for pressures of not less than 150 pounds per square inch gauge. a. Ends: ASME Class 150 flanges.
C. Protection: Protect vibration absorbers against end loading and torsional stresses by anchoring attached piping.
2.04 TRANSITION FITTINGS
A. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1. Spears.
B. Materials:
1. Slip socket: Schedule 80 PVC.
2. Collar: Type 316 stainless steel.
3. Threaded insert: Type 316 stainless steel.
2.05 PIPE SADDLES
A. For ductile iron pipe:
1. Double strap brass type.
Piping Specialties
15120-4 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15120 (DraftFinal)
2. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a. A.Y. McDonald, Style 3825.
b. The Ford Meter Box Company, Style 202B.
c. Mueller Company, Style BR2B.
3. Materials:
a. Pipe saddle body, straps, and nuts: Brass or silicon bronze. b. Gaskets: EPDM.
B. For PVC C900 or C905 pipe:
1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a. Romac Industries, Inc., Style 202S.
b. Smith-Blair, Inc., Style 317.
2. Materials:
a. Pipe saddles: Ductile iron with fusion bonded epoxy finish. b. Straps, bolts, and nuts: Type 304 stainless steel with Teflon™ coating on nuts.
c. Gaskets: EPDM.
2.06 TAPPING SLEEVES
A. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1. Romac Industries, Inc., Style FTS 420.
2. Smith-Blair, Inc., Style 622.
B. Materials:
1. Tapping sleeves: Steel construction.
2. Bolts and nuts: Type 304 stainless steel.
3. Nuts: Teflon™ coated.
4. Gaskets: EPDM.
5. Size of tapped boss: As indicated on the Drawings.
2.07 SURGE CUSHIONS
A. Design:
1. Minimum capacity: 150 psi.
2. Inlet and outlet:
a. Size: 1 inches.
b. Flange: 150 pound ASME B16.5.
c. Connection with orifice plate to prevent extrusion of bladder from shell.
3. Surge cushion unit:
a. Steel construction.
b. Stamped that it meets ASME B16.5 pressure vessel requirements for pressure of 275 pounds per square inch gauge.
c. Shell with removable top for inspection of bladder.
d. Removable top with gas precharge connection and pressure gauge.
4. Bladder:
a. Composed of aromatic Buna N, and charged with nitrogen. b. Effective for pressure shock cushion and to prevent gas absorption by the fluid.
Piping Specialties
15120-5 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15120 (DraftFinal)
2.08 SIGHT GAUGES, INDICATING FLOW OR LEVEL
A. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1. John C Ernst.
2. Plast-O-Matic.
B. Provide sight gauges as indicated on the Drawings.
C. Double wall construction except for hydrofluoric acid or sodium hydroxide service.
1. Borosilicate glass inner wall.
2. High impact acrylic for outer wall.
a. High light transmissibility.
b. UV light resistant.
D. Single wall construction for hydrofluoric acid or sodium hydroxide service.
1. High impact acrylic.
E. PTFE end connections.
1. Suitable for 50 psi working pressure at 225 degrees Fahrenheit.
F. FKM O-ring seals.
G. FKM O-ring seals on ends of wafer connections.
H. Full 360-degree visibility.
I. Vinyl fluttering streamers for flow indication sight gauge.
2.09 CHEMICAL INJECTOR/DIFFUSER
A. Design:
1. Chemical injector/diffuser:
a. Injector configuration: Pre-assembled single feed point into center of water main.
b. Operating pressure: 150 psi.
2. Heavy duty brass corporation stop or stainless steel ball valve:
a. Thread connection shall be NPT or AWWA inlet.
b. Corporation stop must include a safety device to prevent accidental withdrawal of Injection/Diffuser solution tube.
3. Injector/diffuser solution tube sized to match pump discharge line or injection flow rate:
a. Tube shall extend 1/3- to 1/2-diameter of water main into center of main. b. Able to safely withdraw or insert injector/diffuser tube into center of water main while under pressure and without having to shut down the main. c. Integral ball check valve located on injector/diffuser assembly. d. Stainless steel safety chain located on injector/diffuser solution tube.
B. Materials:
1. Injector/Diffuser: Hastelloy.
Piping Specialties
15120-6 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15120 (DraftFinal) C. Manufacturers: The following or equal:
1. Saf-T-Flo.
2.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. As specified in Section 01601 - Product Requirements.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. As specified in Section 01601 - Product Requirements.
B. Drawings supersede conflicts with this Section.
C. Vibration control joints:
1. Protect joints against damage during pressure test.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Vibration control joints:
1. Install at piping connections to or from mechanical equipment to prevent transmitting equipment vibration through the piping system.
B. Transition couplings:
1. Application:
a. Use with function and design similar to flexible couplings and flanged coupling adapters for connecting piping having different outside diameters.
2. Install products specifically designed and manufactured for that application.
C. Pipe saddles:
1. Coat threads on bolts with anti-gall coating prior to installation.
D. Tapping sleeves:
1. Verify existing pipe material and outer diameter prior to ordering materials.
2. Coat threads on bolts with anti-gall coating prior to installation.
E. Surge cushions:
1. Provide to dampen shock pressure surges due to power loss, fast closing valves, or other events that produce water hammer.
3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Manufacturer services:
1. Required only for:
a. Transition couplings.
2. Provide Manufacturer’s Certificate of Installation.
Piping Specialties
15120-7 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15120 (DraftFinal) B. Field testing:
1. As specified in Section 15052 - Common Work Results for General Piping.
2. Protect vibration control joints.
END OF SECTION
Strainers
15125-1 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15125 (DraftFinal) SECTION 15125
STRAINERS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes: Strainers.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. ASTM International (ASTM):
1. A126 - Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges, and Pipe Fittings.
2. A420 - Standard Specification for Piping Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Low-Temperature Service.
B. Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE).
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit as specified in Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures.
B. Product data: As specified in Section 15052 - Common Work Results for General Piping.
1. Shop drawings, detailing dimensions, and materials.
2. Installation instructions.
C. Provide vendor operation and maintenance manual as specified in Section 01782 - Operation and Maintenance Manuals.
1. Furnish bound sets of installation, operation and maintenance instructions for each type of strainer. Include information on valves for mechanically-cleaned strainers.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 Y-TYPE STRAINERS
A. Y-type strainers 4 inches and larger in diameter:
1. Materials:
a. Bodies: Cast iron or semi-steel.
b. Ends: Flanged.
c. Screens: Brass or Type 304 stainless steel.
2. Suitable for following minimum pressure conditions:
a. Steam service: 250 pounds per square inch gauge.
b. Water, oil, and gas service: 200 pounds per square inch gauge.
3. Perforated screens:
a. Openings: 0.045 inches.
Strainers
15125-2 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15125 (DraftFinal) b. Active screen opening to pipe area ratio: 2.8, minimum. c. Free area: 37 percent minimum.
4. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a. Armstrong International Inc., Code A1.
b. ITT/Hoffman, 460 Series.
B. Y-type strainers less than 4 inches in diameter:
1. Materials:
a. Bodies: Cast iron or semi-steel.
b. Ends: Flanged or threaded.
c. Screen: Brass or Type 304 stainless steel.
2. Suitable for maximum pressure of 250 pounds per square inch gauge.
3. Screens: Perforations: 1/32 inch.
4. Manufacturers: The following or equal:
a. Armstrong, Y-Type Strainer.
2.02 H-STRAINER
A. Provide H-strainer as indicated on the Drawings.
B. Materials:
1. Bodies: Stainless steel.
2. Ends: Flanged.
3. Screen: Stainless Steel.
C. Suitable for maximum pressure rating of 250 pounds per square inch gauge.
D. Screen: 10 mesh or 2000 micron.
E. Connections: ANSI 150 pound flanged.
F. Manufacturers: The following or equal:
1. Cla Val, X43H.
2.03 BASKET TYPE STRAINERS
A. Provide basket type strainers single or duplex as indicated on the Drawings.
B. Materials:
1. Bodies: Cast iron or cast steel. PVC shall be used for chemical systems.
2. Baskets: Low-zinc bronze or stainless steel. PVC shall be used for chemical systems.
C. Pressure rating: Where not otherwise indicated on the Drawings, 125 pounds per square inch gauge, minimum.
D. Connections: Threaded or flanged, as required.
E. Covers:
1. For strainers 6 inches and smaller in size, secured by yokes or similar quick opening devices.
Strainers
15125-3 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15125 (DraftFinal)
2. For strainers larger than 6 inches in size, bolted or hinged and bolted with slotted washers so that bolts or nuts need not be completely removed to open the strainer.
3. Provide lifting eyes on covers weighing more than 50 pounds.
F. Baskets:
1. Screen: Mesh or perforated sheet.
2. Openings: Not greater than 1/8 inch.
3. Free area: Not less than 30 percent.
4. Free area to pipe ratio: Not less than 3.
G. Provide duplex strainers with tapered plug transfer valve or with gate type transfer valves.
1. Where action on two valve actuators is required to transfer operation from one chamber to the other, provide actuators mechanically linked for simultaneous operation.
H. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1. Single basket strainers:
a. Fluid Engineering, Series 528B.
b. Mueller Steam Specialty.
2. Double basket strainers:
a. Fluid engineering, Series 534 for sizes 1-1/2 inch to 8 inch, and Series 424 for sizes 10 inch and larger.
b. Mueller Steam Specialty.
3. Basket strainers for chemical service:
a. Hayward.
b. Dual or simplex as indicated on the Drawings; baskets and bodies PVC; gaskets Viton or EPDM as required for the chemical service; basket mesh size to be specified by the Engineer during shop drawing review.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
3.02 COMMISSIONING
A. As specified in Section 01756 - Commissioning and this Section.
B. Manufacturer services for mechanically cleaned strainers, only:
1. Provide certificates:
a. Manufacturer’s Certificate of Installation and Functionality Compliance.
2. Manufacturer’s Representative onsite requirements:
a. Installation: 1 trip, 1 day minimum.
b. Functional Testing: 1 trip, 1 day minimum each.
3. Training:
a. Maintenance: 2 hours per session, 2 sessions.
b. Operation: 1 hour per session, 2 sessions.
Strainers
15125-4 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15125 (DraftFinal)
4. Process operational period:
a. As required by Owner or Contractor.
C. Functional testing:
1. Mechanically cleaned strainers only:
a. Test witnessing: Witnessed.
b. Conduct Level 1 General Equipment Performance Test.
END OF SECTION
Ductile Iron Pipe: AWWA C151
15211-1 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15211 (DraftFinal) SECTION 15211
DUCTILE IRON PIPE: AWWA C151
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
1. Ductile iron pipe, joints, connections, fittings, and pipe linings and coatings.
B. As specified in Section 15052 - Common Work Results for General Piping.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME):
1. B16.1 - Gray Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: Classes 25, 125, and 250.
B. American Water Works Association (AWWA):
1. C104 - Standard for Cement-Mortar Lining for Ductile-Iron Pipe and Fittings.
2. C105 - Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile-Iron Pipe Systems.
3. C110 - Standard for Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Fittings.
4. C111 - Standard for Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings.
5. C150 - Standard for Thickness Design of Ductile-Iron Pipe.
6. C151 - Standard for Ductile-Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast.
7. C153 - Standard for Ductile-Iron Compact Fittings for Water Service.
8. C600 - Installation of Ductile Iron Water Mains and Their Appurtenances.
9. C606 - Standard for Grooved and Shouldered Joints.
C. American Welding Society (AWS):
1. D11.2 - Guide for Welding Iron Castings.
D. ASTM International (ASTM):
1. A536 - Standard Specifications for Ductile Iron Castings.
2. B1000 - Standard Practices for Casting Preparation and Test Procedure of Porcelain Enamel-Lined Pipe, Fittings, and Valves for Use in the Municipal Wastewater, Sewage, and Water Treatment Industry.
3. C33 - Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates.
4. C150 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement.
5. C283 - Standard Test Methods for Resistance of Porcelain Enameled Utensils to Boiling Acid.
6. D792 - Standard Test Methods for Density and Specific Gravity (Relative Density) of Plastics by Displacement.
7. D4541 - Standard Test Method for Pull-Off Strength of Coatings Using Portable Adhesion Testers.
E. Ductile Iron Pipe Research Association (DIPRA):
1. Thrust Restraint Design Manual.
Ductile Iron Pipe: AWWA C151
15211-2 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15211 (DraftFinal) F. International Organization for Standardization (ISO):
1. 8179 - Ductile iron pipe, fittings, accessories and their joints - External zincbased coating - Part 1: Metallic zinc with finishing layer.
G. National Association of Pipe Fabricators, Inc. (NAPF):
1. 500-03 - Surface Preparation Standard for Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings in Exposed Locations Receiving Special External Coatings and/or Special Internal Linings.
H. NSF International (NSF):
1. 61 - Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects.
I. Society for Protective Coatings (SSPC):
1. SP 5 - White Metal Blast Cleaning.
2. SP 10 - Near White Wet Blast.
3. SP 11 - Bare Metal Power Tool Cleaning.
4. PA 2 - Measurement of Dry Coating Thickness with Magnetic Gages.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish Submittals as specified in Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures.
B. Product data.
C. Manufacturer’s qualifications.
1. Manufacturer qualifications and list of projects using the specified material:
5 years minimum.
D. Manufacturer’s Quality Assurance Manual:
1. Submit manufacturer’s coating and lining application quality assurance manual to the Engineer prior to beginning coating application. a. Strict conformance to the requirements of the manual will be required. b. Deviation from the requirements of the manual will be grounds for the Engineer to reject the applied coating.
E. Shop Drawings:
1. Detailed layout drawings showing alignment of pipes, location of valves, fittings, and appurtenances, types of joints, and connections to pipelines or structures.
2. Thrust restraint systems.
3. Photographs, drawings, and descriptions of fittings, gaskets, couplings, grooving of pipe and fittings.
F. Calculations:
1. Thrust restraint system design.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Ductile iron pipe shall be supplied by a single manufacturer.
B. Hydrostatically test each joint of ductile iron pipe in accordance with AWWA C151.
Ductile Iron Pipe: AWWA C151
15211-3 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15211 (DraftFinal) C. Pre-installation meeting:
1. Arrange for the coating manufacturer’s technical representative to attend preconstruction conferences and to make periodic visits to the factory or shop to inspect surface preparation of pipe, fittings, and accessories; and to inspect application of linings to interior and coatings to exterior of pipe, fittings, and accessories.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Block piping and associated fittings for shipment to prevent damage to coatings and linings.
B. Carefully handle piping and associated fittings during loading, unloading, and installation:
1. Do not drop piping material from cars or trucks.
2. Lower piping by mechanical means.
3. Do not drop or pound pipe to fit grade.
C. Protect gaskets and polyethylene encasement from long-term exposure to sunlight.
D. Store piping, fittings, and other accessories such that they do not accumulate and hold rainwater, dirt, and debris.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURED UNITS
A. Ductile iron piping:
1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a. American Cast Iron Pipe Co.
b. McWane Ductile.
c. SIP Industries.
d. U.S. Pipe.
2.02 THRUST RESTRAINT SYSTEM DESIGN
A. Determine the length of pipe that must be restrained on each side of the focus of a thrust load as specified in the procedures and criteria established by the DIPRA Thrust Restraint Design Manual, City of Roseville standards, and the following additional criteria.
B. Design pressure: Test pressure.
C. Laying condition: Type 5 in accordance with AWWA C150.
D. Soil type: Silt 1 as defined by DIPRA.
E. Unit friction resistance for polyethylene encasement of pipe: DIPRA factor multiplied by a safety factor of 1.5.
Ductile Iron Pipe: AWWA C151
15211-4 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15211 (DraftFinal)
2.03 CONCRETE THRUST BLOCK RESTRAINT
A. Joint thrust restraint system designed by the Contractor.
1. Concrete thrust blocks will not be permitted for DIP restraint unless shown on the Drawings.
2.04 DUCTILE IRON JOINTS AND CONNECTIONS
A. General:
1. Pressure class or special thickness class as indicated on the Drawings.
2. In accordance with AWWA C150 and AWWA C151.
3. Joints:
a. Flanged.
b. Grooved.
c. Mechanical.
d. Integrally restrained push-on.
4. Connections:
a. Tapping saddle.
b. Tapping sleeve.
c. Welded outlet.
5. Fittings.
B. Joints:
1. Flanged joints:
a. Screw-on flanges:
1) Comply with the diameter, thickness, drilling, and other characteristics in accordance with ASME B16.1.
2) Ductile iron.
3) Long hub, threaded, and specially designed for ductile iron pipe. 4) After attaching to pipe, machine flange face to make pipe end and flange even and perpendicular to the axis of the pipe.
b. Bolt holes on flanges: 2-holed and aligned at both ends of pipe. c. Cap screw or stud bolt holes: Tapped.
d. Bolts and nuts:
1) As specified in Section 15052 - Common Work Results for General Piping.
e. Gaskets:
1) Standard styrene butadiene copolymer (SBR) unless specified otherwise in Section 15052 - Common Work Results for General Piping.
2. Grooved joints:
a. In accordance with AWWA C606, as complemented and modified below, radius-cut type.
b. Couplings:
1) Rigid type, cast from ductile iron in accordance with ASTM A536, Grade 65-45-12.
c. Bolts and nuts:
1) In accordance with ASTM A 183, Grade 2.
Ductile Iron Pipe: AWWA C151
15211-5 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15211 (DraftFinal) d. Gaskets:
1) Capable of being applied on surface of piping with cavities to provide for an improved seal with the internal piping pressure. Material to be used for following services:
a) For liquid service: NBR.
b) For air service: Fluoroelastomer.
c) For hot water service: EPDM.
e. Fittings:
1) In accordance with AWWA C606, rigid radius-cut groove. 2) Center-to-center dimensions: In accordance with AWWA C110. 3) Wall thickness and other characteristics: In accordance with AWWA C606.
f. Flanged unit connections:
1) Flanged to grooved joint adapters or a long enough spool with one end flanged and the other end grooved to prevent interference with the operation of adjacent valves, pumps, or other items.
3. Mechanical joints:
a. In accordance with AWWA C111.
b. Gaskets:
1) As specified in Section 15052 - Common Work Results for General Piping.
c. Bolts and nuts, including T-bolts:
1) As specified in Section 15052 - Common Work Results for General Piping.
4. Integrally restrained mechanical joints:
a. Manufacturers: Where restrained mechanical joints are required, use one of the following or equal:
1) American Cast Iron Pipe Co., MJ Coupled Joint.
2) U.S. Pipe, Bolt-Lok.
3) U.S. Pipe, Mech-Lok.
b. Application:
1) Where designated mechanical restraint.
2) Mechanical joint is specified in the Piping Schedule provided on the Drawings, supply a restrained mechanical joint piping system, which includes restrained mechanical joints where necessary based upon thrust calculations.
3) Standard mechanical joints as specified above can be used where thrust calculations demonstrate restraint is not required. c. Design:
1) Integral retainer weldment type or lugged type joint with Type 304 stainless steel rods and nuts.
2) Restrained mechanical joints of the configuration which utilizes a gripping or friction force for restraint will not be acceptable. d. Gaskets:
1) As specified in Section 15052 - Common Work Results for General Piping.
e. Bolts and nuts, including T-bolts:
1) As specified in Section 15052 - Common Work Results for General Piping.
Ductile Iron Pipe: AWWA C151
15211-6 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15211 (DraftFinal)
5. Integrally restrained push-on joints:
a. Application:
1) Where designation restrained push-on as indicated on the Drawings, supply a restrained push-on joint piping system, which includes restrained push-on joints where necessary based upon thrust calculations.
2) Standard push-on rubber gasket joints as specified above can be used where thrust calculations demonstrate restraint is not required. b. Design:
1) Restrained push-on joints of the configuration which utilizes a gripping or friction force for restraint will not be acceptable. 2) Suitable for the following working pressures:
a) 4- through 24-inch pipe: 350 pounds per square inch gauge. b) 30- through 54-inch pipe: 250 pounds per square inch gauge. c. Gaskets:
1) As specified in Section 15052 - Common Work Results for General Piping.
d. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1) American Cast Iron Pipe Co., Flex Ring or Lok-Ring.
2) McWane Ductile, TR Flex.
3) U.S. Pipe, TR Flex.
e. Limit buried joints to half the manufacturer’s published allowable angular joint deflection for purposes of pipeline alignment and elimination of fittings.
C. Connections:
1. Tapping saddle as specified in Owner standard specification. a. If Owner does not have a standard specification, provide tapping saddles as specified in Section 15120 - Piping Specialties.
2. Tapping sleeve as specified in Owner standard specification. a. If Owner does not have a standard specification, provide tapping sleeves as specified in Section 15120 - Piping Specialties.
3. Welded outlet:
a. Not allowed without Engineer approval.
D. Fittings:
1. Ductile iron in accordance with AWWA C110 or AWWA C153.
2. Joint type:
a. Same as that of the associated piping as specified in Section 15052 - Common Work Results for General Piping.
3. Plain end-to-flanged joint connectors using setscrews are not acceptable.
2.05 CEMENT MORTAR
A. Line pipe with cement mortar in accordance with AWWA C104 and as specified in this Section.
B. Cement:
1. Cement: In accordance with ASTM C150, Type II.
Ductile Iron Pipe: AWWA C151
15211-7 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15211 (DraftFinal) C. Water:
1. In accordance with AWWA C104 and as specified in this Section.
D. Sand and aggregate:
1. In accordance with AWWA C104.
2. Provide silica sand or other aggregate that is not subject to leaching in accordance with ASTM C33.
E. Lining:
1. Minimum thickness: Standard in accordance with AWWA C104.
2. Apply cement mortar on clean bare metal surfaces.
3. Extend to faces of flanges, ends of spigots, and shoulders of hubs.
4. Line special pieces or fittings by mechanical, pneumatic, or hand placement. a. Extend to faces of flanges and ends of spigots.
b. Less than 12 inches in width: Coat with epoxy bonding agent prior to applying cement mortar.
c. Larger than 12 inches in width: Reinforced with 2-inch by 4-inch No. 13 gauge welded steel wire mesh prior to applying cement mortar.
5. Provide plastic end caps of sufficient thickness and strength to resist shipping, handling, and storage stresses.
6. Repair damage to the cement mortar lining, including disbondment, or cracking caused by improper curing, shipping, handling, or installation in accordance with AWWA C104 and approved by the Engineer. a. Reinforce coating with 2 layers spirally-wound steel wire positioned approximately in center of mortar coating positioned approximately at the third points of mortar coating:
1) No. 12 gauge spaced at maximum 1-inch centers.
2) No. 14 gauge steel wire at maximum 1/2-inch centers.
2.06 POLYETHYLENE ENCASEMENT
A. General:
1. Polyethylene encasement shall be supplied by the pipe manufacturer.
B. Materials: Supply one of the following polyethylene encasements:
1. 2 layers of linear low-density polyethylene (LLDPE) film, minimum thickness of 8 mils in accordance with AWWA C105.
2. Single layer of high-density, cross-laminated polyethylene (HDCLPE) film, minimum thickness of 4 mils in accordance with AWWA C105.
2.07 SEAL COAT
A. Asphaltic seal coat:
1. Apply over cement mortar linings and to outside surface of pipes that will not receive another coating.
2. Apply in accordance with AWWA C151.
2.08 CORROSION MONITORING
A. As specified in Section 15320 - Corrosion Protection Isolation.
Ductile Iron Pipe: AWWA C151
15211-8 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15211 (DraftFinal)
2.09 CATHODIC PROTECTION
A. As specified in Section 15320 – Corrosion Protection Isolation.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. General:
1. Install ductile iron piping in accordance with AWWA C600, or as modified in Section 15052 - Common Work Results for General Piping.
2. For underground piping, the trenching, backfill, and compaction:
a. Inspect coating prior to backfill.
b. As specified in Section 02318 - Trenching.
B. Joints:
1. Install types of joints as specified in the piping schedule provided in the Drawings.
2. Mechanical joints are not acceptable in above ground applications.
3. Field closure for restrained push-on pipe:
a. Locate field closures in areas where thrust calculations demonstrate restraint is not required.
4. Grooved joints:
a. Install piping with grooved joints where specified in the piping schedule, or as otherwise indicated on the Drawings.
b. Assemble grooved joints in accordance with the manufacturer’s published instructions.
c. Support grooved-end pipe in accordance with the manufacturer’s published instructions.
1) Install at least 1 support between consecutive couplings.
C. Connection:
1. Tapping ductile iron pipe:
a. Direct tapping of ductile iron pipe may be performed but is limited to the following conditions:
1) Maximum allowable tap diameter by pipe diameter and pressure class:
Pipe Size
(inches)
Pressure Class
150 200 250 300 350
Maximum Allowable Direct Tap Size (inches)
3 - - - - 3/4
4 - - - - 3/4
6 - - - - 1
8 - - - - 1
10 - - - - 1
12 - - - - 1-1/4
14 - - 1-1/4 1-1/2 1-1/2
Ductile Iron Pipe: AWWA C151
15211-9 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15211 (DraftFinal) Pipe Size
(inches)
Pressure Class
150 200 250 300 350
Maximum Allowable Direct Tap Size (inches)
16 - - 1-1/2 2 2
18 - - 2 2 2
20 - - 2 2 2
24 - 2 2 2 2
b. Maximum allowable tap diameter for pipelines greater than 24 inches is 2 inches.
c. 2 layers of 3-mil thread sealant are required to minimize the torque required to effect a watertight connection.
2. When direct tapping of ductile iron pipe is not possible due to limited wall thickness, a saddle tap shall be used.
3.02 DEFECTS IN COATINGS EXCEPT TAPE WRAP AND CEMENT MORTAR COATING A. Engineer will identify defective coating to be field repaired in accordance with the applicable AWWA standard.
1. Pipe joints exceeding the following defect maximum will be rejected. a. Minor defects:
1) No more than 1.5 per 100 square feet of surface area. 2) 2 or more minor repairs within an 8-inch diameter circle will be considered a single repair.
3) Repairs for adhesion testing will not be included in the total number of repairs.
4) Repair in accordance with the manufacturer’s requirements. b. Major defects:
1) No more than 3 major repairs on each pipe joint.
2) No more than 30 percent repairs on the pipe surface area with defects.
2. Minor repairs:
a. Less than 8 inches in the greatest dimension.
b. Repair in accordance with the manufacturer’s requirements.
3. Major repairs:
a. Exceed 8 inches in the greatest dimension.
b. Repair in accordance with the manufacturer’s requirements.
3.03 POLYETHYLENE ENCASEMENT
A. Wrap buried ductile iron pipe and fittings in 2 layers of loose low-density polyethylene wrap or a single layer of high-density polyethylene wrap in accordance with AWWA C105 and as specified in this Section.
B. Wrap polyethylene encasement to be continuous and terminated neatly at connections to below grade equipment or structures.
C. At wall penetrations, extend encasement to the wall and neatly terminate.
Ductile Iron Pipe: AWWA C151
15211-10 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15211 (DraftFinal) D. At slab penetrations, extend encasement to 2 inches below the top of slab and neatly terminate.
E. When rising vertically in unimproved areas, extend encasement on pipe 6 inches above existing grade and neatly terminate.
F. Repair tears and make joints with 2 layers of plastic tape.
G. Work shall be inspected prior to backfilling of pipe and associated items.
3.04 CORROSION MONITORING FACILITIES
A. Bond pipe joints and associated fittings to provide electrical continuity.
B. Install dielectric insulating fittings and corrosion monitoring facilities as indicated on the Drawings and specified in Section 15320 - Corrosion Protection Isolation.
3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing ductile iron piping:
1. Test as specified in Section 15052 - Common Work Results for General Piping and Section 15956 - Piping Systems Testing.
B. Repair damaged cement mortar lining to match quality, thickness, and bonding of original lining in accordance with AWWA C104.
1. When lining cannot be repaired or repairs are defective, replace defective piping with undamaged piping.
END OF SECTION
Reinforced Concrete Pipe: ASTM C76
15229-1 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15229 (DraftFinal) SECTION 15229
REINFORCED CONCRETE PIPE: ASTM C76
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes: Reinforced concrete gravity piping with plastic liner.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. ASTM International (ASTM):
1. C76 - Standard Specification for Reinforced Concrete Culvert, Storm Drain, and Sewer Pipe.
2. C150 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement.
3. C361 - Standard Specification for Reinforced Concrete Low-Head Pressure Pipe.
4. D297 - Standard Test Methods for Rubber Products-Chemical Analysis.
5. D395 - Standard Test Methods for Rubber Property-Compression Set.
6. D412 - Standard Test Methods for Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic Elastomers-Tension.
7. D2240 - Standard Test Method for Rubber Property-Durometer Hardness.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit as specified in Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures.
B. Shop drawings:
1. Detailed layout drawings including listing of connector pipes with size and D-Load of pipe, stations where pipe joins mainline, and number of sections of pipe, length of sections, type of sections indicating straight, horizontal bevel, vertical bevel, or other type; pipe stubs; gasket shape and size; and liner details.
2. Gasket specifications.
3. Design calculations.
C. Provide Manufacturer’s Certificate of Source Testing as specified in Section 01756 - Commissioning. Include:
1. Cement mill certificates for each load of cement delivered showing specification, type, chemical analysis, and quantity; or for stockpiled pipe, certification that cement meets Specifications.
2. Cement content compliance with yield to cubic yard of concrete.
3. Lack of calcium chloride or admixtures.
4. Admixture approval.
5. Reinforcing steel mill certificates showing heat numbers, chemical analysis, and physical tests; or for stockpiled pipe, certification that steel meets or exceeds specifications.
6. Gasket test results showing physical properties.
Reinforced Concrete Pipe: ASTM C76
15229-2 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15229 (DraftFinal) D. Provide Manufacturer’s Certificate of Installation and Functionality Compliance as specified in Section 01756 - Commissioning.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer qualifications: Manufacture of proposed products for minimum 5 years with satisfactory performance record.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Maintain struts and other protective methods to prevent the formation of cracks larger than the specified tolerances.
B. Handle pipe with exterior slings or suitable forklifts.
1. Do not use interior hooks or slings when lifting pipe.
C. Store cement in weathertight, dry, well-ventilated structures.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
A. Determine reinforcement required for adequate pipe wall thicknesses and to support anticipated loads.
B. Calculate reinforcing steel and load requirements without consideration for sacrificial lining.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Portland cement, aggregate, water, and steel: ASTM C76, with following exceptions:
1. Cement: ASTM C150, Type II, low alkali.
2. Admixtures: Without calcium chloride.
B. Gaskets: ASTM C361; o-ring type; diameter as indicated within 1/32 inch; with synthetic rubber compound containing minimum 50 percent neoprene by volume and no deleterious substances, and having the following characteristics:
1. Tensile strength: Minimum 1,900 pounds per square inch when tested in accordance with ASTM D412.
2. Elongation at break: Minimum 425 percent when tested in accordance with ASTM D412.
3. Durometer hardness: Maximum Type A Shore of 55 within 3 when tested in accordance with ASTM D2240.
4. Compression set: Maximum 20 percent after aging by the oxygen-pressure chamber for 96 hours, at 158 within 1.8 degrees Fahrenheit, and 300 pounds per square inch within 15 pounds per square inch, and tested in accordance with ASTM D395, Method B, except with 1/2-inch long disc of gasket stock.
5. Aged tensile strength: Maximum 80 percent of pre-aged strength after aging by the oxygen-pressure chamber for 96 hours, at 158 within 1.8 degrees Reinforced Concrete Pipe: ASTM C76
15229-3 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15229 (DraftFinal) Fahrenheit, and 300 pounds per square inch, and tested in accordance with ASTM D395, Method B, except with 1/2-inch long disc of gasket stock.
6. Aged durometer hardness: Maximum Type A Shore of 63 within 3, after aging in an oxygen-pressure chamber for 96 hours, at 158 within 1.8 degrees Fahrenheit, and 300 pounds per square inch within 15 pounds per square inch, and tested in accordance with ASTM D2240.
7. Specific gravity: From 1.29 to 1.31 when tested in accordance with ASTM D297.
C. Curing compound: As specified in Section 03300 - Cast-in-Place Concrete.
2.03 MIXES
A. Pipe concrete: Minimum 564 pounds cement per cubic yard of concrete, and water to produce a maximum 4-inch slump.
B. Reject lumpy concrete.
C. Allow concrete to cool to below 150 degrees Fahrenheit before use.
2.04 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate pipe in accordance with ASTM C76 as modified by the Contract Documents with Class and diameter indicated on the Drawings.
B. Fabricate pipe by vertical wet-cast or centrifugally spun process.
1. Do not use Tamped or Packer Head method.
C. Form rectangular grooves to be filled substantially with gaskets, and to compress and confine gaskets; while not reducing concrete cover over reinforcing.
D. Wrap steel reinforcement with maximum of 5 percent less wraps than wraps indicated on shop drawings.
E. Plainly mark manufacturer's identification, D-Load, class of pipe, and date poured inside pipe sections.
F. Vibrate, spade, or compact concrete against liner carefully to protect liner and to produce a dense, homogeneous concrete that securely anchors liner anchors.
G. Cure concrete by one of the following methods:
1. Steam curing:
a. Provide adequate steam plant, piping, enclosures, and other facilities for curing pipe.
b. Maintain enclosures between 110 and 150 degrees Fahrenheit continuously with maximum rate of rise of 30 degrees per hour. c. Equip steam-curing enclosures with 7-day recording thermometers. d. Cure pipe when concrete has attained an initial set, but not sooner than 1 hour or later than 8 hours after placing of concrete.
Reinforced Concrete Pipe: ASTM C76
15229-4 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15229 (DraftFinal)
2. Water cure:
a. When water curing is not started immediately, seal concrete surfaces with curing compound.
b. Keep pipe moist during daylight hours.
c. Cover pipe, including ends, with burlap for the first 3 days, or keep pipe constantly and completely wet with fog spray during daylight hours.
2.05 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Require scales used to proportion materials to be calibrated and sealed by the government agency having jurisdiction over weights and measures.
B. Provide satisfactory facilities for identifying, inspection, and sampling cement at the mill, warehouse, and manufacturing site; and concrete at the manufacturing site.
1. Engineer may inspect cement and obtain samples for testing at the mill, warehouse, and pipe-manufacturing site.
2. Engineer may inspect concrete and obtain samples for testing at the manufacture site.
C. Pipe acceptance: Based on plant load-bearing tests, material tests, and inspection of pipe for defects in accordance with ASTM C76 as modified by the Contract Documents.
D. Concrete cylinder tests:
1. In accordance with ASTM C76.
2. Allow for a reasonable number of additional cylinders for testing by Owner.
E. Edge bearing tests: Perform a minimum of two, 3-edge bearing tests and determine the load needed to produce a 0.01-inch crack for each size of pipe.
F. Cracks:
1. Sanitary sewer pipe:
a. Reject sanitary sewer pipe with cracks that go through pipe walls, regardless of length of cracks.
b. Repair single end cracks that do not exceed the depth of joints as measured from ends to inside shoulders.
2. Other pipe:
a. Reject pipe with cracks extending through pipe walls and extending for more than 1 foot; cracks measuring 0.01-inch wide, 1/16 inch or more deep, and 1 foot or more long; hairline cracks to reinforcing steel; and cracks longer than half the length of pipe.
3. Repair pipe with single continuous hairline cracks longer than 1 foot, and not extending to reinforcing steel.
G. Porous areas:
1. Remove porous or honeycomb concrete areas 6 inches in or less in diameter or in longest dimension, and repair areas.
2. Reject pipe with larger porous or honeycomb concrete areas.
Reinforced Concrete Pipe: ASTM C76
15229-5 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15229 (DraftFinal) PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. General:
1. Lay pipe as specified in Section 15052 - Common Work Results for General Piping and this Section.
2. Curves, bends, and closures:
a. Make long radius curves by deflecting joints of straight pipe. 1) Limit deflections to maximum 3/4-inch joint openings for 36-inch diameter pipe and larger.
b. Make short radius curves by using straight pipe with beveled joints. 1) Limit bevels to 5 degrees.
c. Make shorter radius curves and closures by using fabricated specials. d. Install pipe so pipe joints fall on radii indicated on the Drawings.
END OF SECTION
Plastic Piping and Tubing
15230-1 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15230 (DraftFinal) SECTION 15230
PLASTIC PIPING AND TUBING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes: Plastic pipe, tubing, and fittings for systems that are not plumbing systems.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME):
1. B16.12 - Cast Iron Threaded Drainage Fittings.
B. ASTM International (ASTM):
1. D1784 - Standard Specification for Rigid Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Compounds and Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Compounds.
2. D1785 - Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40, 80 and 120.
3. D1869 - Standard Specification for Rubber Rings for Asbestos-Cement Pipe.
4. D2412 - Standard Test Method for Determination of External Loading Characteristics of Plastic Pipe by Parallel-Plate Loading.
5. D2466 - Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 40.
6. D2467 - Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80.
7. D2513 - Standard Specification for Thermoplastic Gas Pressure Pipe, Tubing and Fittings.
8. D2564 - Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Piping Systems.
9. D2665 - Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Drain, Waste, and Vent Pipe and Fittings.
10. D2855 - Standard Practice for the Two-Step (Primer and Solvent Cement) Method of Joining Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) or Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Pipe and Piping Components with Tapered Sockets.
11. D3034 - Standard Specification for Type PSM Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings.
12. D3212 - Standard Specification for Joints for Drain and Sewer Plastic Pipes Using Flexible Elastomeric Seals.
13. D3261 - Standard Specification for Butt Heat Fusion Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Fittings for Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe and Tubing.
14. D3350 - Standard Specification for Polyethylene Plastic Pipes and Fittings Materials.
15. D4101 - Standard Specification for Polypropylene Injection and Extrusion Materials.
16. F438 - Standard Specification for Socket-Type Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 40.
Plastic Piping and Tubing
15230-2 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15230 (DraftFinal)
17. F439 - Standard Specification for Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80.
18. F441 - Standard Specification for Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40 and 80.
19. F477 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Seals (Gaskets) for Joining Plastic Pipe.
20. F493 - Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe and Fittings.
21. F645 - Standard Guide for Selection, Design and Installation of Thermoplastic Water-Pressure Piping Systems.
22. F679 - Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Large-Diameter Plastic Gravity Sewer Pipe and Fittings.
23. F714 - Standard Specification for Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe (SDR-PR) Based on Outside Diameter.
C. American Water Works Association (AWWA):
1. C900 - Standard for Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe and Fabricated Fittings, 4 Inches to 12 Inches, for Water Transmission Distribution.
D. NSF International (NSF).
E. Plastics Pipe Institute (PPI):
1. TR 31 - Underground Installation of Polyolefin Piping.
1.03 ABBREVIATIONS
A. ABS: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene.
B. CPVC: Chlorinated polyvinyl chloride.
C. DR: Dimension ratio.
D. DWV: Drain, waste, and vent.
E. HDPE: High-density polyethylene.
F. ID: Inside diameter of piping or tubing.
G. NPS: Nominal pipe size followed by the size designation.
H. NS: Nominal size of piping or tubing.
I. PE: Polyethylene.
J. PP: Polypropylene.
K. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride.
L. SDR: Standard dimension ratio; the outside diameter divided by the pipe wall thickness.
Plastic Piping and Tubing
15230-3 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15230 (DraftFinal)
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit as specified in Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures.
B. Product data: As specified in Section 15052 - Common Work Results for General Piping.
C. Shop Drawings:
1. Describe materials, pipe, fittings, gaskets, and solvent cement.
2. Installation instructions.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Plastic pipe in potable water applications: Provide pipe and tubing bearing NSF seal.
B. Mark plastic pipe with nominal size, type, class, schedule, or pressure rating, manufacturer and all markings required in accordance with ASTM and AWWA standards.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect piping materials from sunlight, scoring, and distortion.
B. Do not allow surface temperatures on pipe and fittings to exceed 120 degrees Fahrenheit.
C. Store and handle pipe and fittings as recommended by manufacturer in published instructions.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Extruding and molding material: Virgin material containing no scrap, regrind, or rework material except where permitted in the referenced standards.
B. Fittings: Same material as the pipe and of equal or greater pressure rating, except that fittings used in drain, waste, and vent piping systems need not be pressure rated.
C. Unions 2-1/2 inches and smaller: Socket end screwed unions. Make unions 3 inches and larger of socket flanges with 1/8-inch full-face soft EPDM gasket.
2.02 PVC PIPING, SCHEDULE TYPE
A. The requirements for PVC piping used in plumbing systems are found in Section 15400 - Plumbing Systems.
Plastic Piping and Tubing
15230-4 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15230 (DraftFinal) B. Materials:
1. PVC Pipe: Designation PVC 1120 in accordance with ASTM D1785 and appendices:
a. Pipe and fittings: Extruded from Type I, Grade 1, Class 12454 material in accordance with ASTM D1784.
b. PVC Pipe: Schedule 80 unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings.
2. Fittings:
a. Supplied by pipe manufacturer.
b. Pressure fittings: In accordance with ASTM D2466 or ASTM D2467. c. DWV fittings: In accordance with ASTM D2665.
3. Solvent cement: In accordance with ASTM D2564:
a. Chemical service: For CPVC or PVC pipe in chemical service, provide the following primer and cement, or equal:
1) Primer: IPS Corp., Type P70.
2) Cement: IPS Corp., Type 724 cement or another cement certified by the manufacturer for chemical service.
2.03 PVC GRAVITY SEWER PIPING
A. The requirements for PVC piping used in plumbing systems are found in Section 15400 - Plumbing Systems.
B. Materials:
1. Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) gravity sewer pipe and fittings: In accordance with ASTM D3034 for piping NPS 15 and smaller diameter, and to ASTM F679 for piping NPS 18 and larger diameter:
a. Referenced standards apply as complemented and modified in this Section.
b. Fittings: Supplied by the pipe manufacturer.
2. PVC compounds: Class Number 12454, in accordance with ASTM D1784:
a. Stabilizers, antioxidants, lubricants, colorants, and other additives and fillers: Not to exceed 10 parts by weight per 100 of PVC resin in the compound.
3. Pipe NPS 15 and smaller diameter: Wall thickness SDR 26:
a. Joints: Push-on joints in accordance with ASTM D3212.
4. Pipe NPS 18 and larger diameter:
a. PVC compound: Cell classification 12454 in accordance with ASTM D1784.
b. Minimum wall thickness: Thickness T-1 in accordance with Table 1 in ASTM F679.
c. Joints: Integral bell gasketed joints in accordance with ASTM F679. d. Bell: Fabricated from pipe sections, thickness of the wall of the bell equivalent to the pipe wall thickness.
e. Gasket ring: Locked into the bell.
f. Spigot end of the pipe: Marked by the manufacturer to identify the final in-place position of the spigot in the bell.
5. Fittings, including wyes, tees, elbow caps, plug adapters, and manhole waterstops: Same wall thickness as the pipe:
a. Fittings: Factory molded with joints and gaskets equal to those of the pipe.
Plastic Piping and Tubing
15230-5 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15230 (DraftFinal)
6. Gasket: EPDM in accordance with ASTM D3212 or ASTM F477:
a. Keep rubber gasket in place during pipe joining.
7. Gasket for connection to manhole: Stainless steel clamp with gasket or similar device to seal the penetration.
2.04 CPVC PIPING
A. Materials:
1. CPVC pipe: Schedule 40 or Schedule 80, as specified, in accordance with ASTM F441 and Appendix, CPVC 4120:
a. Pipe: Extruded from Type IV, Grade 1, Class 23447 material in accordance with ASTM D1784.
b. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1) Charlotte Pipe and Foundry Co.
2) Eslon Thermoplastics, Inc.
3) GF Harvel.
2. Fittings: In accordance with ASTM F438 or ASTM F439 for pressure fittings, as appropriate to the service and pressure requirement:
a. Fittings: Supplied by the pipe manufacturer.
b. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1) Colonial Engineering.
2) Eslon Thermoplastics, Inc.
3) Chemtrol.
4) Spears Manufacturing Co.
3. Solvent cement: In accordance with ASTM F493:
a. For CPVC pipe in chemical service, utilize IPS Corp., Type 724 cement or another cement certified by the manufacturer for high strength hypochlorite service.
2.05 PFA TUBING AND FITTINGS
A. Materials:
1. Small bore PFA tubing: ASTM D 3307 Type II, Natural color, OD copper tubing size.
a. Plastic tubing ID as follows:
1) For NS 1/4 inch, ID of 0.125 inch.
2) For NS 5/16 inch, ID of 0.1875 inch.
3) For NS 3/8 inch, ID of 0.25 inch.
4) For NS 1/2 inch, ID of 0.375 inch.
5) For NS 3/4 inch, ID of 0.625 inch.
6) For NS 1 inch, ID of 0.875 inch.
7) For NS 1-1/8 inch, ID of 1 inch.
b. Fittings: Compression fittings.
c. Supplied in 1000 foot coiled lengths.
d. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1) Altaflo, Altraflour 400.
2) Parker Hannifin Corp., 104 Series Heavy Wall.
Plastic Piping and Tubing
15230-6 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15230 (DraftFinal)
2.06 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. The requirements for PVC piping used in plumbing systems are found in Section 15400 - Plumbing Systems.
B. PVC piping, Schedule Type:
1. Mark pipe and fittings in accordance with ASTM D1785.
C. PVC gravity sewer piping:
1. Mark pipe and fittings in accordance with ASTM D3034. Also mark the production control code on pipe and fittings.
D. CPVC piping:
1. Mark pipe and fittings in accordance with ASTM F441.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. General:
1. Where not otherwise specified, install piping in accordance with ASTM F645, or manufacturer's published instructions for installation of piping, as applicable to the particular type of piping.
2. Provide molded transition fittings for transitions from plastic to metal or IPS pipe. Do not thread plastic pipe.
3. Locate unions where indicated on the Drawings, and elsewhere where required for adequate access and assembly of the piping system.
4. Provide serrated nipples for transition from plastic pipe to rubber hose.
B. Installation of PVC piping, Schedule Type:
1. The requirements for PVC piping used in plumbing systems are found in Section 15400 - Plumbing Systems.
2. Solvent weld joints in accordance with ASTM D2855:
a. For PVC pipe in chemical service use IPS Corp., Type 724 cement in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
3. Install piping in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions.
C. Installation of PVC gravity sewer piping:
1. The requirements for PP piping used in plumbing systems are found in Section 15400 - Plumbing Systems.
2. Install piping in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions, as modified and complemented in this Section.
3. Install pipe and fittings not later than 4 months after their manufacture.
4. Provide for contraction and expansion at joints with a gasket ring.
5. Provide plugs or caps for stubs and branch pipes left unconnected to laterals.
6. Lubricate and assemble joints in accordance with the pipe manufacturer's published instructions.
Plastic Piping and Tubing
15230-7 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15230 (DraftFinal)
7. Make connections to manholes with a manhole gasket that prevents infiltration and exfiltration through the penetrations:
a. Provide opening for connection large enough to allow subsequent grouting around the manhole gasket.
b. Grout around the manhole gasket and seal the opening.
D. Installation of CPVC piping:
1. Clean dirt and moisture from pipe and fittings.
2. Bevel pipe ends in accordance with manufacturer's instructions with chamfering tool or file. Remove burrs.
3. Use solvent cement and primer formulated for CPVC:
a. For CPVC pipe in chemical service use IPS Corp., Type 724 cement in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
4. Use primer on pressure and non-pressure joints.
5. Do not solvent weld joints when ambient temperatures are below 40 degrees Fahrenheit or above 90 degrees Fahrenheit unless solvent cements specially formulated for these conditions are utilized.
3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Leakage test for PVC piping:
1. The requirements for PVC piping used in plumbing systems are found in Section 15400 - Plumbing Systems.
2. Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) piping: Subject to visible leaks test and to pressure test with maximum leakage allowance, as specified in Section 15956 - Piping Systems Testing.
3. Pressure test with maximum leakage allowance: Perform test after backfilling:
a. Pressure: 125 pounds per square inch, gauge.
b. Maximum leakage allowance as follows, wherein the value for leakage is in gallons per 100 joints per hour:
NPS, Inches 1-1/2 2 2-1/2 3 4 6 8 10 12
Leakage 0.41 0.52 0.63 0.76 0.98 1.45 1.88 2.35 2.80
B. Mandrel tests for PVC gravity sewer piping:
1. The requirements for PVC piping used in plumbing systems are found in Section 15400 - Plumbing Systems.
2. Perform initial mandrel test:
a. After cleaning and completion of other tests.
b. After placement and compaction of backfill.
c. Before construction of pavement or surfacing.
d. Not sooner than 30 days after pipe installation.
e. Not later than 60 days after installation.
3. Perform final verification mandrel test:
a. Not sooner than 30 days before the end of the warranty period. b. Not later than 10 days before the end of the warranty period. c. Consider the final verification mandrel test a warranty service, and include the costs related to final verification mandrel test in the Contract Price.
Plastic Piping and Tubing
15230-8 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15230 (DraftFinal)
4. Utilize a 9 rod mandrel with minimum length equal to NPS and diameter as follows:
Nominal Pipe Size (NPS) Mandrel Diameter, inches
6 5.50
8 7.37
10 9.21
12 10.96
15 13.56
5. Test procedure: Pull the mandrel through the line under test by 1 person, by hand, with reasonable effort, without the aid of mechanical equipment.
6. Failing test: Where the mandrel test is not successful, remove and replace the section of piping with the obstruction; test the piping again, including visible leaks test, pressure test with maximum leakage allowance, mandrel tests, and other specified tests:
a. Correction of excessive deflection or obstructions by methods other than removal of the affected piping and replacement of the removed piping with new piping will not be accepted.
END OF SECTION
Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe: Gravity
15247-1 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15247 (DraftFinal) SECTION 15247
POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPE: GRAVITY
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes: Gravity sewer pipe and fittings in accordance with ASTM D3034 and ASTM F679 standards.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. ASTM International (ASTM):
1. C923 - Standard Specification for Resilient Connectors Between Reinforced Concrete Manhole Structures, Pipes, and Laterals.
2. D1784 - Standard Specification for Rigid Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Compounds and Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Compounds.
3. D2321 - Standard Practice for Underground Installation of Thermoplastic Pipe for Sewers and Other Gravity-Flow Applications.
4. D3034 - Standard Specification for Type PSM Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings.
5. D3212 - Standard Specification for Joints for Drain and Sewer Plastic Pipes Using Flexible Elastomeric Seals.
6. F477 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Seals (Gaskets) for Joining Plastic Pipe.
7. F679 - Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Large-Diameter Plastic Gravity Sewer Pipe and Fittings.
1.03 ABBREVIATIONS
A. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride.
B. SDR: Standard dimension ratio; the outside diameter divided by the pipe wall thickness.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit as specified in Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures.
B. Product data: As specified in Section 15052 - Common Work Results for General Piping.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect from sunlight, scoring, and distortion.
B. Do not allow surface temperatures to exceed 120 degrees Fahrenheit.
C. Store and handle as recommended by manufacturer in published instructions.
Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe: Gravity
15247-2 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15247 (DraftFinal) PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 PIPE
A. Extruding and molding material: Virgin material containing no scrap, regrind, or rework material except where permitted in the referenced standards.
B. PVC compound: Cell classification 12454-C in accordance with ASTM D1784.
C. Stabilizers, antioxidants, lubricants, colorants, and other additives and fillers not to exceed 10 parts by weight per 100 of PVC resin in the compound.
D. Pipe less than or equal to 15-inch diameter:
1. In accordance with ASTM D3034.
2. Wall thickness SDR 26 or as specified in the Piping Schedule on the Drawings.
3. Joints: Push-on in accordance with ASTM D3212.
a. Integral bell.
b. Factory installed gaskets meeting the requirements in accordance with ASTM F477.
2.02 FITTINGS
A. Same material as the pipe.
B. Minimum wall thickness: Same as the minimum wall thickness of the equivalent size pipe as specified in Table 1 of ASTM F679.
C. Supplied by the pipe manufacturer.
D. Factory molded with joints and gaskets equal to those of the pipe.
E. Gasket:
1. In accordance with ASTM F477.
2. Manhole adapter gasket: Stainless steel clamp with gasket or similar device to seal the penetration.
F. Flexible gaskets for precast bases with a flexible pipe connection: In accordance with ASTM C923:
1. Manufacturer: One of the following or approved equal:
a. Press-Seal Gasket Corp.: PSX.
b. A-Lok Premium.
G. Waterstop grouting rings:
1. Manufacturer: One of the following or approved equal:
a. NPC.
b. Press-Seal Gasket Corp.
Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe: Gravity
15247-3 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15247 (DraftFinal)
2.03 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Mark pipe and fittings in accordance with ASTM D3034 and ASTM F679 as appropriate.
B. Mark the production control code on pipe and fittings.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. General:
1. Install piping in accordance with ASTM D2321 and manufacturer's published installation instructions.
2. Provide plugs or caps for stubs and branch pipes left unconnected to laterals.
3. Lubricate and assemble joints in accordance with the pipe manufacturer's published instructions.
4. Trenching and backfill as specified in Section 02318 - Trenching.
5. For open cut installations, install underground warning tape as specified in Section 15076 - Pipe Identification.
6. Install pipe with tracer wire as specified in Section 15076 - Pipe Identification.
B. Connections to manholes:
1. Make connections to manholes with a manhole gasket that prevents infiltration and exfiltration through the penetrations using 1 of the following methods:
a. Precast bases with a flexible pipe connection:
1) Pipe connectors shall be cast into the base.
a) Pipe openings shall contain flexible gaskets.
2) Follow manufacturer's recommendation for lubrication to prevent damage to the gasket during pipe insertion.
3) When PSX gaskets are used, the take-up screws for the gasket clamps shall be positioned a minimum of 90 degrees apart. 4) Install and grout in place per manufacturer's instructions. b. Cast in place or precast bases using grouting rings:
1) Provide opening for connection large enough to allow subsequent grouting around the grouting ring.
2) Grout around the pipe penetration manhole gasket and seal the opening.
3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Test pipe as specified in Section 15956 - Piping Systems Testing.
B. Mandrel tests:
1. Perform initial mandrel test:
a. After cleaning and completion of other tests.
b. After placement and compaction of backfill.
c. Before construction of pavement or surfacing.
d. Not sooner than 30 days after pipe installation.
e. Not later than 60 days after installation.
Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe: Gravity
15247-4 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15247 (DraftFinal)
2. Perform final verification mandrel test:
3. Not sooner than 30 days before the end of the warranty period.
4. Not later than 10 days before the end of the warranty period.
5. Consider the final verification mandrel test a warranty service, and include the costs related to final verification mandrel test in the Contract Price.
6. Utilize a 9 rod mandrel with minimum length equal to NPS and diameter as follows:
Nominal Pipe Size (NPS) Mandrel Dia (in) (SDR
35/PS46)
Mandrel Dia (in) (SDR
26/PS 115)
6 5.45 5.33
8 7.28 7.11
10 9.08 8.87
12 10.79 10.55
15 13.20 12.90
18 16.13 15.76
21 19.00 18.57
24 21.36 20.87
27 24.06 23.51
30 27.68 27.04
7. Test procedure: Pull the mandrel through the line under test by 1 person, by hand, with reasonable effort, without the aid of mechanical equipment.
8. Failing test: Where the mandrel test is not successful, remove and replace the section of piping with the obstruction; test the piping again, including visible leaks test, pressure test with maximum leakage allowance, mandrel tests, and other specified tests:
a. Correction of excessive deflection or obstructions by methods other than removal of the affected piping and replacement of the removed piping with new piping will not be accepted.
END OF SECTION
Stainless Steel Pipe and Tubing
15286-1 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15286 (DraftFinal) SECTION 15286
STAINLESS STEEL PIPE AND TUBING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
1. Stainless steel piping and tubing.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME):
1. B16.1 - Gray Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: Classes 25, 125, and 250.
2. B16.5 - Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: NPS 1/2 through NPS 24, Metric/Inch Standard.
3. B16.11 - Forged Fittings, Socket-Welding and Threaded.
4. B31.3 - Process Piping.
5. B36.19 - Stainless Steel Pipe.
B. ASTM International (ASTM):
1. A182 - Standard Specification for Forged or Rolled Alloy and Stainless Steel Pipe Flanges, Forged Fittings, and Valves and Parts for High-Temperature Service.
2. A193 - Standard Specification for Alloy-Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting for High Temperature or High Pressure Service and Other Special Purpose Applications.
3. A194 - Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts and Bolts for High Pressure or High Temperature Service, or Both.
4. A240 - Standard Specification for Chromium and Chromium-Nickel Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels and for General Applications.
5. A269 - Standard Specification for Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubing for General Service.
6. A276 - Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes.
7. A312 - Standard Specification for Seamless, Welded, and Heavily Cold Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Pipes.
8. A351 - Standard Specification for Castings, Austenitic, for Pressure-Containing Parts.
9. A380 - Standard Practice for Cleaning, Descaling, and Passivation of Stainless Steel Parts, Equipment, and Systems.
10. A403 - Standard Specification for Wrought Austenitic Stainless Steel Piping Fittings.
11. A743 - Standard Specification for Castings, Iron-Chromium, Iron-Chromium-Nickel, Corrosion Resistant, for General Application.
12. A744 - Standard Specification for Castings, Iron-Chromium-Nickel, Corrosion Resistant, for Severe Service.
Stainless Steel Pipe and Tubing
15286-2 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15286 (DraftFinal)
13. A774 - Standard Specification for As-Welded Wrought Austenitic Stainless Steel Fittings for General Corrosive Services at Low and Moderate Temperatures.
14. A778 - Standard Specification for Welded, Unannealed Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubular Products.
15. A789 - Standard Specification for Seamless and Welded Ferritic/Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubing for General Service.
16. A790 - Standard Specification for Seamless and Welded Ferritic/Austenitic Stainless Steel Pipe.
17. A928 - Standard Specification for Ferritic/Austenitic (Duplex) Stainless Steel Pipe Electric Fusion Welded with Addition of Filler Metal.
18. A967 - Standard Specification for Chemical Passivation Treatments for Stainless Steel Parts.
19. B622 - Standard Specification for Seamless Nickel and Nickel-Cobalt Alloy Pipe and Tube.
20. F593 - Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bolts, Hex Cap Screws, and Studs.
C. American Welding Society (AWS):
1. D1.6 - Structural Welding Code - Stainless Steel.
D. NSF International (NSF):
1. Standard 61 - Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit as specified in Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures.
B. Product data: As specified in Section 15052 - Common Work Results for General Piping.
C. Shop Drawings:
1. Detailed layout drawings:
a. Dimensions and alignment of pipes.
b. Location of valves, fittings, and appurtenances.
c. Location of field joints.
d. Location of pipe hangars and supports.
e. Connections to equipment and structures.
f. Location and details of shop welds.
2. Thickness and dimensions of fittings and gaskets.
3. Photographs, drawings, and descriptions of pipe, fittings, welding procedures, and pickling and passivating procedures.
4. Material specifications for pipe, gaskets, fittings, and couplings.
5. Data on joint types and components used in the system including grooved joint couplings and screwed joints.
D. Field welding references:
1. Welder and weld operator qualification certificates and welding procedures.
Stainless Steel Pipe and Tubing
15286-3 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15286 (DraftFinal) PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
A. Piping layout: Lay out and fabricate piping systems with piping sections as long as possible, while still allowing shipment, so that joints are minimized.
1. Piping design indicated on the Drawings illustrates piping layout and configuration and does not indicate the location of every joint and flexible coupling that may be needed to connect piping sections fabricated in the shop.
2. Where joints and couplings are specifically indicated on the Drawings, design and shop-fabricate piping sections utilizing the joint or coupling illustrated at the locations shown.
3. Add joints and flexible couplings in a manner that achieves intent of maximizing size of individual piping sections.
B. Shop fabrication: Fabricate piping sections in the shop and pickle and passivate at point of manufacture.
C. Field assembly:
1. Field welding is prohibited.
2.02 STAINLESS STEEL PIPE
A. General:
1. Pipe sizes specified in the Specifications and indicated on the Drawings are nominal.
B. Wall thickness:
1. As specified in Section 15052 - Common Work Results for General Piping.
C. Piping material and manufacturing:
1. Comply with the requirements outlined in the following table:
Service Stainless Steel Grade
Pipe Manufacturing
Process
For low chloride water service with chloride concentrates below 200 parts per million and/or free chlorine less than 2 parts per million at ambient temperatures.
Piping 3 inches in nominal
diameter and larger
Type 304L stainless steel in
accordance with ASTM A240
In accordance with
ASTM A778
Piping less than 3 inches in
nominal diameter
Type 304L stainless steel in
accordance with ASTM A240
In accordance with
ASTM A312
Digester Gas, Oxygen and Ozone Service, Membrane and Reverse Osmosis Filtration Systems with chloride concentrations less than 1,000 parts per million and/or free chlorine less than 4 parts per million at ambient temperatures.
Piping 3 inches in nominal
diameter and larger
Type 316L or LDX 2101
stainless steel in accordance
with ASTM A240
Type 316L in accordance
with ASTM A778
Type LDX 2101 in
accordance with ASTM A790
Stainless Steel Pipe and Tubing
15286-4 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15286 (DraftFinal) Service Stainless Steel Grade
Pipe Manufacturing
Process
Piping less than 3 inches in
nominal diameter
Type 316L or LDX 2101
stainless steel in accordance
with ASTM A240
Type 316L in accordance
with ASTM A312
Type LDX 2101 in
accordance with ASTM A790
Brackish water Membrane and Reverse Osmosis Membrane Filtration Systems with chloride concentrations between 1,000 and 10,000 parts per million.
All piping diameters Austenitic or duplex grades of
material with PREN greater
than 33
In accordance with
ASTM A312, ASTM A778,
ASTM A790, or ASTM A928
Brackish and Seawater Membrane and Reverse Osmosis Membrane Filtration Systems with chloride concentrations between 10,000 to 20,000 parts per million All piping diameters Austenitic and duplex grades
of material with PREN
greater than 40
In accordance with
ASTM A312, ASTM A790 or
ASTM A928
Brackish and Seawater Reverse Osmosis Concentrate (i.e., Brine) with chloride concentrations greater than 20,000 parts per million
All piping diameters Austenitic and duplex grades
of material with PREN
greater than 45
In accordance with
ASTM A312, ASTM A778,
ASTM A790, or ASTM A928
PREN: Pitting Resistance Equivalency Number
PREN = Cr% + (3.3 x Mo%) + (16 x N%)
UNS # Alloy Cr% Mo% N% Other PREN
N10276 C-276 14.5-16 15-17 - W 3-4.5 64
S32750 Alloy 2507 24-26 6-8 0.24-0.32 - 48
S32654 654SMO 24-25 7-8 - - 47
N06625 Alloy 625 20-23 8-10 - Cb 3.25-4.15 46
N08366 AL6XN 20-22 6-7 - - 40
N06985 Alloy G 21-23.5 5.5-7.5 - - 39
S32760 Zeron 100 24-26 3-4 0.2-0.3 W 0.5-1.0 37
S32205 Alloy 2205 22-23 3-3.5 0.14-0.20 - 34
N08904 904L 19-23 4-5 - - 32
S31726 317LNM 17-20 4-5 0.1-0.2 - 32
N08825 Alloy 825 19-23.5 2.5-3.5 - - 27
S32101 LDX-2101 21.5 0.3 0.22 - 26
S31603 316L 16-18 2-3 - - 23
S30403 304L 18-20 - - - 18
Stainless Steel Pipe and Tubing
15286-5 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15286 (DraftFinal) D. Fittings for piping less than 3 inches in diameter:
1. Material: In accordance with ASTM A240 stainless steel, grade to match the pipe.
2. Manufacturing standard: In accordance with ASTM A403, Class WP.
3. Wall thickness and dimensions of fitting: In accordance with ASME B16.11 and as required for the schedule of pipe specified.
4. End configuration: As needed to comply with specified type of joint.
5. Forgings in accordance with ASTM A182, or barstock in accordance with ASTM A276. Match forging or barstock material to the piping materials.
E. Piping joints:
1. Joints in piping 2 inches in diameter and smaller: grooved, welded,press fit, or screwed with Teflon™ tape thread lubricant, as specified in Section 15052 - Common Work Results for General Piping.
F. Gaskets:
1. Aeration air service: As specified in Section 15052 - Common Work Results for General Piping.
2. All other service applications: EPDM, nitrile, or other materials compatible with the process fluid.
a. Drinking water applications: NSF Standard 61 compliant materials only.
G. Fabrication of pipe sections:
1. Welding: Weld in accordance with ASME B31.3.
2. Weld seams:
a. Full penetration welds, free of oxidation, crevices, pits and cracks, and without undercuts.
b. Provide weld crowns of 1/16 inch with tolerance of plus 1/16 inch and minus 1/32 inch.
c. Where internal weld seams are not accessible, use gas tungsten-arc procedures with internal gas purge.
d. Where internal weld seams are accessible, weld seams inside and outside using manual shielded metal-arc procedures.
H. Cleaning (pickling) and passivation:
1. Following shop fabrication of pipe sections, straight spools, fittings, and other piping components, clean (pickle) and passivate fabricated pieces.
2. Clean (pickle) and passivate in accordance with ASTM A380 or ASTM A967. a. If degreasing is required before cleaning to remove scale or iron oxide, cleaning (pickling) treatments with citric acid are permissible. 1) However, these treatments must be followed by inorganic cleaners such as nitric acid/hydrofluoric acid.
b. Passivation treatments with citric acid are not allowed.
3. Finish requirements: Remove free iron, heat tint oxides, weld scale, and other impurities, and obtain a passive finished surface.
2.03 STAINLESS STEEL TUBING
A. Stainless steel tubing:
1. Seamless tubing made of Type 316L stainless steel and in accordance with ASTM A269, wall thickness not less than 0.035 inch.
Stainless Steel Pipe and Tubing
15286-6 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15286 (DraftFinal) B. Fittings: Swage ferrule design:
1. Components made of:
a. Type 316 stainless steel.
2. Double acting ferrule design, providing both a primary seal and a secondary bearing force.
3. Flare type fittings are not acceptable.
4. Manufacturers: One of the following, or equal:
a. Crawford Fitting Co., Swagelok.
b. Hoke, Gyrolok.
c. Parker, CPI.
C. Valves for use with stainless steel tubing:
1. Ball type valves with swage ends to match tubing diameter.
2. Constructed from:
a. Type 316 stainless steel with TFE seats.
3. Manufacturers: The following or equal:
a. Crawford Fitting Co., Swagelok.
2.04 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Visually inspect pipe for welding defects such as crevices, pits, cracks, protrusions, and oxidation deposits.
B. Provide written certification that the pipe as supplied are in accordance with ASTM A778. Supplemental testing is not required.
C. Provide written certification that the fittings as supplied are in accordance with ASTM A774.
1. Supplementary testing is not required.
D. Thoroughly clean any equipment before use in cleaning or fabrication of stainless steel.
E. Storage: Segregate location of stainless steel piping from fabrication of any other piping materials.
F. Shipment to site:
1. Protect pipe ends by encapsulating in dense foam.
2. Securely strap all elements to pallets with nylon straps. Use of metallic straps is prohibited.
3. Cap ends of tube, piping, pipe spools, fittings, and valves with non-metallic plugs.
4. Load pallets so no tube, piping, pipe spools, fittings, or valves bear the weight of pallets above.
5. Notify Engineer when deliveries arrive so Engineer may inspect the shipping conditions.
6. Engineer may reject material due to improper shipping methods or damage during shipment.
Stainless Steel Pipe and Tubing
15286-7 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15286 (DraftFinal) PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install piping in such a manner as not to impart strain to connected equipment.
B. Slope horizontal lines so that they can be drained completely.
C. Provide valve drains at low points in piping systems.
D. Install eccentric reducers where necessary to facilitate draining of piping system.
E. Provide access for inspection and flushing of piping systems to remove sediment, deposits, and debris.
3.02 FIELD ASSEMBLY OF SHOP-FABRICATED PIPING SECTIONS
A. Join shop-fabricated piping sections together using backing flanges, flexible couplings, flanged coupling adapters, grooved couplings, or flanges.
3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Test piping to pressure and by method as specified in Section 15052 - Common Work Results for General Piping.
1. If pressure testing is accomplished with water:
a. Use only potable quality water.
b. Piping: Thoroughly drained and dried or place immediately into service.
B. Visually inspect pipe for welding defects such as crevices, pits, cracks, protrusions, and oxidation deposits.
3.04 PROTECTION
A. Preserve appearance and finish of stainless steel piping by providing suitable protection during handling and installation and until final acceptance of the Work.
1. Use handling methods and equipment to prevent damage to the coating, include the use of wide canvas slings and wide padded skids.
2. Do not use bare cables, chains, hooks, metal bars, or narrow skids.
3. Store stainless steel piping and fittings away from any other piping or metals.
Storage in contact with ground or outside without projection from bad weather is prohibited.
4. Protect stainless steel piping and fittings from carbon steel projections (when grinding carbon steel assemblies in proximity) and carbon steel contamination (do not contact stainless steel with carbon steel wire brush or other carbon steel tool).
END OF SECTION
Corrosion Protection Isolation
15320-1 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15320 (DraftFinal) SECTION 15320
CORROSION PROTECTION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
1. Galvanic anode cathodic protection systems.
2. Corrosion protection isolation.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME):
1. B1.1 - Unified Inch Screw Threads (UN, UNR, and UNJ Thread Forms).
2. B1.20.1 - Pipe Threads, General Purpose, Inch.
B. American Water Works Association (AWWA):
1. C217 - Petrolatum and Petrolatum Wax Tape Coatings for the Exterior of Connections and Fittings for Steel Water Pipelines.
C. Association for Materials Protection and Performance (AMPP) (formerly NACE):
1. SP0104 - The Use of Coupons for Cathodic Protection Monitoring Applications.
2. SP0169 - Control of External Corrosion on Underground or Submerged Metallic Piping Systems.
3. SP0286 - Electrical Isolation of Cathodically Protected Pipelines.
4. TM0113 - Evaluating the Accuracy of Field-Grade Reference Electrodes.
5. TM0497 - Measurement Techniques Related to Criteria for Cathodic Protection on Underground or Submerged Metallic Piping Systems.
D. ASTM International (ASTM):
1. B3 - Soft or Annealed Copper Wire.
2. B843- Magnesium Alloy Anodes for Cathodic Protection.
3. C33/C33M - Concrete Aggregates.
4. C94 - Ready-Mixed Concrete.
5. D1248 - Polyethylene Plastics Extrusion Materials for Conductor and Cable.
6. F436 - Standard Specification for Hardened Steel Washers Inch and Metric Dimensions.
7. G97 - Evaluation of Magnesium Sacrificial Anode Test Specimens for Underground Applications.
8. G193 - Standard Terminology and Acronyms Relating to Corrosion.
E. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):
1. 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1,000 V Maximum).
F. NSF International (NSF):
1. 61/600 - Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects.
Corrosion Protection Isolation
15320-2 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15320 (DraftFinal) G. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL).
1.03 TERMINOLOGY
A. The words and terms listed below are not defined terms that require initial capital letters, but, when used in this Section, have the indicated meaning.
1. Bonded dielectric coating: Protective barrier coating system with high electrical resistivity bonded directly to underlying structure, acting to physically and electrically isolate metallic structure from electrolyte.
2. Cathodic protection:
a. Galvanic anode cathodic protection: Reduction of corrosion of metal in electrolyte by galvanically coupling to more anodic metal:
1) Also referred to as sacrificial or passive protection. b. Impressed current cathodic protection: Reduction of corrosion of metal in electrolyte by supplying DC current through external power source and employing impressed current anode.
1) Also referred to as active protection.
3. Electrical isolation: The condition of being electrically separate from other metallic structures (including, but not limited to, piping, reinforcement, casings) and the environment as defined in NACE SP0169.
4. Electrically continuous: A structure which has a linear electrical resistance equal to or less than the sum of the resistance of the structure plus the maximum allowable joint bond resistance for each bonded joint as specified in this Section.
5. Electrolyte: Electrically conductive solution, such as soil or water:
a. Terms for specific conductive solutions may be substituted for “electrolyte” in these definitions:
1) Conductive solutions include:
a) Water.
b) Soil.
c) Concrete.
d) Other conductive liquid medium.
6. Foreign structure: Buried structure not owned or operated by the Owner.
7. Reference electrode: Electrode whose open circuit potential is constant under similar conditions of measurement; used for measuring relative potentials of other electrodes (e.g., protected structures):
a. Sometimes referred to as reference half-cell.
b. Copper-copper sulfate reference electrode (CSE) is often used.
8. Structure-to-electrolyte potential:
a. Potential of structure in electrolyte as compared to potential of reference electrode contacting same electrolyte.
b. Static: Determined without any external current:
1) For instance: Prior to energizing cathodic protection system, and with no galvanic couple, pH cell, interference currents, or like present. 2) After such current source has been disconnected for an extended amount of time.
3) Also referred to as native.
c. Uncorrected: Determined with cathodic protection system energized and cathodic protection current flowing:
1) Also referred to as protective potential (ON potential) and may contain significant IR drop error.
Corrosion Protection Isolation
15320-3 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15320 (DraftFinal) d. Polarized: Determined after cathodic protection system has been energized, but immediately after cathodic protection current is interrupted:
1) Also referred to as “instant off” structure-to-electrolyte potential. e. Polarization: Change from static or native potential as result of current flow across electrode/electrolyte interface:
1) Also considered difference between polarized and native potentials.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish Submittals as specified in Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures and the Agreement and Contract RFP in Volumes 1 and 2.
B. Qualifications:
1. Cathodic protection technologist (NACE CP3) or cathodic protection specialist (NACE CP4) certifications for personnel conducting or directing testing and installation work.
a. Include list of verifiable experience with corrosion monitoring and cathodic protection.
C. Product data:
1. Include as a minimum:
a. Galvanic anodes.
b. Test station.
c. Shunts.
d. Variable resistors (if necessary).
e. Cables.
f. Continuity bonds.
g. Cable splice kits.
h. Cable labels.
i. Cable terminals.
j. Conduit.
k. Isolation flange kits.
l. Backfill materials.
m. Exothermic welding equipment (molds, cartridges, primer, caps). n. Dielectric coating systems for exothermic welds, metallurgical, and mechanical bonds.
o. Wax tape.
p. Corrosion coupon and holder.
q. Permanent reference electrode.
D. Installation instructions:
1. Provide manufacturer’s installation instructions.
E. Quality Control Submittals:
1. Testing data:
a. Indicated test equipment, test method, and criteria requirement used for each test.
b. Placement of reference electrode during each test (if applicable). c. Magnesium anode in accordance with ASTM G97 current capacity test results supplied by the manufacturer.
Corrosion Protection Isolation
15320-4 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15320 (DraftFinal) d. Results of tests conducted.
1) Locations of test stations, electrical continuity bonds, isolation. a) Use unique identifier and GPS coordinates.
b) Include type of test station.
c) List of cable identification in test stations.
2) Isolation checks before and after backfill.
3) Electrical continuity checks.
4) Native potential readings at each test station (for commissioning only).
5) ON and Instant-OFF potential readings at each test station. 6) Anode potentials.
7) Anode current output.
8) Coupon potential readings.
9) Permanent reference electrode checks.
10) Indicate that exothermic welds passed the strike test with a peen hammer.
11) Analysis and discussion of any deficiencies identified and recommendations to correct such deficiencies.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installation and testing conducted by or under direction of cathodic protection technologist (NACE CP3) or cathodic protection specialist (NACE CP4). Other qualified individuals may assist installation and testing personnel.
B. Materials, installation, and testing:
1. Consistent with corrosion engineering principles and practices in accordance with NACE TM0497, NACE TM0113, NACE SP0104, NACE SP0286, and NACE SP0169.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. As specified in the Agreement and Contract RFP in Volumes 1 and 2, and the manufacturer’s instructions.
B. Materials:
1. Store off the ground.
2. Protect against weather, condensation, and mechanical damage.
3. Handle with care.
4. Do not sharply bend or tightly coil wires.
5. Replace equipment or materials damaged in shipment or installation.
6. Isolation flange kits:
a. Do not store insulated flange gaskets at jobsites under direct sunlight or at temperatures exceeding 110 degrees Fahrenheit.
b. Protect against mechanical damage.
7. Anodes:
a. Shipped in waterproof bags or wrapping and shall remain dry until installation.
b. Coil the anode core cables and secure and package the anode in crates as required to prevent damage during shipping.
Corrosion Protection Isolation
15320-5 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15320 (DraftFinal) c. Ensure that the cable is not damaged and that the anodes or lead connection at the anode end are not physically stressed. d. If anode or anode core cables are damaged, replace the complete anode.
8. Anode backfill:
a. Bulk or bag shipping.
b. Shipped and stored in a manner to keep it dry in order to minimize it from freezing solid.
c. If bagged, provide and ship in waterproof bags.
d. Bags shall be UV resistant or protected with tarps to protect from UV exposure.
9. Reference electrodes:
a. Do not allow to freeze.
b. Store in a protected area.
c. Protect from UV exposure.
d. Utilize before shelf life expires.
1.07 WARRANTY
A. As specified in Section 01783 - Warranties and Bonds.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. Electrical items shall be UL listed or labeled, where such listing or labeling is obtainable.
B. Provide cathodic protection systems for the following features as indicated on the Drawings:
1. Campus Oaks:
a. Ductile iron 16-inch diameter PW pipe.
b. Ductile iron 10-inch diameter AF pipe.
2. Misty Wood:
a. Ductile iron 16-inch diameter PW pipe.
b. Ductile iron 10-inch diameter AF pipe.
C. Provide wax tape corrosion protection system for ductile iron pipe smaller than 6-inch diameter.
D. Provide electrical isolation for the following features as indicated on the Drawings:
1. Between cathodically protected and non-cathodically protected pipe.
2. At every change in pipe material type (i.e., steel to ductile iron).
3. Before and after entering/exiting buildings.
4. Before entering storage tanks or wells.
Corrosion Protection Isolation
15320-6 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15320 (DraftFinal)
2.02 DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
A. Provide corrosion-engineering services to furnish, install, and test galvanic cathodic protection systems:
1. Include electrical continuity bonds, isolation kits, test stations, and accessory equipment and features as directed in this Section, or otherwise indicated.
B. Galvanic cathodic protection systems shall provide a minimum service life of 20 years.
2.03 ANODES
A. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1. Anode Systems Company, Grand Junction, CO.
2. Farwest Corrosion Control, Downey, CA.
3. Galvotec, McAllen, TX.
4. MESA, Denver, CO.
B. Magnesium anodes shall be GA-MG-17 HP 17D3, or equal:
1. High potential, in accordance with ASTM B843, Grade M1C and conform to the following specifications:
TABLE 1 – HIGH POTENTIAL MAGNESIUM ANODE COMPOSITION
Aluminum (Al) 0.010% maximum
Manganese (Mn) 0.50 to 1.30%
Copper (Cu) 0.02% maximum
Nickel (Ni) 0.001% maximum
Iron (Fe) 0.03% maximum
Silicon (Si) 0.05% maximum
Other Impurities - each 0.3% maximum
Magnesium (Mg) Balance
2. Open circuit potential of -1.7 volts or more negative in reference to a copper-copper sulfate reference electrode.
3. Dimensions: Minimum bare weight of 17 pounds with an ingot length of
25.8 inches, height of 3.75 inches, and a width of 3.5 inches.
4. Anode backfill:
a. Furnish anodes prepackaged in special backfill material consisting of 75 percent ground hydrated gypsum, 20 percent powdered bentonite and 5 percent anhydrous sodium sulfate.
5. Factory anode-to-cable connection: Exposed mild steel core, and exposed copper cable potted in epoxy.
6. Silver-solder connection between anode cable and mild steel core.
7. Anode core cable:
a. Minimum of 50 feet in length or sufficient length to reach test station without being spliced, whichever is greater.
b. In accordance with Table 2 of this Section.
Corrosion Protection Isolation
15320-7 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15320 (DraftFinal)
2.04 TEST STATIONS
A. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1. Cott Manufacturing, Pittsburg, PA.
2. Farwest Corrosion Control, Downey, CA.
3. Gerome Electric Supply Co, Uniontown, PA.
4. Tinker & Rasor, New Braunfels, TX.
B. Test stations:
1. Specifically constructed for cathodic protection system installations and intended environment.
2. Protected as required for permanency.
3. Provide terminals and associated hardware for the number and size of cables and required accessories:
a. Provide a minimum of 7 terminals.
4. Terminal lugs shall be high conductivity copper alloy manufactured specifically for making electrical connections, such as:
a. Burndy Type KLU or KA4C lugs.
b. Ilsco Type SLU, SLUH, or CP-4 lugs.
5. Polycarbonate, above ground type:
a. Big Fink, ZapGard, Model T-3, or other.
6. Flush in-ground type:
a. Products:
1) Brooks Model 3RT.
2) Model G03.
b. Details:
1) As indicated on the Drawings.
2) Include test station inside of box.
2.05 CABLES
A. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1. Corpro Inc., Chicago, IL.
2. Farwest Corrosion Control, Downey, CA.
3. MESA Products, Tulsa, OK.
B. In accordance with ASTM B3.
C. Manufactured not more than 24 months prior to notice to proceed.
D. Single-conductor:
1. Stranded, plain, annealed copper cable.
E. Insulation:
1. Rated for 600 volts and direct immersion or burial.
2. In accordance with ASTM D1248.
3. Insulation as specified in Table 2.
F. Suitable lengths to permit installation from terminus to terminus (e.g., structure-to-test station or structure-to-structure) free of splices and without stress, unless otherwise specified.
Corrosion Protection Isolation
15320-8 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15320 (DraftFinal) G. Cable gauges:
1. Sizes are as specified in Table 2, unless otherwise specified.
TABLE 2 - CABLE DETAILS
Cable Type
Cable Size
(AWG) Insulation Color Code
Galvanic anode cable/core cable #10 or larger HMWPE Red Protected structure cable #10 or larger HMWPE Black
Unprotected structure cable #10 or larger HMWPE White
Electrical continuity bond cable See TABLE 3 HMWPE Black
2.06 CONTINUITY JOINT BONDS FOR PIPE
A. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1. Erico International Corp, Solon, OH.
2. Hoff Company, Centennial, CO.
B. Connections on a joint bond shall be welded or soldered. Mechanical or compression type connections are not permitted.
C. Bonds and welds shall exhibit sufficient strength and flexibility to allow thermal movement of the pipe after pipe backfill without cracking or breakage.
D. Make bond connections to pipe with an Engineer approved welding method.
E. Insulated or coated copper with exposed copper field coated to prevent galvanic corrosion of the pipe.
F. Joint bond cable size as indicated in Table 3.
2.07 CONDUIT
A. Rigid hot dipped galvanized steel conduit and fittings.
1. Threaded at one end (minimum).
2. Length as required for installation requirements.
3. Diameter based on cable needs: 2-inch minimum.
4. For cables installed above ground.
B. Schedule 40 PVC conduit and fittings.
1. Length as required for installation requirements.
2. Diameter based on cable needs: 2-inch minimum.
3. For cables installed between buried metalwork.
2.08 TEST STATION MOUNTING POST
A. As indicated on the Drawings.
Corrosion Protection Isolation
15320-9 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15320 (DraftFinal)
2.09 STRUCTURE CONNECTIONS
A. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1. Continental Industries, Inc. (Thermo-Weld), Tulsa, OK.
2. Erico Products Inc. (Cadweld), Cleveland, OH.
B. Exothermic metallurgical welds - Cable or strap to structure connections.
1. Thermite weld materials consist of wire sleeves, welders, and weld cartridges according to the weld manufacturer’s recommendations.
2. Exothermic metallurgical weld system designed for:
a. Cathodic protection systems.
b. Metallic substrate material.
c. Weld orientation.
d. For cable or strap, as appropriate.
3. Exothermic reaction must produce molten copper, which produces a permanent, high conductivity connection.
4. Exothermic welds:
a. Use a special alloy to provide minimum heat effect on substrate material. b. Shall have a current carrying capacity equal or better than that of the conductor.
2.10 DIELECTRIC COATING FOR STRUCTURE CONNECTIONS
A. Specifically designed for cathodic protection systems.
B. Applied with primer coat, as needed.
C. Suitable for intended environment.
D. Coat exposed weld nuggets, exposed cable, or structure metal using mastic coating.
1. In accordance with NSF 61 if subject to immersion in potable water.
E. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1. Carboline, St. Louis, MO.
2. Royston Laboratories, Pittsburgh, PA.
F. Product:
1. Bitumastic 50.
2. Roskote A51.
3. Royston Handy Cap IP.
2.11 ISOLATION FLANGE KITS
A. Complete assembly shall have an AMSE rating equal to or higher than that of the joint and pipeline.
B. Materials and pre-assembled isolating flange kits shall be suitable for the intended chemical exposure, operating temperatures, and operating pressures.
Corrosion Protection Isolation
15320-10 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15320 (DraftFinal) C. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1. Advanced Products and Systems, Scott, LA.
2. Central Plastics Co., Shawnee, OK.
3. GPT Industries, Houston, Texas.
D. Flange kit:
1. Full-face insulating gasket, an insulating sleeve for each bolt, insulating washers, and steel washers:
a. Pipe diameters up to 36 inches: 1 insulating washer and 1 steel washer on each side of flange for each bolt.
b. Pipe diameters larger than 36 inches: Insulating washers shall be sandwiched between a pair of matching steel washers on each side of the flange for each bolt.
2. Isolating gaskets:
a. Gasket retainers shall be full face, Type E, NEMA G-10 glass reinforced epoxy retainers with an ethylene propylene diene monomer (EPDM) rubber rectangular cross section O-ring seal.
b. Minimum total gasket thickness shall not be less than 1/8 inch. c. Gasket shall have the same outside diameter as the pipe flange. 1) For steel pipe, the gasket’s inside diameter shall be equal to the inside diameter of the pipe’s steel cylinder.
2) At valve to pipe connections where the inside diameters are not equal, the gasket’s inside diameter shall be equal to the smaller of the 2 inside diameters.
d. Certified in accordance with NSF 61.
e. Dielectric strength shall be not less than 550 volts per mil, and compressive strength shall be not less than 50,000 psi.
f. Installed within 6 months of date of manufacture.
g. Product:
1) Linebacker 61 insulating gasket, or equal.
3. Insulating sleeves:
a. Full-length one-piece Mylar or fiberglass reinforced epoxy (NEMA G-10 grade).
b. Dielectric strength shall be not less than 400 volts per mil. c. Length of the insulating sleeves shall provide an air gap between the end of the insulating sleeve and inside surface of the stud bolt nut with a tolerance of 1/32-inch minimum and 1/8-inch maximum.
1) Adjusted for the actual thickness of the steel washers and insulating washer thickness.
4. Insulating washers:
a. Fiberglass reinforced epoxy (NEMA G-10 grade).
b. Minimum thickness of 1/8 inch.
c. Dielectric strength shall not be less than 550 volts per mil, and compressive strength shall not be less than 50,000 psi. d. Inside diameter shall be sized to fit over the insulating sleeve’s outside diameter.
5. Steel washer:
a. In accordance with ASTM F436.
b. Inside and outside diameter shall match those of the insulating washers.
Corrosion Protection Isolation
15320-11 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15320 (DraftFinal) c. Able to freely rotate around the insulating sleeve.
d. Attention must be paid to the fit between the steel washers and the insulating sleeve to avoid twisting and cracking of the sleeves when the flange bolts are torqued.
2.12 WAX TAPE COATING SYSTEM FOR BURIED ISOLATING FLANGES AND DUCTILE IRON PIPE SMALLER THAN 6-INCH DIAMETER
A. General:
1. Apply a wax tape coating system in accordance with AWWA C217.
2. Consists of 3 parts: Surface primer, wax tape, and outer covering. a. All 3 parts shall be the product of the same manufacturer.
B. Primer:
1. Shall be a blend of petrolatum, plasticizer, and corrosion inhibitors having a paste like consistency.
2. Pour point of 100 degrees Fahrenheit to 110 degrees Fahrenheit and a flash point of 350 degrees Fahrenheit.
3. Trenton Wax-Tape Primer® or approved equal.
C. Wax tape:
1. Consists of a synthetic-fiber felt, saturated with a blend of high melt microcrystalline wax, solvents, and corrosion inhibitors.
2. Saturant pour point between 125 degrees Fahrenheit and 130 degrees Fahrenheit.
3. Dielectric strength equal to a minimum of 100 volts per mil.
4. Thickness shall be 50 mils to 90 mils in 6-inch wide rolls.
5. Trenton No. 1 Wax-Tape or approved equal.
D. Outer covering:
1. Consists of 2 layers of a plastic wrapper at total of one 150-gauge or three 50-gauge wound together as a single sheet.
2. Plastic wrapper material a clear polyvinylidene chloride, high cling membranes wound together as a single sheet.
3. Trenton Poly-Ply™ or approved equal.
2.13 CONCRETE FOOTINGS
A. ASTM C94, Ready-Mixed Concrete.
2.14 SAND BACKFILL
A. ASTM C33, fine aggregate.
2.15 PERMANENT REFERENCE ELECTRODES
A. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1. Corrpro Inc., Chicago, IL.
2. GMC Electrical, Inc, Corona, CA.
Corrosion Protection Isolation
15320-12 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15320 (DraftFinal) B. Material:
1. Permanent type, copper-copper sulfate reference electrode.
2. Suitable for intended environment.
3. Minimum design life of 25 years.
C. Cable:
1. As specified in Table 2 of this Section.
2. Length of 25 feet, or as required for splice free installation.
D. Backfill:
1. As recommended by the electrode manufacturer.
2.16 CORROSION COUPONS
A. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1. Cott Manufacturing, Wexford, PA.
2. M.C. Miller, Sebastian, FL.
B. Steel coupon:
1. EDI Model UI-MS, board or adjustable mount as required, with activating magnet.
2. Exposed steel area to be 0.01 square feet.
3. Provide with 2 cables, sized as specified in Table 2 of this Section.
C. Coupon holder:
1. PVC fitting made to fit onto a 2-inch PVC pipe.
2. Model COU175.
D. Switch:
1. Magnetic reed switch, normally closed, with connecting leads and terminals or equivalent.
2.17 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Test station wire terminations:
1. One-piece, tin-plated crimp on ring tongue connector.
B. Compression connectors:
1. For in-line and tap splices shall be “C” taps made of conductive wrought copper.
2. Sized to fit the wires being spliced.
3. Applied with the crimp tool and die recommended by the manufacturer for the wire and tap connector size.
4. Burndy Type “YC”, or equal.
C. Electrical tape:
1. Linerless rubber high-voltage splicing tape and vinyl electrical tape suitable for moist and wet environments.
2. Scotch 130C and Scotch 88.
Corrosion Protection Isolation
15320-13 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15320 (DraftFinal) D. Warning tape:
1. Polyethylene for anode cables:
a. Minimum 3-inches wide.
b. Red or yellow with black lettering.
c. Suitable for direct burial.
2. Print full length of tape with the following:
a. “Caution - Cathodic Protection Cable Buried Below”.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Electrical isolation:
1. Structures to be cathodically protected shall be electrically isolated from other extraneous metal (e.g., casings, foreign structures, and rebar in concrete).
B. Dielectric materials, other than designated non-metallic carrier pipe, that might cause shielding of cathodic protection current (e.g., plastic debris) shall not be left around structures, including areas within excavation sites.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Galvanic anodes:
1. Install anodes in horizontal orientation to surface grade and parallel to pipe longitudinal axis.
a. Anode details:
1) Campus Oaks:
a) Ductile iron 16-inch diameter PW pipe.
(1) Number of anodes: 3.
(2) Anode separation distance: 23 feet.
b) Ductile iron 10-inch diameter AF pipe.
(1) Number of anodes: 3.
(2) Anode separation distance: 33 feet.
2) Misty Wood:
a) Ductile iron 16-inch diameter PW pipe.
(1) Number of anodes: 6.
(2) Anode separation distance: 38 feet.
b) Ductile iron 10-inch diameter AF pipe.
(1) Number of anodes: 3.
(2) Anode separation distance: 33 feet.
b. Minimum 1 anode length from non-metallic structures. c. Depth:
1) Minimum 5 feet underneath pipe.
2. Remove outer water-resistant covering (plastic or paper bag) on pre-packaged anodes before installation. Do not damage wettable covering containing backfill and magnesium.
3. Do not support anodes by their cables.
4. Do not wet pre-packaged anodes until they are in the ground, surrounded with compacted earth, and covered by at least 1 foot of compacted backfill.
Corrosion Protection Isolation
15320-14 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15320 (DraftFinal)
5. Do not connect anodes to structures at test stations; energize systems only at time of testing.
6. Connect individual galvanic anodes to structures through individual calibrated
0.01 ohm shunts within the test station for current measurement (1 shunt for each anode).
a. As indicated on the Drawings.
7. Connect individual anodes to structure through variable resistors within test station to allow for adjusting output current from individual anodes (if necessary).
a. As indicated on the Drawings.
B. Test stations:
1. General:
a. Mount and wire the test stations as indicated on the Drawings. b. Uniquely label each test station.
c. Cable sizes as specified in Table 2 of this Section.
2. Location:
a. Readily accessible.
b. Not likely to be damaged or interfere with personnel and/or equipment (e.g., adjacent to above ground structures).
c. As close to the structure connection as possible.
d. Cathodic protection test stations:
1) Locations:
a) As indicated on the Drawings.
e. Isolation test stations:
1) As indicated on the Drawings.
2) Locations:
a) Each isolation joint flange kit.
3) Where multiple isolation flanges are connected in electrically parallel configurations, only 1 isolation test station is required for each group. 4) Provide a pair of cables exothermically welded to the pipe on each side of the insulator, 2 cables on protected side and 2 cables on unprotected side, for a total of 4 cables per isolation. 5) Where isolation and cathodic protection test stations are next to each other, combine into one test station.
C. Cable:
1. Inspect for insulation defects prior to backfilling:
a. Replace cable if insulation is damaged.
2. Install without kinks, stresses, and/or splices.
3. Identify origin of cables terminating in an enclosure:
a. Cable identification as to distinct originating structure or anode as indicated on the Drawings.
b. Printed letters on shrinkable label attached to cables clearly visible within the enclosure.
c. Encase printed labels in clear heat shrink tubing.
4. Connect to test station with crimped, ring-tongue connectors.
5. Size of cable as specified in Table 2 of this Section.
6. Run cable through PVC conduit underground and rigid galvanized conduit once cable emerges from ground, as indicated on the Drawings.
Corrosion Protection Isolation
15320-15 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15320 (DraftFinal)
7. Structure cables:
a. 2 cables per structure at each test station.
b. Connect cables to structures by exothermic metallurgical welding as indicated on the Drawings.
1) Make exothermic metallurgical bond in accordance with the bonding supply manufacturer’s instructions.
2) Coat bare copper, weld nugget, and ferrous materials at metallurgical bonds with an approved dielectric metallurgical bond coating. a) Allow dielectric material to cure before repair of damaged structure coating or lining.
8. Anode cables (also called anode core cable):
a. Installed free of splices.
b. Terminate at the test station, as indicated on the Drawings, or connect to the buried metallic structure by exothermic metallurgical welding as indicated on the Drawings.
1) Follow the same procedure indicated for structure cables above.
9. Electrical continuity joint bonds:
a. Number and length of bond cable per TABLE 3.
b. Connect cables or straps to structure by exothermic metallurgical welding as indicated on the Drawings.
1) Follow the same procedure indicated for structure cables above. 2) For straps, follow manufacturer instructions.
D. Isolation:
1. Install to electrically isolate the structure from other metallic structures or dissimilar metals.
2. Align and install isolation joints according to the manufacturer’s recommendations to avoid damaging materials.
3. Test before and after backfill to ensure isolation is satisfactory.
E. Electrical continuity joint bonds:
1. Provide metallurgical bonds at mechanical type joints (e.g., non-welded joints) between ferrous parts included in a particular cathodic protection system as specified in this Section, or as necessary to ensure electrical continuity.
2. Minimum number, type, and size of bond per bond joint is shown in Table 3.
3. Bond cable installed with sufficient slack to prevent stress or tugging:
a. Allow for minimum 1/2-inch joint movement.
4. Bond Details:
a. Ductile Iron pipe joints:
1) Joint bond size and number per joint, based on Table 3.
TABLE 3 -BOND DETAILS
Bond Location Bond Type BOND LENGTH Number of Bonds
16-inch Ductile Iron Pipe
Cable #6 AWG 18”- 24” 2
10-inch Ductile Iron Pipe
Cable #6 AWG 18”- 24” 2
Corrosion Protection Isolation
15320-16 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15320 (DraftFinal) F. Reference electrode:
1. Remove plastic or paper wrapper and place within the pipeline trench excavation 6 inches from pipe in a vertical position.
2. Activate in accordance with the manufacturer’s written instructions.
3. Backfill hole with select native material in 6-inch layers and hand tamp each layer around reference electrode.
4. Exercise care not to strike reference cell or lead wire with tamper.
5. Terminate reference electrode cable in test station, free of splices.
G. Coupon:
1. Place within 6 inches of pipe and reference electrode.
2. Terminate each cable in test station, free of splices.
3. Connect coupon to structure with magnetic switch as indicated on the Drawings.
3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Equipment:
1. Portable multimeter: Fluke Model 179 or equivalent. Minimum input impedance of 10 megohms and capable of measuring DC voltages between 0.1 millivolt to 100 volts.
2. Portable CSE reference electrode.
3. Insulation checker: M.C. Miller Model MIC or equivalent.
4. Low resistance ohmmeter: Megger Model DLRO10 or equivalent, capable of 10 ampere test current with resolution of 0.1 micro-ohms.
B. Structure-to-soil potential:
1. Verify that each test station is properly labeled.
a. Unique identifier and GPS coordinates.
b. Cable identification in test stations.
2. Conduct testing in least 2 testing cycles:
a. First testing cycle:
1) Prior to energizing system:
a) Test structure electrical continuity.
(1) Determine voltage difference unchanged between structure cables.
(2) Test station integrity.
(a) Determine voltage difference between cables within
each test station.
b) Measure native structure-to-soil potentials of coupons. (1) At each individual test station location.
(2) Place portable reference electrode as close to buried metalwork as possible for structure-to-soil potential
measurements.
(3) Saturate ground with water to reduce reference cell contact resistance.
2) After the system is energized:
a) Determine protective (uncorrected) and polarized
structure-to-soil potentials of coupons in accordance with NACE TM0497.
(1) At each individual test station location.
Corrosion Protection Isolation
15320-17 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15320 (DraftFinal) (2) Place portable reference electrode as close to buried metalwork as possible for structure-to-soil potential
measurements.
(3) Saturate ground with water to reduce reference cell contact resistance.
b) Determine current output of each individual anode in test stations.
c) Adjust variable resistor setting for each anode to obtain required balance of current output (if variable resistors are required). b. Second and subsequent testing cycles:
1) Time between testing cycles shall be 30 to 60 days.
2) Cathodic protection system shall not be adjusted between testing cycles.
3) Repeat testing required after energizing the system during the first testing cycle.
4) If data indicates that cathodic protection system requires adjustment to meet requirements, adjust cathodic protection system and conduct subsequent testing cycles within 30 to 60 days.
c. Troubleshoot and correct problems.
3. Submit final data after last testing cycle when performance criteria have been met and no further adjustments are needed.
C. Electrical continuity:
1. Test completed continuity bonds prior to and after backfilling.
2. Quality control test shall be performed on bonds after installation but before backfilling or closing the structure.
3. Repair any damaged pipe coating as specified.
D. Isolation:
1. Check isolation flanges, couplings, sleeves, and washers to ensure adequate electrical isolation prior to backfilling or closing the structure using a portable multimeter, ohmmeter, or isolation checker in accordance with the manufacturer’s written instructions.
2. Verify isolation of bolts used with isolation kits.
3. Use isolation checker in accordance with the manufacturer’s written instructions, or other approved method.
4. Conduct additional isolation testing as needed to ensure that isolation is not electrically shorted to other equipment or concrete reinforcement.
5. Replace damaged or defective isolation identified during testing.
END OF SECTION
Plumbing Systems
15400-1 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15400 (DraftFinal) SECTION 15400
PLUMBING SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
1. Requirements for materials and installation of plumbing systems.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. Abbreviations:
1. gpf - gallons per flush.
2. gph - gallons per hour.
3. gpm - gallons per minute.
4. psig - pounds per square inch, gauge.
B. Standards:
1. American Concrete Institute (ACI).
2. American Gas Association (AGA).
3. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME).
a. B16.3 - Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings: Classes 150 and 300. b. B16.12 - Cast Iron Threaded Drainage Fittings.
4. American Society of Sanitary Engineering (ASSE):
a. 1070 - Performance Requirements for Water Temperature Limiting Devices.
5. American Water Works Association (AWWA):
a. C511 - Reduced-Pressure Principle Backflow Prevention. b. C700 - Standard for Cold-Water Meters—Displacement Type, Bronze Main Case.
c. C702 - Standard for Cold-Water Meters—Compound Type.
6. Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA).
7. ASTM International (ASTM):
a. A48 - Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings. b. A53 - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless.
c. A74 - Standard Specification for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings. d. A153 - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware.
e. A888 - Standard Specification for Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings for Sanitary and Storm Drain, Waste, and Vent Piping Applications. f. B32 - Standard Specification for Solder Metal.
g. B88 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube. h. B813 - Standard Specification for Liquid and Paste Fluxes for Soldering of Copper and Copper Alloy Tube.
i. B828 - Standard Specification for Making Capillary Joints by Soldering of Copper and Copper Alloy Tube and Fittings.
Plumbing Systems
15400-2 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15400 (DraftFinal) j. C177 - Standard Test Method for Steady-State Heat Flux Measurements and Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Guarded-Hot-Plate Apparatus.
k. C518 - Standard Test Method for Steady-State Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus.
l. C547 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Pipe Insulation. m. C552 - Standard Specification for Cellular Glass Thermal Insulation. n. C564 - Standard Specification for Rubber Gaskets for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings.
o. C1136 - Standard Specification for Flexible, Low Permeance Vapor Retarders for Thermal Insulation.
p. D256 - Standard Test Methods for Determining the Izod Pendulum Impact Resistance of Plastics.
q. D297 - Standard Test Methods for Rubber Products—Chemical Analysis. r. D395 - Standard Test Methods for Rubber Property—Compression Set. s. D412 - Standard Test Methods for Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic Elastomers—Tension.
t. D638 - Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics. u. D790 - Standard Test Methods for Flexural Properties of Unreinforced and Reinforced Plastics and Electrical Insulating Materials. v. D792 - Standard Test Methods for Density and Specific Gravity (Relative Density) of Plastics by Displacement.
w. D1784 - Standard Specification for Rigid Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Compounds and Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Compounds. x. D1785 - Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40, 80, and 120.
y. D2240 - Standard Test Method for Rubber Property—Durometer Hardness. z. D2466 - Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 40.
aa. D2467 - Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80.
bb. D2564 - Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Piping Systems.
cc. D2665 - Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Drain, Waste, and Vent Pipe and Fittings.
dd. E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
ee. E96 - Standard Test Methods for Gravimetric Determination of Water Vapor Transmission Rate of Materials.
ff. F438 - Standard Specification for Socket-Type Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 40.
gg. F439 - Standard Specification for Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80.
hh. F441 - Standard Specification for Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40 and 80.
ii. F493 - Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe and Fittings.
jj. F593 - Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bolts, Hex Cap Screws, and Studs.
kk. F594 - Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Nuts.
Plumbing Systems
15400-3 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15400 (DraftFinal) ll. F645 - Standard Guide for Selection, Design, and Installation of Thermoplastic Water- Pressure Piping Systems.
8. California Code of Regulations (CCR):
a. Title 24 - Building Standard Code.
9. International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials (IAPMO):
a. IS 03 - Copper plumbing Tube Pipe and Fittings.
10. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):
a. 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1,000 V Maximum).
11. Plumbing and Drainage Institute (PDI):
a. WH-201 - Water Hammer Arresters Standard.
12. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):
a. 94 - Standard for Tests for Flammability of Plastic Materials for Parts in Devices and Appliances.
13. United States Environment Protection Agency (EPA): Water Sense.
1.03 TERMINOLOGY
A. The words and terms listed below are not defined terms that require initial capital letters, but, when used in this Section, have the indicated meaning.
1. Buried: Piping that is installed below buildings, foundations, or finish grade, either in soil or encased in concrete in soil.
2. Exterior: Piping that is installed outside a building or within a pipe trench or tunnel.
3. Flame spread and smoke density: Burning characteristics determined in accordance with ASTM E84.
4. Interior: Piping that is installed inside a building.
5. K factor: Thermal conductivity determined in accordance with ASTM C177 or ASTM C518.
6. Mineral fiber: Fibers manufactured of glass, rock, or slag processed from a molten state, with or without a binder.
7. Water vapor permeance: Water vapor transmission determined in accordance with ASTM E96 and expressed in units of perm-inch.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish Submittals as specified in Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures.
B. Manufacturer’s instructions.
C. Shop Drawings:
1. System layout, mechanical, electrical power, and control diagrams.
2. Nameplate information.
3. Materials.
4. Coatings and linings.
5. Rough-in drawings.
6. Supports, vibration isolators, and details.
7. Primary and ancillary equipment.
8. Proposed cutting and patching.
9. Maximum recommended equipment vibration levels and field-testing method.
10. Copy of factory test results.
Plumbing Systems
15400-4 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15400 (DraftFinal) D. Certificates: As specified in the Agreement and Contract RFP in Volumes 1 and 2:
1. American Backflow Prevention Association for backflow prevention assembly.
2. National Science Foundation for products when specified.
E. Field testing documentation.
F. Warranties.
1.05 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Roof coordination:
1. Provide plumbing equipment roof penetrations information required in the preparation of roofing drawings, including, but not limited to:
a. Location.
b. Diameter.
c. Configuration of penetration and the surround.
2. Provide roof mounted plumbing equipment information required in the preparation of roofing drawings, including, but not limited to:
a. Location.
b. Size.
c. Weight.
d. Anchoring and support details.
1.06 WARRANTY
A. Provide warranty as specified in Section 01783 - Warranties and Bonds.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. Devices and fixtures shall be in accordance with CCR Title 24.
2.02 PLUMBING FIXTURES
A. General:
1. ADA compliant unless specifically stated otherwise in the fixture requirements.
2. Exposed fixture fittings and piping:
a. Polished chrome.
3. Stops:
a. Fixtures, except showers, shall have stops at the fixtures’ service. b. Stops for laboratory equipment, and for other equipment or fixtures for which stops have not been otherwise specified in this Section, shall be chrome-plated straight pattern compression stops or chrome-plated angle pattern compression stops.
Plumbing Systems
15400-5 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15400 (DraftFinal)
4. Faucets:
a. Motion sensor activated unless manual levers are specially stated in the fixture requirements.
1) Provide 6 V DC transformers using 115 V power or 6 V DC CR-P2 lithium battery (or similar) when Drawings do not show 115 V connection.
2) Manual levers: Indexed.
b. Brass construction, 1/4 turn ceramic disc valve cartridge. c. Vacuum breaker.
d. Integral check valve.
e. Flow rates specified for an inlet pressure of 60 psig.
5. P-traps:
a. Cast-iron, adjustable with metal strainer, gaskets, and cleanout plug.
6. Escutcheons to be used for at wall, floor, and ceiling penetrations:
a. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1) Keeney.
2) Plumbing Products.
b. IAPMO listed.
c. Material: Chrome-plated steel plate.
d. Hinged, spring loaded, and sized appropriately for the piping.
7. Manufacturer to supply necessary mounting hardware and installation fittings suitable to complete the installation, including, but not limited to:
a. Faucets.
b. Brass braided hoses.
c. Carriers.
d. P-traps.
e. Toilet seats.
8. Drawings indicate fixtures using designated style identifiers.
B. Service sinks:
1. General:
a. ADA compliance not required.
b. Sink manufacturer to supply faucet, mounting hardware, and installation fittings.
c. Faucet:
1) Exposed yoke, wall- mounted, top braced.
2) Rigid spout with 3/4-inch threaded hose end and bucket hook. 3) Deliver not more than 15 gpm.
4) Manual lever.
d. Center drains with strainer.
e. Provide 5-foot hose with wall hook and rigid end spout at each service sink.
2. Type SS-1: Enamel:
a. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1) American Standard, Akron.
2) Kohler Co.
b. Wall-mounted.
c. Bowl:
1) Cast-iron with acid-resisting enamel interior.
2) Overall nominal: 24 inches wide by 12 inches deep.
3) Stainless steel rim guard.
Plumbing Systems
15400-6 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15400 (DraftFinal) d. Backsplash:
1) 9 inch high, plain.
3. Type SS-3: Free standing:
a. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1) American Standard.
2) E.L. Mustee, 19F Utilatub.
b. Free standing.
c. Bowl:
1) One-piece molded thermoplastic.
2) 13-inch tub with 18 gallon capacity.
d. Dual lever, 6-inch swing spout faucet.
1) With aerator and hose end.
2) Not more than 15 gpm.
C. Water closets and urinals:
1. General:
a. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1) American Standard.
2) Kohler.
b. EPA WaterSense labeled.
2. Style WC-1: Water closet, flush valve:
a. Bowl:
1) Wall mounted.
2) Elongated white vitreous china.
3) Exposed top stud.
b. Flush valve:
1) Manual:
a) Self-cleaning brass piston.
b) Backpressure vacuum breaker.
c) Non-hold-open type handle.
d) Flush volume adjustable.
D. Lavatories:
1. General:
a. Bowl material:
1) White vitreous china.
b. Faucet:
1) Battery operated:
a) Open time adjustable.
2) Flow rate: 0.5 gpm maximum.
2. Style LAV-1:
a. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1) American Standard.
2) Kohler, Pinoir.
b. Wall mounted.
c. Bowl:
1) 22 inch by 18 inch.
Plumbing Systems
15400-7 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15400 (DraftFinal)
2.03 PLUMBING AND DRAINAGE PRODUCTS
A. Water hammer arrestors:
1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a. Jay R. Smith.
b. Josam.
c. Zurn.
2. Determine manufacturer model:
a. Based on Table 1 in accordance with PDI WH-201.
b. Working pressure: 125 psig.
c. Static pressure: 250 psig.
3. Temperature: 300 degrees Fahrenheit.
4. Provide water hammer arrestors on each fixture supply line branch.
5. Casing and bellows.
a. Material: Type 304 stainless steel.
b. Welded bellows.
6. Hermetically sealed air cushion.
B. Type HB-1: Hose bib stations:
1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a. Flexon Pro Series.
b. Gilmore Group.
2. Hose bib: Size and mounting requirements as indicated on the Drawings.
3. Hose rack: Type and installation as indicated on the Drawings.
4. Hose:
a. Length: 75 feet.
b. Size: 1 inch.
c. Commercial/industrial grade rubber hose.
5. Hose nozzle:
a. Spray: 7-pattern select-a-spray with vinyl grip.
b. Hold-open clip for continuous spraying.
c. Material: Rust resistant stainless steel spring.
d. Lifetime leak proof seal.
C. Fixed air gaps:
1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a. Josam.
b. Zurn, Z1025.
2. Provide and size as indicated on the Drawings.
3. Coated cast iron.
4. Slip joint inlet and no-hub outlet.
5. Threaded outlets.
D. Trap primers:
1. Electronic trap primers:
a. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1) Precision Plumbing Products PTS.
2) Sioux Chief.
b. Provide electronic trap primer and distribution unit as indicated on the Drawings.
Plumbing Systems
15400-8 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15400 (DraftFinal) c. Design:
1) Supply a minimum of 2 ounces of water at 20 pounds per square inch gauge at setting of 10 seconds every 24 hours.
2) Manifold: Type L copper tubing in accordance with ASTM B88. 3) Backflow prevention.
4) Power: 120 volts.
5) Pre-assembled in a surface mounted cabinet.
a) Provide enclosure as specified in Section 16050 - Common Work Results for Electrical.
E. Cleanouts:
1. Cleanouts:
a. Cast-iron ferrule, countersunk plug, gastight and watertight seal. b. Adjustable cleanout head extension.
c. Nickel-bronze top and securing screw.
d. Type FCO-1: Floor cleanouts, finished floors:
1) Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a) Josam Co.
b) Zurn Ind., Inc., ZN1400.
2) For finished floors.
3) Traffic: Heavy wheel/vehicular traffic.
e. Type FCO-2: Floor cleanouts, unfinished floors:
1) Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a) Josam Co., 55000.
b) Zurn Ind., Inc.
2) For unfinished floors.
f. Type FCO-3: Floor cleanout, exterior, in asphalt or ground areas:
1) Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a) Josam Co., 55000.
b) Zurn Ind., Inc.
2) Rated for outdoor use.
F. Drains:
1. Type, shape, and size as indicated on the Drawings with connections suitable for the piping system.
a. Provide drains of one type from the same manufacturer.
2. Type FD-1: Floor drain, finished floors, pedestrian traffic:
a. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1) Josam, 30000-A.
2) Zurn.
b. Round, adjustable strainer head, floor level grate.
c. Body material: Coated cast iron.
d. Strainer:
1) Material: Nickel bronze.
2) Size:
a) 6 inch diameter for 3-inch drain.
b) 8 inch diameter for 4-inch drain.
3. Type FD-2: Floor drain, finished floors, heavy wheel traffic:
a. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1) Josam.
2) Zurn Z521.
Plumbing Systems
15400-9 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15400 (DraftFinal) b. Adjustable extension frame with heavy-duty tractor grate. 1) Size: 12 inch diameter.
c. Material: Resin-coated cast iron top.
d. No-hub outlet.
e. Seepage pan with membrane flashing clamp.
4. Type TD-1: Trench drain:
a. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1) Josam.
2) Zurn, Z664.
b. Modular linear trench drain.
c. Size: 6 inches wide by 12 inches long modules.
d. Bottom outlet, with secondary dome strainer.
e. Overall length as indicated on the Drawings.
2.04 PLUMBING PIPING SYSTEMS
A. As indicated on the Drawings in the Piping Schedule or specified in Section 15052 - Common Work Results for General Piping.
B. Cast iron soil pipe piping system:
1. In accordance with ASTM A74.
2. Bell-and-spigot, service weight.
a. Above ground: Hubless in accordance with CISPI 310.
3. Joints underground: Positive double seal compression type gaskets in accordance with ASTM C564.
4. Joints aboveground:
a. American standard taper screw threads, cut clean and made up with Teflon™ tape or an acceptable paste thread compound applied to the male threads only.
b. Slip joints permitted only in trap seals or on the inlet side of the traps. 1) Do not use long screws or bushings.
5. Cast iron drainage pattern fittings.
6. Couplings for “No Hub”: Stainless steel corrugated shield and clamp assembly over a molded 1-piece neoprene sealing sleeve, in accordance with ASTM A888.
7. Line pipe and fittings inside and coat outside with bituminous coating, except as follows:
a. Exposed, above ground piping:
1) Line inside only.
2) Coat outside with EPU-M-1, epoxy polyurethane, as specified in Section 09960 - High-Performance Coatings.
a) Color: Coordinate with the Owner.
8. Pipe and fittings shall be marked with the collective trademark of the Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute.
C. Seamless copper water tube:
1. Type: ASTM B88:
a. Exposed copper piping or tubing: Type L hard-drawn, rigid. b. Copper tubing buried in the ground or in plastic conduit: Type K soft annealed.
Plumbing Systems
15400-10 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15400 (DraftFinal)
2. Fittings: Solder type forged or wrought copper.
a. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1) Crawford Fitting Co., Swagelok.
2) Hoke, Gyrolok.
3) Parker.
3. Solder: ASTM B32, Alloy Grade Sb5.
4. Flux: ASTM B813.
5. Dielectric insulating unions or fittings:
a. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1) Mueller Co.
2) Watts Series 3001A.
6. Special thread to tube adapters:
a. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1) Crawford Fitting Co., Swagelok.
2) Hoke, Gyrolok.
3) Parker.
D. PVC piping system:
1. Pipe: Designation PVC 1120 in accordance with ASTM D1785:
a. Pipe and fittings: Extruded from Type I, Grade 1, Class 12454 B material in accordance with ASTM D1784.
b. PVC pipe: Schedule 40, unless otherwise specified.
2. Fittings:
a. Supplied by pipe manufacturer.
b. Pressure fittings: In accordance with ASTM D2466 or ASTM D2467. c. DWV fittings: In accordance with ASTM D2665.
3. Solvent cement: In accordance with ASTM D2564:
a. Chemical service: For PVC pipe in chemical service, provide the following primer and cement, or equal:
1) Primer: IPS Corp Type P-70™.
2) Cement: IPS Corp Type 724™ cement or cement certified by the manufacturer for chemical service.
2.05 WALL AND FLOOR SEALS
A. Single seal.
B. Seal element: Nitrile with the following physical characteristics:
1. ASTM D297 Specific Gravity: 1.15.
2. ASTM D395 Compression Set (22 hours at 158 degrees Fahrenheit):
45 percent.
3. ASTM D412 Elongation at Break: 300 percent.
4. ASTM D412 Tensile Strength: 1,300 psi.
5. ASTM D2240 Durometer Hardness (Shore A): 50±5.
C. Pressure plate: Reinforced nylon polymer:
1. ASTM D256 IZOD Impact/Notch: 11.1 ft-lb/in.
2. ASTM D638 Elongation (Break): 11 percent.
3. ASTM D638 Tensile Strength (Yield): 20,000 psi.
4. ASTM D790 Flexural Modulus: 1,124,000 psi.
Plumbing Systems
15400-11 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15400 (DraftFinal)
5. ASTM D790 Flexural Strength (Yield): 30,750 psi.
6. ASTM D792 Specific Gravity: 1.38.
D. Bolts: Type 316 stainless steel in accordance with ASTM F593, minimum tensile strength of 85,000 psi.
E. Nuts: Type 316 stainless steel in accordance with ASTM F594, minimum tensile strength of 85,000 psi.
2.06 ANTI-SEIZE LUBRICANT
A. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1. Bostik, Never Seez.
2. Oil Research Center.
B. Use with assembly of stainless steel nuts and bolts.
2.07 WATER HEATERS
A. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1. A.O. Smith Corp.
2. State Ind., Inc.
B. General:
1. Size and requirements as indicated on the Drawings.
2. Provide with temperature limiting device in accordance with ASSE 1070.
3. Tanks:
a. Glass lined.
b. Exterior steel casing with factory standard enamel finish. c. 2 inches minimum fiberglass insulation.
d. Pressure tested to 150 psig.
e. ASME rated temperature and pressure relief valve.
f. Magnesium anode and tank cleanout.
g. Adjustable to store up to 180 degrees Fahrenheit water. h. Water heaters shall meet the requirements in accordance with CCR Title 24.
i. Provide the manufacturer’s standard bracing in accordance with applicable codes.
4. Warranty:
a. Special warranty:
1) Duration: Provide 3-year warranty.
C. Tankless electric:
1. High temperature limit switch with automatic reset.
2. Flow switch.
3. Maximum operating pressure of 150 psig.
4. Heating elements:
a. Material: Nichrome high efficiency.
b. Automatic temperature control.
c. Externally adjustable setting.
d. Replaceable configuration.
Plumbing Systems
15400-12 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15400 (DraftFinal) e. UL listed.
5. Compression fittings.
6. Water hammer arrestor.
7. Power: As indicated on the Drawings and as scheduled.
8. Type WH-1: Water heater, tanked, single lavatory:
a. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1) Eemax, SPEX.
2) Keltech.
b. Heating module with thermostatic control: 1 module.
c. Temperature rise 40 degrees Fahrenheit at 0.5 gpm.
d. Flow actuated at 0.2 gpm.
2.08 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS
A. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1. Febco backflow prevention:
a. LF860, all sizes.
2. Zurn/Wilkins:
a. 975XL for 1/2 inch through 2 inch.
b. 375AST for sizes 2-1/2 inch, 3 inch, 8 inch, and 10 inch. c. 375 and 375DA for sizes 4 inch and 6 inch.
3. Watts regulator: Series LF909.
B. Design: Reduced pressure chamber type in accordance with AWWA C511.
C. Shutoff valves:
1. 2-inch and smaller: Provide with full-port, quarter turn, resilient seated ball valves.
2. Larger than 2-inch: Provide with resilient seated, outside stem and yoke gate valves.
2.09 PIPE INSULATION
A. General:
1. Insulation thicknesses: Provide insulation thickness in inches in accordance with Table 1 in accordance with the 2021 International Energy Conservation Code (IECC). Insulation thickness shown is nominal. Manufacturing tolerance of 15 percent variation is permissible.
2. Insulation conductivity and nominal pipe size as specified in Table 1.
Table 1 - Insulation Thickness Requirements
Fluid Operating
Temperature
Range And
Usage (°F)
Insulation Conductivity Nominal Pipe or Tube Size (inches) Conductivity
Btu x in./(h x ft2
x °F)
Mean Rating
Temperature
(°F) <1
1 to
<1-1/2
1-1/2
to <4
4 to
<8 >8
>350 0.32-0.34 250 4.5 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0
251-350 0.29-0.32 200 3.0 4.0 4.5 4.5 4.5
201-250 0.27-0.30 150 2.5 2.5 2.5 3.0 3.0
141-200 0.25-0.29 125 1.5 1.5 2.0 2.0 2.0
Plumbing Systems
15400-13 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15400 (DraftFinal) Table 1 - Insulation Thickness Requirements
Fluid Operating
Temperature
Range And
Usage (°F)
Insulation Conductivity Nominal Pipe or Tube Size (inches) Conductivity
Btu x in./(h x ft2
x °F)
Mean Rating
Temperature
(°F) <1
1 to
<1-1/2
1-1/2
to <4
4 to
<8 >8
105-140 0.21-0.28 100 1.0 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5
40-60 0.21-0.27 75 0.5 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0
<40 0.20-0.26 50 1 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5
3. Service designation and location requirements as specified in Table 2, including the following requirements.
a. Insulation type.
b. Jacket type.
c. Vapor barrier requirements.
Table 2 - Insulation Schedule
Service
Designation(1) Location(2)
Insulation
Type(3) Jacket Type(3)
Service
Temp. °F(4)
Vapor
Barrier
Hot Water Interior or
Exterior 1 or 2
Type 1 on Exterior
installations; none
required on Interior
installations
100-200
Install on
Type 2
insulation
Tepid Water Interior or
Exterior 1 or 2
Type 1 on Exterior
installations; none
required on Interior
installations
60-100
Install on
Type 2
insulation
Notes:
(1) Refer to Plumbing Piping Schedule as indicated on the Drawings for service designations. (2) Insulation jackets are not required for concealed interior installations in accordance with appliable plumbing code.
(3) Contractor may select from options listed.
(4) Unless noted otherwise, use service temperature range provided in this table to establish insulation thickness as required by Table 1.
(5) Insulate piping systems that are heat traced as indicated on the Drawings.
B. Type 1: Pipe insulation, closed cell elastomeric insulation:
1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a. Aeroflex USA Inc., Aerocel® AC.
b. Armacell®, AP Armaflex.
2. Insulation material: Closed cell elastomeric insulation.
3. Minimum temperature range: -40 degrees Fahrenheit to 220 degrees Fahrenheit.
4. K factor at 75 degrees Fahrenheit: Not more than 0.27 Btu-inch/hour-square feet-degrees Fahrenheit.
5. Fire ratings:
a. Flame spread: 25 or less.
Plumbing Systems
15400-14 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15400 (DraftFinal) b. Smoke density: 50 or less for insulation thicknesses up to 1.5 inches.
6. Joints: Seal with the manufacturer’s recommended contact adhesive to form continuous water barrier.
C. Type 2: Pipe insulation, preformed mineral fiberglass:
1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a. Johns Manville, Micro-Lok® HP.
b. Knauf Insulation.
c. Owens-Corning.
2. Insulation material: Preformed mineral fiberglass insulation made from glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin.
a. In accordance with ASTM C547, Class 1.
b. Provide with factory installed vapor barrier.
1) Material: White Kraft paper bound to aluminum foil in accordance with ASTM C1136, Type I.
2) Longitudinal lap seals: Pressure-sensitive, self-sealing longitudinal lap strip with factory applied adhesive.
3) Circumferential butt seals: 4-inch wide tape or similar properties or 4-inch wide overlap with adhesive seal.
4) Vapor barrier permeability: 0.02 perms or lower.
5) Vapor barrier flame spread rating: 25 or less.
3. Minimum temperature range: -0 degrees Fahrenheit to 850 degrees Fahrenheit.
4. K factor at 75 degrees Fahrenheit: Not more than 0.23 Btu-inch/hour-square feet degrees Fahrenheit.
5. Maximum moisture absorption, volume percent: 5.
D. Type 3: Pipe insulation, rigid cellular glass:
1. Manufacturers: The following or equal:
a. Owens-Corning, Foamglas® One™.
2. Insulation material: Rigid cellular glass in accordance with ASTM C552, Type II.
3. Temperature range: -450 degrees Fahrenheit to 900 degrees Fahrenheit.
4. K factor at 75 degrees Fahrenheit: Not more than 0.32 Btu-inch/hour-square feet-degrees Fahrenheit.
5. Minimum average density: 7.5 pounds per cubic foot.
6. Maximum moisture absorption, volume percent: 5.
7. Minimum compressive strength: 87 pounds per square inch.
8. Moisture permeability: 0.00 perm-inch.
E. Insulation jackets:
1. Type 1: Pipe insulation jacket, ultraviolet-resistant polyvinyl chloride:
a. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1) Johns Manville, Zeston® 2000 PVC.
2) Proto Corp., LoSMOKE PVC.
3) Speedline® Corp., Smoke-Safe™ PVC.
b. Material: Ultraviolet-resistant polyvinyl chloride jacketing, 20 mil minimum thickness.
c. Fire rating: 25 maximum flame spread, smoke developed 50 or less. d. Color: White.
e. Overlap: 1 inch minimum at joints and fittings.
f. Joint seal: PVC solvent welded or adhesive as recommended by the manufacturer.
Plumbing Systems
15400-15 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15400 (DraftFinal) g. Fittings: Factory made with full thickness insulation.
2. Type 2: Pipe insulation jacket, aluminum:
a. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1) Childers Products.
2) Premetco International.
b. Material: Aluminum, Alloy 5005; 0.016 inch (26-gauge) minimum thickness. c. Overlap: Overlap circumferential joints 4 inches minimum; overlap longitudinal joints 1-inch minimum; longitudinal joints oriented to minimize water entry.
d. Bands: 0.5 inch wide, 0.0508-inch (16-gauge) thick aluminum, same alloy as jacket or 0.0179-inch thick Type 304 stainless steel; install on 18-inch centers, uniformly spaced and at all fitting joints.
e. Joint seal: Apply waterproof adhesive at joints and overlaps. f. Fittings: Custom fit of same materials.
F. Vapor barriers:
1. Type 1: Pipe insulation vapor barrier, white Kraft paper bound to aluminum foil:
a. Material: White Kraft paper bound to aluminum foil in accordance with ASTM C1136, Type 1.
b. Permeability: 0.02 perms or lower.
c. Maximum flame spread rating: 25.
d. Edge seal: Pressure-sensitive tape lap seal.
e. Circumferential joints: 4-inch wide tape or 4-inch overlap with adhesive seal.
2. Type 2: Pipe insulation vapor barrier, mastic:
a. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1) Benjamin Foster, No. 30-76.
2) Childers Products.
3) Foster Products.
4) Insul-Coustic.
b. Material: Mastic.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Furnish and install vents required in drainage piping as part of the plumbing system, in accordance with Laws and Regulations.
B. Use anti-seize lubricant for stainless steel treads on fittings and fasteners.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Fixtures:
1. Rough-in fixtures and accessories in accordance with the dimensions supplied by the manufacturers of the fixtures.
2. Mount fixtures and accessories without cutting of finish surface.
Plumbing Systems
15400-16 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15400 (DraftFinal) B. Plumbing and drainage products:
1. Traps:
a. Install traps as near the fixtures as possible.
2. Sizes of equipment drains and of floor drains shall be as indicated on the Drawings.
C. Plumbing piping systems:
1. Cast iron soil pipe, PVC, polypropylene:
a. Where not specified otherwise, install horizontal piping with a grade of 1/4 inch per foot.
b. Provide vents, roof drains, and pipes flashed and made watertight at the roof with lead sheet flashings.
1) Minimum 4-pound lead sheet.
c. Extend flashing not less than 6 inches up the pipes, and counter flash with standard cast iron or malleable iron recessed roof couplings. d. Extend flashing for vents up to the top of the vent and turn down into the pipe.
e. Extend flashing shields not less than 8 inches from vent and pipe in all directions.
2. Copper tube:
a. Install in accordance with ASTM B828 and IAPMO IS 03. b. Install in straight runs, supported at intervals close enough to avoid sagging.
c. Make cuts square with a tubing cutter or with a 32-tooth hacksaw. 1) Provide a sizing tool to correct distortions.
d. Insulate piping as specified.
3. Black steel:
a. Install in accordance with applicable codes and regulations.
4. CPVC:
a. Install in accordance with ASTM F645 or the manufacturer’s published instructions for installation of piping, as applicable to the particular type of piping.
b. Provide molded transition fittings for transitions from plastic to metal or IPS pipe.
1) Do not thread pipe.
2) Do not use flanged transition fittings unless specifically indicated on the Drawings.
c. Locate unions where indicated on the Drawings, and elsewhere where required for adequate access and assembly of the piping system. d. Provide serrated nipples for transition from plastic pipe to rubber hose. e. Clean dirt and moisture from pipe and fittings.
f. Bevel pipe ends in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions with chamfering tool or file.
1) Remove burrs.
g. Use solvent cement and primer formulated for CPVC.
h. Use primer on pressure and non-pressure joints.
i. Do not solvent weld joints when ambient temperatures are below 40 degrees Fahrenheit or above 90 degrees Fahrenheit unless solvent cements specially formulated for these conditions are utilized.
Plumbing Systems
15400-17 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/15400 (DraftFinal) D. Wall and floor seals:
1. Provide seals at rated walls.
2. Provide seals between floors.
3. Use specified barrier seals for concrete/masonry wall and floor penetrations.
E. Anti-seize lubricant:
1. Use with assembly of stainless steel nuts and bolts.
F. Pipe insulation:
1. Install insulation and jacket materials in accordance with the manufacturer’s written instructions.
2. Fittings:
a. Insulate fittings by covering with mitered sections of insulation or utilize factory-made prefabricated fitting shapes.
b. Terminate preformed pipe jackets or covering at sufficient distance from flanges to permit removal of bolts.
c. Overlap flange and flanged fitting insulation on adjacent pipe covering by at least 2 inches.